05.

2007 Parameter list

11 Parameter list
Overview
Range of parameter Function
numbers
r000 Operating display
r001 - P050 General visualization parameters
P051- r059 Access authorization levels
r060 - r065 Definition of SIMOREG DC-MASTER converter
P067 - P079 Definition of SIMOREG DC-MASTER power section
P080 - P098 Setting values for converter control
P100 - P139 Definition of motor
P140 - P148 Definition of pulse encoder, speed sensing using pulse encoder
P150 - P165 Closed-loop armature current control, auto-reversing stage, armature gating unit
P169 - P191 Current limitation, torque limitation
P192 - P193 Auto-reversing stage, armature gating unit
P200 - P236 Speed controller (further parameters for the speed controller P550 - P567)
P250 - P265 Closed-loop field current control, field gating unit
P272 - P284 Closed-loop EMF control
P295 - P319 Ramp-function generator
P320 - P323 Setpoint processing
P330 Ramp-function generator
P351 - P364 Setting values for monitoring functions and limits
P370 - P399 Setting values for limit-value monitors
P401 - P416 Settable fixed values
P421 - P428 Fixed control bits
P430 - P445 Digital setpoint input (fixed setpoint, inching and crawling setpoints)
P450 - P453 Position sensing with pulse encoder
P455 - P458 Connector selector switches
P460 - P473 Motorized potentiometer
P480 - P485 Oscillation
P490 - P498 Definition of "Motor interface”
P500 - P503 Configuring of torque shell input
P509 - P515 Speed limiting controller
P519 - P530 Friction compensation
P540 - P546 Compensation of moment of inertia (dv/dt injection)
P550 - P567 Speed controller (further parameters for the speed controller P200 - P236)
P580 - P583 Field reversal
P590 - P597 Input quantities for signals
P600 - P647 Configuring of closed-loop control
P648 - P691 Control word, status word
P692 - P698 Further configuring measures
P700 - P746 Analog inputs (main actual value, main setpoint, selectable inputs)
P749 - P769 Analog outputs
P770 - P778 Binary outputs
P780 - P819 Configuration of serial interfaces on basic converter
P820 - P821 Deactivation of monitoring functions
r824 - r829 Compensation values
P830 Thyristor diagnosis
P831 - P899 Parameters for DriveMonitor and OP1S
P918 - P927 Profile parameters
r947 - P952 Fault memory
r953 - r960 Visualization parameters: Alarms

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-1

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

Range of parameter Function

numbers
r964 Device identification
r967 - r968 Visualization parameters: Control and status word
P970 - r999 Resetting and storing parameters, list of existing and modified P and r parameters
U005 - U007 Password protection, key/lock mechanism
n009 Processor utilization
n024 - U098 Miscellaneous
U116 - U118 Binector / connector converter for the serial interfaces
n560 - U583 Commutation monitoring
U607 - U608 Setpoint reduction
U616 Definition of the function of inputs and outputs
U619 Definition of the function of the relay output at terminals 109 / 110
U651 - U657 Starting pulse speed controller
U660 - U668 Evaluation of a 4-step master switch for cranes
U690 - n699 Configuration of SCB1 with SCI1
U710 - n739 Configuration of supplementary boards in board locations 2 and 3
U740 - U753 Configuration of the SIMOLINK board
U755 - n770 Configuration of the EB1 expansion board
U773 - n788 Configuration of the EB2 expansion board
U790 - U796 Configuration of the SBP pulse encoder board
U800 - n813 Configuration of paralleling interface
U819 - U835 Parameters for SIMOREG DC-MASTER Control Module (SIMOREG CM)
U838 Rated DC current of external field device
U840 Simulation operation
U845 - U909 Parameters for DriveMonitor
U910 Slot deactivation
U911 - n949 Parameters for DriveMonitor
n953 - n959 Parameters for DriveMonitor
U979 Parameter access for experts
n980 - n999 List of existing and modified U and n parameters

11-2 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

Parameters for technology software in the basic converter, S00 option

("freely assignable function blocks")
Range of parameter Function
numbers
n010 - n023 Displays
U099 Settable fixed values
U100 - U107 Triggering of faults and alarms
U110 - U115 Connector/binector converters, binector/connector converters
U120 - U171 Mathematical functions
U172 - U173 Processing of connectors (averager)
U175 - U218 Limiter, limit-value monitors
U220 - U259 Processing of connectors
U260 - U299 Integrators, DT1 elements, characteristics, dead zones, setpoint branching
U300 - U303 Simple ramp-function generator
U310 - U313 Multiplexer
n314 - U317 Counter
U318 - U411 Logic functions
U415 - U474 Storage elements, timers and binary signal selector switches
U480 - U512 Technology controller
U515 - U523 Velocity/speed calculators
U525 - U529 Variable moment of inertia
U530 - U545 PI controller
U550 - U554 Closed-loop control elements
U670 - U677 Position/positional deviation acquisition
U680 - U684 Root extractor
U950 - U952 Sampling times
U960 - U969 Altering the processing sequence of function blocks
U977 - n978 Enabling of technology software in basic unit, S00 option ("freely assignable function blocks")

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-3

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

Overview of abbreviations
Example:
PNU Description Value range No. indices See
[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P520 Friction at 0% speed 0.0 to 100.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* 1) [%] FS=0.0 5) P051 ≥ 20
Setting as % of converter rated DC current or converter rated torque
2) 0.1%4) Type: O2 3) Online6)
FDS
8) 9)
(G153)
10)

1) An under the parameter number means that the parameter requires confirmation, i.e. the altered value
*
does not take effect until the P key is pressed.
2) Abbreviation indicating that the parameter belongs to a data set (refers only to indexed parameters) (see
Section 9.11 “Switch over parameter sets“)
FDS Parameter belongs to the function data set (see Section 9.1, subsection "Data sets")
BDS Parameter belongs to the BICO data set (see Section 9.1, subsection "Data sets")

3) Specification of parameter type

O2 Unsigned 16-bit value
I2 Signed 16-bit value
O4 Unsigned 32-bit value
I4 Signed 32-bit value
V2 Bit-coded quantity
L2 Nibble-coded quantity

4) Setting steps for access via PKW mechanism

5) Factory setting

6) Minimum setting required (P052) to allow display of the relevant parameter

Minimum access level required (P051) to allow modification of the relevant parameter
Online: The parameter can be changed in all converter operating states
Offline: The parameter can only be changed in converter operating states of ≥ o1.0
8)
S00 Parameter belongs to the technology software in the basic converter, S00 option

9) The "OP parameter number" (i.e. the number to be entered via the OP1S operator panel) is specified in
brackets in the "PNU" column for all parameters which are not "P parameters" or "r parameters": e.g. (2010)
under n010 or (2100) under U100.

10) The parameter is shown in the specified function diagram in Section 8 (here G153).

11-4 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)

11.1 Operating status display

r000 Operating status display Ind: None P052 = 3
Type: O2
Status display, fault and alarm messages

Torque direction M0, MI or MII (=RUN)

-- No torque direction active
I Torque direction I active (MI)
II Torque direction II active (MII)

o1 Waiting for operating enable (=READY)

o1.0 Brake release delay time running.
o1.1 Waiting for operating enable at terminal 38.
o1.2 Waiting for operating enable via binector (acc. to selection in
P661) or control word, bit 3 (acc. to selection in P648)
o1.3 Inching command cancellation delay time running.
o1.4 Waiting for field to be reversed.
Waiting for cancellation of command "Brake by field reversal"
o1.5 Waiting for operating enable from optimization run
(the optimization run does not output the operating enable signal
at the end until n<nmin has been reached and SHUTDOWN
input).
o1.6 Waiting for cancellation of immediate pulse disable via binector
(acc. to selection with P177) [SW 1.8 and later]

o2 Wait for setpoint > P091.002

o2.0 If |n-set| (|K0193|) and |n-actual| (K0166) are less than
P091.002, the firing pulses are disabled and the drive goes into
state o2.0. [SW 2.0 and later]

o3 Test phase
o3.0 Waiting for completion of thyristor check (selectable function).
o3.1 Waiting for completion of line symmetry check.
o3.2 Waiting for a DC contactor to pick up
o3.3 Waiting for "Main contactor checkback"
(control word 2 bit 31, see P691) [SW 1.8 and later]

o4 Waiting for voltage (armature)

o4.0 Waiting for voltage at power terminals 1U1, 1V1, 1W1. The
voltage and frequency must be within the range specified with
parameters P351, P352, P353, P363 and P364. See also
P078.001.
o4.1 Waiting for fuse monitoring to signal OK [SW 1.7 and later]
o4.5 Waiting until the chopper capacitors of the SIMOREG CCP are
completely precharged [SW 2.2 and later]

o5 Waiting for field current

o5.0 Waiting until actual field current K0266 equals > P396 (FS=50%
of field current setpoint K0275) and for "I field extern > I f min"
(see P265).
o5.1 Waiting for voltage at power terminals 3U1, 3W1. The voltage
and frequency must be within the range specified with
parameters P351, P352, P353, P363 and P364. See also
P078.002.

NOTE
The converter dwells in states o4 and o5 for a maximum total delay time
that is set in parameter P089. The appropriate fault message is output if
the corresponding conditions are still not fulfilled at the end of this
period.

o6 Wait status before the line contactor is closed

o6.0 Waiting for auxiliaries to be switched on (delay in P093)
o6.1 Waiting for a setpoint ≤ P091 to be applied to the ramp-function
generator input (K0193)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-5

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)

o7 Waiting for switch-on command (=READY TO SWITCH ON)

o7.0 Waiting for switch-on command via terminal 37.
o7.1 Waiting for switch-on command via binector (acc. to selection in
P654) or control word, bit 0 (acc. to selection in P648).
o7.2 Waiting for cancellation of internal shutdown through input of an
internal shutdown command or
waiting for cancellation of command "Braking with field reversal"
o7.3 Waiting for completion of "Restore factory settings" operation.
o7.4 Waiting for switch-on command before execution of an
optimization run
o7.5 Wait for completion of "Read in parameter set" operation.
o7.6 Wait for completion of "Load MLFB" operation (performed at
factory)
o7.9 reserved for firmware download for optional supplementary
modules [SW 2.0 and later]

o8 Waiting for acknowledgement of starting lockout

o8.0 Waiting for acknowledgement of starting lockout through input of
SHUTDOWN command (OFF1).
o8.1 Simulation operation active (see under U840) [SW1.7 and later]

o9 Fast stop (OFF3)

o9.0 Fast stop has been input via binector (acc. to selection in P658)
or control word, bit 2 (acc. to selection in P648).
o9.1 Fast stop has been input via binector (acc. to selection in P659).
o9.2 Fast stop has been input via binector (acc. to selection in P660).
o9.3 Fast stop is stored internally (memory can be reset by cancelling
FAST STOP command and entering SHUTDOWN).

o10 Voltage disconnection (OFF2)

o10.0 Voltage disconnection has been input via binector (acc. to
selection in P655) or control word, bit 1 (acc. to selection in
P648).
o10.1 Voltage disconnection has been input via binector (acc. to
selection in P656).
o10.2 Voltage disconnection has been input via binector (acc. to
selection in P657).
o10.3 E-Stop (safety shutdown) has been input via terminal 105 or 107
o10.4 Wait for receipt of a valid telegram on G-SST1 (only if telegram
failure time monitoring is set with P787 ≠ 0)
o10.5 Waiting for receipt of a valid telegram on G-SST2 (only if
telegram failure time monitoring is set with P797 ≠ 0)
o10.6 Waiting for receipt of a valid telegram on G-SST3 (only if
telegram failure time monitoring is set with P807 ≠ 0)

o11 Fault
o11.0 = Fxxx Fault message is displayed, red LED lights up.

o12 Electronics initialization in progress

o12.1 Basic converter electronics initialization in progress
o12.2 Supplementary board is sought in module plug-in location 2
o12.3 Supplementary board is sought in module plug-in location 3
o12.9 Restructuring of parameters in non-volatile storage after
software update (takes approx. 15s)

11-6 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)

o13 Software update in progress

o13.0 Waiting for arrival of start command from HEXLOAD PC routine
(press the DOWN key to abort this status and start a RESET)
o13.1 Deletion of Flash EPROM in progress
xxxxx Display of address currently being programmed
o13.2 The Flash EPROM has been successfully programmed
(a RESET is performed automatically after approx. 1 second)
o13.3 Programming of the Flash EPROM has failed
(press UP key to return to operating state o13.0)

o14 Loading of boot sector in progress

(this operation is performed only in factory)

o15 Electronics not connected to voltage

Dark display: Waiting for voltage at terminals 5U1, 5W1
(electronics supply voltage).

11.2 General visualization parameters

r001 Display of terminals 4 and 5 (main setpoint) -200.0 to 199.99 Ind: None P052 = 3
[%] Type: I2
(G113) 0.01%
r002 Analog input, terminals 103 and 104 (main actual value) -200.0 to 199.99 Ind: None P052 = 3
[%] Type: I2
(G113) 0.01%
r003 Analog input, terminals 6 and 7 (selectable input 1) -200.0 to 199.99 Ind: None P052 = 3
[%] Type: I2
(G113) 0.01%
r004 Analog input, terminals 8 and 9 (selectable input 2) -200.0 to 199.99 Ind: None P052 = 3
[%] Type: I2
(G114) 0.01%
r005 Analog input, terminals 10 and 11 (selectable input 3) -200.0 to 199.99 Ind: None P052 = 3
[%] Type: I2
(G114) 0.01%
r006 Analog output, terminals 14 and 15 -200.0 to 199.99 Ind: None P052 = 3
[%] Type: I2
(G115) Display of output value before normalization and offset 0.01%
r007 Analog output, terminals 16 and 17 -200.0 to 199.99 Ind: None P052 = 3
[%] Type: I2
(G115) Display of output value before normalization and offset 0.01%
r008 Analog output, terminals 18 and 19 -200.0 to 199.99 Ind: None P052 = 3
[%] Type: I2
(G116) Display of output value before normalization and offset 0.01%
r009 Analog output, terminals 20 and 21 -200.0 to 199.99 Ind: None P052 = 3
[%] Type: I2
(G116) Display of output value before normalization and offset 0.01%

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-7

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
r010 Display of status of binary inputs Ind: None P052 = 3
Type: V2
Representation on operator panel (PMU):
(G110)
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Segment ON: Corresponding terminal is activated

(HIGH level is applied)
Segment OFF: Corresponding terminal is not activated
(LOW level is applied)

Segment or bit
0 ........ Terminal 36
1 ........ Terminal 37 (switch-on)
2 ........ Terminal 38 (operating enable)
3 ........ Terminal 39
4 ........ Terminal 40
5 ........ Terminal 41
6 ........ Terminal 42
7 ........ Terminal 43
8 ........ Terminal 211
9 ........ Terminal 212
10 ........ Terminal 213
11 ........ Terminal 214
12 ........ Safety shutdown (E-Stop is applied) 1)
13 ........ (not used)
14 ........ (not used)
15 ........ (not used)

1) The safety shutdown command is applied (segment dark) if

- terminal XS-105 is open (switch operation, see also Section 9)
or
- terminal XS-107 (Stop pushbutton) is opened briefly and terminal XS-
108 (Reset pushbutton) is not yet activated (pushbutton operation,
see also Section 9)

r011 Display of status of binary outputs Ind: None P052 = 3

Type: V2
Representation on operator panel (PMU):
(G112)
(G117)
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Segment ON: Corresponding terminal is activated

(HIGH level is applied) or overloaded or short-circuited
Segment OFF: Corresponding terminal is not activated
(LOW level is applied) or not overloaded or not short-
circuited

Display of status of binary output terminals:

Segment or bit
0 ..... Terminal 46
1 ..... Terminal 48
2 ..... Terminal 50
3 ..... Terminal 52
7 ..... Terminal 109/110 (relay contact for line contactor)

Display of overloading of binary outputs:

Segment or bit
8 ..... Terminal 46
9 ..... Terminal 48
10 .... Terminal 50
11 .... Terminal 52
12 .... Terminal 26 (15V output)
13 .... Terminal 34, 44 and/or 210 (24V output)

11-8 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
r012 Motor temperature -58 to +318 Ind: 2 P052 = 3
[°C] Type: I2
Display of motor temperature when a KTY 84 temperature sensor is 1°C
(G185) connected (P490.x=1).
A value of "0" is always output in r012 when a PTC thermistor or no
temperature sensor is installed.

i001: Motor temperature 1 (sensor at terminals 22 / 23)

i002: Motor temperature 2 (sensor at terminals 204 / 205)
r013 Heatsink temperature -47 to +200 Ind: None P052 = 3
[°C] Type: I2
Display of heatsink temperature 1°C
r014 Temperature rise 0.0 to 200.0 Ind: 2 P052 = 3
[%] Type: O2
i001: Calculated motor temperature rise (see P114) 0.1%
i002: Calculated thyristor temperature rise (see P075)
r015 Display of line voltage (armature) 0.0 to 2800.0 Ind: None P052 = 3
[V] Type: O2
(generated as arithmetic rectification average, RMS value display applies to 0.1V
sinusoidal voltage, average over 3 line-to-line voltages)
r016 Display of line voltage (field) 0.0 to 800.0 Ind: None P052 = 3
[V] Type: O2
(generated as arithmetic rectification average, RMS value display applies to 0.1V
sinusoidal voltage)
r017 Display of line frequency 0.00 to 120.00 Ind: None P052 = 3
[Hz] Type: O2
0.01Hz
r018 Display of firing angle (armature) 0.00 to 180.00 Ind: None P052 = 3
[degrees] Type: O2
(G163) 0.01degrees
r019 Display of actual armature current -400.0 to 400.0 Ind: None P052 = 3
[% of P100] Type: I2
(G162) The internal actual armature current value is displayed (arithmetic average 0.1% of P100
over the last 6 current peaks in each case)
r020 Display of the absolute value of armature current setpoint 0.0 to 300.0 Ind: None P052 = 3
[% of P100] Type: I2
(G162) 0.1% of P100
r021 Display of torque setpoint after torque limitation -400.0 to 400.0 Ind: None P052 = 3
[%] Type: I2
∧ 0.1% of rated motor torque (=rated motor armature current
Steps: 1 = 0.1% (see column on
(G160) (P100) * magnetic flux at rated motor field current (P102)) left)
r022 Display of torque setpoint before torque limitation -400.0 to 400.0 Ind: None P052 = 3
[%] Type: I2
∧ 0.1% of rated motor torque (=rated motor armature current
Steps: 1 = 0.1% (see column on
(G160) (P100) * magnetic flux at rated motor field current (P102)) left)
r023 Display of speed controller setpoint/actual value deviation -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: None P052 = 3
[%] Type: I2
(G152) 0.01%
r024 Display of actual speed value from pulse encoder -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: None P052 = 3
[%] Type: I2
(G145) 0.01%
r025 Display of actual speed controller value -200.0 to 199.99 Ind: None P052 = 3
[%] Type: I2
(G151) 0.01%
r026 Display of speed controller setpoint -200.0 to 199.99 Ind: None P052 = 3
[%] Type: I2
(G152) 0.01%
r027 Display of ramp-function generator output -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: None P052 = 3
[%] Type: I2
(G136) 0.01%
r028 Display of ramp-function generator input -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: None P052 = 3
[%] Type: I2
(G136) 0.01%
r029 Display of main setpoint before limitation -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: None P052 = 3
[%] Type: I2
(G135) 0.01%
r034 Display of firing angle (field) 0.00 to 180.00 Ind: None P052 = 3
[degrees] Type: O2
(G166) 0.01degrees
r035 Display of field current controller actual value 0.0 to 199.9 Ind: None P052 = 3
[% of P102] Type: O2
(G166) 0.1% of P102

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-9

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
r036 Display of field current controller setpoint 0.0 to 199.9 Ind: None P052 = 3
[% of P102] Type: O2
(G166) 0.1% of P102
r037 Display of actual EMF value -1500.0 to 1500.0 Ind: None P052 = 3
[V] Type: I2
(G165) 0.1V
r038 Display of actual armature voltage value -1500.0 to 1500.0 Ind: None P052 = 3
[V] Type: I2
0.1V
r039 Display of EMF setpoint 0.0 to 1500.0 Ind: None P052 = 3
[V] Type: O2
(G165) This parameter displays the EMF setpoint which is applied as the control 0.1V
quantity in the field-weakening range.
This value is calculated from:
Umotorrated – Imotorrated * RA (= P101 – P100 * P110)
r040 Display of limitations: Ind: None P052 = 3
Type: V2
Representation on operator panel (PMU):

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Segment ON: Corresponding limitation is reached

Segment OFF: Corresponding limitation is not reached

Segment or bit
0 αW limit (field) reached (P251)
1 Negative current limit (field) reached (K0274)
2 αW limit (armature) reached (αW acc. to P151
for continuous current, 165° for discontinuous current)
3 ....... Negative current limit (armature) reached (K0132)
4 ....... Negative maximum speed reached (P513)
Speed limiting controller responds (B0201)
5 ....... Negative torque limit reached (B0203)
6 ....... Neg. limitation at ramp generator output reached (K0182)
7 ....... Neg. limitation at ramp generator input reached (K0197)
8 ....... αG limit (field) reached (P250)
9 ....... Positive current limit (field) reached (K0273)
10 ....... αG limit (armature) reached (P150)
11 ....... Positive current limit (armature) reached (K0131)
12 ....... Positive maximum speed reached (P512)
Speed limiting controller responds (B0201)
13 ....... Positive torque limit reached (B0202)
14 ....... Pos. limitation at ramp generator output reached (K0181)
15 ....... Pos. limitation at ramp generator input reached (K0196)

Note: This parameter has the same bit assignments as connector K0810.

Connector and binector displays

r041 High-resolution connector display: -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: 2 P052 = 3
[%] Type: I2
(G121) i001: Display of connector selected in P042.01 0.01%
i002: Display of connector selected in P042.02
The display value is filtered with a time constant of 300ms (see Section 8,
Sheet G121)
P042 High-resolution connector display: All connector Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
i001: Selection of connector to be displayed in r041.01 1 Type: L2 Online
(G121) i002: Selection of connector to be displayed in r041.02
The display value is filtered with a time constant of 300ms (see Section 8,
Sheet G121)
r043 Connector display: -200.0 to 199.9 Ind: 7 P052 = 3
[%] Type: I2
(G121) i001: Display of connector selected in P044.01 0.1%
i002: Display of connector selected in P044.02
i003: Display of connector selected in P044.03
i004: Display of connector selected in P044.04
i005: Display of connector selected in P044.05
i006: Display of connector selected in P044.06
i007: Display of connector selected in P044.07

11-10 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P044 Connector display: All connector Ind: 7 P052 = 3
* numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
i001: Selection of connector displayed in r043.01 1 Type: L2 Online
(G121) i002: Selection of connector displayed in r043.02
i003: Selection of connector displayed in r043.03
i004: Selection of connector displayed in r043.04
i005: Selection of connector displayed in r043.05
i006: Selection of connector displayed in r043.06
i007: Selection of connector displayed in r043.07
r045 Binector display: 0 to 1 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
Type: O2
(G121) i001: Display of binector selected in P046.01
i002: Display of binector selected in P046.02
i003: Display of binector selected in P046.03
i004: Display of binector selected in P046.04
P046 Binector display: All binector numbers Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
i001: Selection of binector displayed in r045.01 Type: L2 Online
(G121) i002: Selection of binector displayed in r045.02
i003: Selection of binector displayed in r045.03
i004: Selection of binector displayed in r045.04

r047 Display of fault diagnostic memory 0 to 65535 Ind: 16 P052 = 3

1 Type: O2
Provides more detailed information about the cause of a fault after activation
of a fault message (see Section 10).

i001 Word 1 (fault value)

i002 Word 2
...
i016 Word 16 (fault number)
r048 Hours run 0 to 65535 Ind: None P052 = 3
[hours] Type: O2
Display of time (hours) in which drive has been operating in states I, II or - -. 1 hour
(G189) All times of ≥ approx. 0.1 s are included in the count.
r049 Fault time 0 to 65535 Ind: 8 P052 = 3
[hours] Type: O2
Display of time at which the current fault, and the last 7 acknowledged 1 hour
(G189) faults, were activated.

i001: Current fault hours

st
i002: 1 acknowledged fault hours
nd
i003: 2 acknowledged fault hours
rd
i004: 3 acknowledged fault hours
th
i005: 4 acknowledged fault hours
th
i006: 5 acknowledged fault hours
th
i007: 6 acknowledged fault hours
th
i008: 7 acknowledged fault hours
P050 Language 0 to 4 Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 ≥ 0
Language of plaintext display on optional OP1S operator panel and in Type: O2 Online
DriveMonitor PC service routine

0: German
1: English
2: Spanish
3: French
4: Italian

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-11

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)

11.3 Access authorization levels

P051 Key parameters see column on left Ind: None P052 = 3
* FS=40 P051 ≥ 0
0 No access authorization Type: O2 Online
6 Do not set (for use by DriveMonitor)
7 Do not set (for use by DriveMonitor)
9 Do not set (for use by DriveMonitor)
21 Restore factory settings
All parameters are reset to their defaults (factory settings).
Parameter P051 is then automatically reset to factory setting
"40".
22 Execute internal offset compensation (see Section 7.4)
25 Optimization run for precontrol and current controller (armature
and field) (see Section 7.5)
26 Optimization run for speed controller (see Section 7.5)
27 Optimization run for field weakening (see Section 7.5)
28 Optimization run for compensation of friction and moment of
inertia (see Section 7.5)
29 Optimization run for the speed controller with an oscillating
mechanical system (see Section 7.5)
30 Automatic setting of the parameters for SIMOREG CCP Altered
parameters:
P351.i001, U577, U578, U800,
in the event of a fault, P790 if appropriate
40 Access authorization to parameter values for authorized service
personnel
P052 Selection of display parameters 0, 1, 3 Ind: None P052 = 3
* FS=3 P051 ≥ 0
0 0 Display only parameters that are not set to original factory Type: O2 Online
settings
1 Display only parameters for simple applications
3 Display all parameters used
P053 Control word for the permanent memory [SW 1.7 and later] 0 to 1 Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=1 P051 = 0
Disabling or enabling write accesses to the permanent memory Type: O2 on-line

i001: Disabling or enabling write accesses to the parameter memory

0 Only save parameter P053 in the permanent memory;
parameter changes are active immediately but the changed
values are only stored temporarily and are lost when the
electronics supply voltage is switched off
1 Save all parameter values in the permanent memory
i002: Disabling or enabling write accesses to the memory of the
nonvolatile process data
0 Do not save nonvolatile process data in the permanent
memory
1 Save all nonvolatile process data in the permanent memory
If the nonvolatile process data are not stored (P053.002=0),
data are lost when the electronics supply of the SIMOREG DC-
MASTER is switched off, i.e. they have the value 0 after the
electronics supply is switched on again:
K0240: Setpoint of the motor potentiometer
K0309: Motor heating
K0310: Thyristor heating
K9195: Output of the 1st tracking/storage element
K9196: Output of the 2nd tracking/storage element
P054 OP1S – Background lighting 0, 1 Ind: None P052 = 3
FS=0 P051 ≥ 0
0 ON continuously Type: O2 Online
1 ON when panel is in use

11-12 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P055 Copy function data set 011 to 143 Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=012 P051 = 40
This parameter allows parameter set 1, 2, 3 or 4 to be copied to parameter Type: L2 Offline
(G175) set 1, 2, 3 or 4. This function is applicable only to parameters with 4 indices
in the function data set (see also Section 9.1, Data sets and Section 9.11,
and Section 8, Sheet G175).
0xy Do nothing, automatic resetting value at the end of a copy
operation.
1xy The contents of parameter set x (source data set, x=1, 2, 3 or 4)
are copied to parameter set y (target data set, y=1, 2, 3 or 4)
(parameter set x remains unchanged, the original contents of
parameter set y are overwritten).
x and y are the respective parameter set numbers (1, 2, 3 or 4)
of the source and target parameter sets.
The copy operation is started by switching P055 over into parameter mode
when P055=1xy.
During the copy operation, the numbers of the parameters being copied are
displayed on the operator panel (PMU).
At the end of the copy operation, P055 is reset to P055=0xy.
r056 Display of active function data set 1 to 4 Ind: None P052 = 3
(G175) 1 Type: O2
P057 Copy Bico data set 011 to 121 Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=012 P051 = 40
This parameter allows parameter set 1 or 2 to be copied to parameter set 1 Type: L2 Offline
or 2. This function is applicable only to parameters with 2 indices in the Bico
(G175) data set (see also Section 9.1, Data sets and Section 9.11, and Section 8,
Sheet G175).

0xy Do nothing, automatic resetting value at the end of a copy

operation.
1xy The contents of parameter set x (source data set, x=1 or 2) are
copied to parameter set y (target data set, y=1 or 2) (parameter
set x remains unchanged, the original contents of parameter set
y are overwritten).
x and y are the respective parameter set numbers (1 or 2) of the
source and target parameter sets.
The copy operation is started by switching P057 over into parameter mode
when P057=1xy.
During the copy operation, the numbers of the parameters being copied are
displayed on the operator panel (PMU).
At the end of the copy operation, P057 is reset to P057=0xy.
r058 Display of active Bico data set 1 to 2 Ind: None P052 = 3
(G175) 1 Type: O2
r059 Display of operating state 0.0 to 14.5 Ind: None P052 = 3
0.1 Type: O2
Meaning as for r000

11.4 Definition of SIMOREG DC-MASTER converter

r060 Software version 0.0 to 9.9 Ind: 5 P052 = 3
0.1 Type: O2
(G101) Converter software release
i001: CUD
i002: Slot D (board location 2)
i003: Slot E (board location 2)
i004: Slot F (board location 3)
i005: Slot G (board location 3)
r061 Creation date of software Ind: 5 P052 = 3
Type: O2
(G101) i001: Year
i002: Month
i003: Day
i004: Hour
i005: Minute
r062 Checksum Ind: 2 P052 = 3
Type: L2
(G101) i001: Converter firmware checksum
i002: Boot sector checksum

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-13

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
r063 Board code Ind: 5 P052 = 3
Type: O2
(G101) Identification code of boards mounted in locations 1 to 3 of electronics box.

1 3 2

Arrangement of
board locations 1 to 3
F D and slots D to G in
electronics box
CUDx

G E

i001: Board in location 1

71: CUD1
72: CUD1 + CUD2
i002: Board in slot D (upper slot of location 2)
111: Pulse encoder board (SBP) [SW 1.8 and later]
131 to 139: Technology board
141 to 149: Communications board
151, 152, 161: Special board (EB1, EB2, SLB)
i003: Board in slot E (lower slot of location 2)
111: Pulse encoder board (SBP) [SW 1.8 and later]
131 to 139: Technology board
141 to 149: Communications board
151, 152, 161: Special board (EB1, EB2, SLB)
i004: Board in slot F (upper slot of location 3)
111: Pulse encoder board (SBP) [SW 1.8 and later]
141 to 149: Communications board
151, 152, 161: Special board (EB1, EB2, SLB)
i005: Board in slot G (lower slot of location 3)
111: Pulse encoder board (SBP) [SW 1.8 and later]
141 to 149: Communications board
151, 152, 161: Special board (EB1, EB2, SLB)
r064 Board compatibility Ind: 5 P052 = 3
Type: O2
(G101) Compatibility identifier of boards in locations 1 to 3 of electronics box.
The compatibility identifier is bit-coded. To ensure the compatibility of a
board, it must have a "1" setting at the same bit location of the parameter
value as the CUD (in location 1 / index i001).

Indices:
i001: Compatibility identifier of board in location 1
i002: Compatibility identifier of board in slot D
i003: Compatibility identifier of board in slot E
i004: Compatibility identifier of board in slot F
i005: Compatibility identifier of board in slot G

Example:
Index Value Bit representation Compatible with CUD
i001 253 0000 0000 1111 1101
i002 002 0000 0000 0000 0010 no
i003 001 0000 0000 0000 0001 yes
r065 Software identifiers Ind: 5 P052 = 3
Type: O2
(G101) Extended software version identifiers in locations 1, 2, and 3 of the
electronics box

Indices:
i001: Software identifier of the board in location 1
i002: Software identifier of the board in slot D
i003: Software identifier of the board in slot E
i004: Software identifier of the board in slot F
i005: Software identifier of the board in slot G

11-14 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)

11.5 Definition of SIMOREG DC-MASTER power section

P067 Load class [SW1.8 and later] 1 to 5 Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
1 Load class DC I Type: O2 Offline
(G101) 2 Load class DC II
3 Load class DC III
4 Load class DC IV
5 US rating
The load classes are described in Chapter 3.4.1.
Depending on the load class selected, the device rated DC of the
SIMOREG DC-MASTER is reduced to a value of different magnitude to suit
the power section and load class.
The current value of the device rated DC is indicated in parameter r072.002.
Notes:
If the device rated DC is reduced via parameter P076.001, the lesser of the
two values is active.
If you set a value of > 1 in P067, you must ensure that the "Dynamic
overload capability of power module“ is enabled, i.e. a value of > 0 must be
set in parameter P075.
The SIMOREG DC-MASTER does not monitor for compliance with the
criteria of the load class set in parameter P067. If permitted by the power
module, the unit can operate for overload periods in excess of those defined
by the load class. The permissible overload period for the installed power
module is always longer than the period defined for the load class. The
SIMOREG DC-MASTER does monitor the actual permissible overload
period for the power module. See Section 9.15.
r068 Options according to rating plate Ind: None P052 = 3
Type: 02
(G101) 0 No option
1 Option L04 (low voltage, 85V)
2 Option K00 (terminal expansion)
3 L04 and K00

r069 Serial number of SIMOREG DC-MASTER converter Ind: 16 P052 = 3

st nd Type: L2
(G101) i001: 1 and 2 places of serial number
rd th
i002: 3 and 4 places of serial number
th th
i003: 5 and 6 places of serial number
th th
i004: 7 and 8 places of serial number
th th
i005: 9 and 10 places of serial number
th th
i006: 11 and 12 places of serial number
th th
i007: 13 and 14 places of serial number
i008 to i015: 0
i016: Checksum for serial number

The serial number ASCII code is displayed in this parameter. The number is
output in plaintext on the OP1S panel.
r070 MLFB (order number) of SIMOREG DC-MASTER converter 0 to 120 Ind: None P052 = 3
1 Type: O2
(G101) The corresponding MLFB is displayed in encoded form in this parameter.
The MLFB is displayed in plaintext on the OP1S panel.
r071 Converter rated supply voltage (armature) 10 to 1000 Ind: None P052 = 3
[V] Type: O2
(G101) Converter rated supply voltage (armature) as specified on rating plate 1V
r072 Converter rated DC current (armature) 0.0 to 6553.5 Ind: 2 P052 = 3
[A] Type: O2
(G101) i001: Converter rated DC current (armature) as specified on rating 0.1A
plate (output DC current at power terminals 1C1 and 1D1)
i002: Actual converter rated DC current (armature) according to
setting in parameter P076.001 or P067
r073 Converter rated DC current (field) 0.00 to 100.00 Ind: 2 P052 = 3
[A] Type: O2
(G101) i001: Converter rated DC current (field) as specified on rating plate 0.01A
(output DC current at power terminals 3C and 3D)
i002: Actual converter rated DC current (field) as set in parameter
P076.002

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-15

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
r074 Converter rated supply voltage (field) 10 to 460 Ind: None P052 = 3
[V] Type: O2
(G101) Converter rated supply voltage (field) as specified on rating plate 1V
P075 Control word for power section 0 to 2 Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
Selection of operating characteristics of thermal monitor (I2t monitoring) of Type: O2 off-line
(G101) power section (see also Section 9.16 ”Dynamic overload capability of power
(G161) section”).
The ”Dynamic overload capability of the power module“ allows the
SIMOREG DC-MASTER to operate for short periods on armature currents
that are higher than the converter rated DC current specified on the rating
plate (=r072.001).
The permissible overload period is determined solely by the power module
and the preceding operating history.
The "thermal power module monitoring" function does not monitor operation
in compliance with the load class criteria set in parameter P067. If permitted
by the power module, the unit can operate for overload periods in excess of
those defined by the load class.
0 Dynamic overload capability is not permitted
The armature current is limited to P077 * r072.001.
1 Dynamic overload capability is permitted, alarm A039
The armature current is limited to P077 * 1.8 * r072.001 as long
as the calculated thyristor temperature does not exceed the
permitted value.
If the temperature exceeds the permitted value, the SIMOREG
DC-MASTER protects itself by reducing the current limit to P077
* r072.001. Alarm A039 is output at the same time.
The armature current setpoint limit is not increased to P077 *
1.8 * r072.001 (alarm A039 also disappears) until the calculated
thyristor temperature has dropped below the limit value again
and the armature current setpoint is lower than the converter
rated DC current (r072.001).
2 Dynamic overload capability is permitted, fault F039
The armature current is limited to P077 * 1.8 * r072.001 as long
as the calculated thyristor temperature does not exceed the
permitted value.
Fault message F039 is output if the permissible temperature
limit is exceeded.
P076 Reduction of converter rated DC current see column on left Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* FS=100.0 P051 = 40
i001: Reduction of converter rated DC current (armature) Type: O2 Offline
(G101) i002: Reduction of converter rated DC current (field)
For the purpose of achieving a close match between the converter and
motor, the converter rated DC current is reduced to the value entered here.
The current value of the device rated DC is indicated in parameter r072.002.
The following values can be set:
10.0%, 20.0%, 33.3%, 40.0%, 50.0%, 60.0%, 66.6% 70.0%, 80.0%, 90.0%
and 100.0%
Note:
If a load class is selected in parameter P067 which causes a reduction in
the converter rated DC current, then the lower of the two parameter setting
values is effective.

11-16 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P077 Total thermal reduction factor 0.50 to 1.00 Ind: None P052 = 3
0.01 FS=1.00 P051 = 40
(G101) The factor set in this parameter effects a reduction in the armature current Type: O2 Offline
(G161) limit (as defined by the setting in P075).
The converter must be derated in the following instances:
– Operation at high ambient temperatures:
If the ambient temperature is higher than 45°C (on naturally air-cooled
converters) or 35°C (on converters with forced air-cooling), the possible
load capability of the converter decreases as a consequence of the
maximum permissible thyristor junction temperature by percentage
reduction "a" as specified in the table in Section 3.4, resulting in a
temperature reduction factor of
ktemp = k1
– Installation altitudes of over 1000m above sea level:
In this case, the lower air density and thus less effective cooling reduce
the possible load capability of the converter to the percentage load "b1"
specified in the table in Section 3.4, resulting in an installation altitude
reduction factor of
kaltitude = k2

P077 must be set as follows: P077 = ktemp * kaltitude

Note:
A general reduction in the converter rated DC current (through appropriate
setting of parameter P076.001) can be included in this calculation.
P078 Reduction of converter rated supply voltage i001: 10 to r071 Ind: 2 P052 = 3
i002: 10 to r074 FS= P051 = 40
(G101) i001: Rated input voltage converter armature [V] i001: r071 Offline
i002: Rated input voltage converter field 1V i002: 400V
The rated voltage value of the power system actually used to supply the except when
power section must be set in this parameter. r071 = 460V
This setting acts as the reference for the undervoltage, overvoltage and then 460V
phase failure monitoring functions (see also P351, P352 and P353) as well Type: O2
as for connectors K0285 to K0289, K0291, K0292, K0301 K0302, K0303
and K0305

NOTE
If a SIMOREG converter is operated at a rated input voltage that is
lower than its rated supply voltage, then the rated DC voltage specified
in the technical data (Section 3.4) cannot be reached !

P079 Short pulses / long pulses, armature gating unit 0 to 3 Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
0 Short pulses (0.89 ms=approx. 16 degrees at 50 Hz) are output Type: O2 Offline
(G162) on the armature gating unit.
(G163) 1 Long pulses (pulse duration up to approx. 0.1 ms before next
pulse) are output on the armature gating unit (e.g. required in
cases where field is supplied via armature terminals).
2 Must be set on the 12-pulse series master and the 12-pulse
series slave in a 12-pulse series connection (if two units are fed
with two line voltages with a 30 degree phase displacement)
[can only be set in SW 2.1 and later]. This setting has the
following effect:
• Long pulses (pulse duration up to approx. 0.1 ms before next
pulse) are output every 30 degrees on the armature gating
unit.
• Precontrol for the armature current controller is switched over
from 6-pulse operation to 12-pulse series connection
operation (half the total motor EMF must be fed in P162).
• P110 and P111 only have an effect on half the set total motor
value (Sheets G162, G165)
3 Must only be set on the paralleling device of the 12-pulse series
master in a 12-pulse series connection (if two units are fed with
line voltages with a 30 degree phase displacement). Long
pulses (pulse duration up to approx. 0.1 ms before next pulse)
are output every 30 degrees on the armature gating unit [can
only be set in SW 2.1 and later].

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-17

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)

11.6 Setting values for converter control

P080 Control word for brake control 1 to 2 Ind: None P052 = 3
* FS=1 P051 = 40
1 The brake is a holding brake Type: O2 Offline
(G140) When the "Operating enable" command is cancelled or when
the "Voltage disconnection" or "E-Stop" command is input, the
"Close brake" command is not input until n< nmin (P370, P371)
is reached.
2 The brake is an operating brake
When the "Operating enable" command is cancelled or when
the "Voltage disconnection" or "E-Stop" command is input, the
"Close brake" command is input immediately, i.e. while the
motor is still rotating.
P081 EMF-dependent field weakening 0 to 1 Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
0 No field-weakening operation as a function of speed or EMF Type: L2 Offline
(100% of rated motor field current is applied constantly as the
(G165) internal field current setpoint).
1 Field-weakening operation by internal closed-loop EMF control
to ensure that in field-weakening operation, i.e. at speeds above
the motor rated speed (="field-weakening activation limit
speed”), the motor EMF is maintained constantly at the setpoint
EMFset (K0289) = P101 – P100 * P110 (field current setpoint is
the product of the EMF controller output and the precontrol
component determined by the actual speed according to the
field characteristic).

NOTICE
When P081=1, a valid field characteristic must be available (P117=1),
otherwise the optimization run for field weakening (P051=27) must be
executed.

11-18 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P082 Operating mode for field 0 to 24 Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=2 P051 = 40
No field Type: O2 Offline
(G166)
0 No field is used (e.g. in the case of permanent-field motors). The
field gating pulses are disabled. Unlike all other cases, the motor
flux (K0290) is not calculated according to the field characteristic
(P120 to P139) as a function of the actual field current (K0265),
but set to the value for 100% rated flux.
Internal field power module
1 The field is switched with the line contactor - this setting must be
selected if the mains supplies for the field and armature power
sections are connected or disconnected simultaneously (field
gating pulses are enabled/disabled at the same time as the line
contactor is closed/opened, the field current decays with the
field time constant).
2 Automatic injection of standstill field set in P257 after expiry of a
time period set in P258, after converter has reached operating
state o7 or higher.
3 Field ACTIVE continuously.
4 The field is switched with the "Auxiliaries ON“ (B0251) signal
External field power module (40.00A field)
11 Board C98043-A7044 (40A field power module) is inserted at
connector X102 on board C98043-A7002 or C98043-A7003.
The field is controlled as described in para. 1.
12 As described in para. 11, but
the field is controlled as described in para. 2.
13 As described in para. 11, but
the field is controlled as described in para. 3.
14 As described in para. 11, but
the field is controlled as described in para. 4.
External field device
21 An external field device is used. The setpoint for the external
field device is supplied via connector K0268 (e.g. via an analog
output or the peer-to-peer interface).
The rated DC current of the external field device is set in
parameter U838. This value is also displayed in parameter
r073.001. P076.002 is inoperative.
If the external field device supplies an actual field current signal,
then this can be fed in at P612. If not, then P263 should be set
to 1 or 2.
If the external field device supplies an "I field < I field min“
signal, then this can be fed in at P265.
The field is controlled as described in para. 1.
22 As described in para. 21, but
the field is controlled as described in para. 2.
23 As described in para. 21, but
the field is controlled as described in para. 3.
24 As described in para. 21, but
the field is controlled as described in para. 4.

NOTICE
Even though changes to the parameter value from > 0 to = 0 are
accepted in operating states of ≥ o1.0, they do not take effect until the
converter reaches an operating state of ≥ o7.0.
[Values 11 to 24 can be set only in SW 1.9 and later]

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-19

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P083 Selection of actual speed value 0 to 4 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
0 Actual speed value is not yet selected (fixed value 0%) Type: O2 Offline
FDS
1 Actual speed value supplied by "Main actual value” channel
(G151) (K0013) (terminals XT.103, XT.104)
2 Actual speed value supplied by "Actual speed from pulse
encoder” channel (K0040)
3 Actual speed value supplied by "Actual EMF" channel (K0287),
but weighted with P115 (operation without tacho)
Note:
The effectiveness of the overspeed monitoring function (see
Section 8, function diagram G188) is restricted, since very high
motor speeds can be reached if the EMF is utilized as the actual
speed value when the actual field current value is too low.
4 Actual speed value is wired up freely (selected in P609)
P084 Selection of closed-loop speed / current or torque control 1 to 2 Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
1 Operation under closed-loop speed control Type: O2 Offline
(G160) 2 Operation under closed-loop current / torque control
The setpoint supplied by the ramp-function generator output is
input as a current or torque setpoint (speed controller is
bypassed)
P085 Wait period after cancellation of inching command 0.0 to 60.0 Ind: None P052 = 3
[s] FS=10.0 P051 = 40
After an inching command has been cancelled, the drive dwells in operating 0.1s Type: O2 Online
state o1.3 for the time period set in this parameter with the controllers
disabled, but the line contactor closed. This wait period does not commence
until n<nmin (P370, P371) is reached. If a new inching command is input
within this period, then the drive switches to the next operating state (o1.2 or
lower). However, if the time runs out without a new inching command being
entered, then the line contactor drops out and the drive switches to
operating state o7 (see also Section 9).
P086 Voltage failure period for automatic restart 0.00 to 10.00 Ind: None P052 = 3
[s] FS=0.40 P051 = 40
If the voltage fails (F001, F004) at one of the terminals 1U1, 1V1, 1W1, 3U1, 0.01s Type: O2 Online
3W1, 5U1 or 5W1, or if it drops below a certain threshold (F006
undervoltage) or exceeds a certain threshold (F007 overvoltage), or its
frequency is too low (F008 frequency < P363) or too high (F009 frequency >
P364), or if the actual field current drops to below 50% of the field current
setpoint for more than 0.5s (F005), then the corresponding fault message is
activated only if the fault condition has not been eliminated within the
"Automatic restart" period set in this parameter.
The gating pulses and controllers are disabled while the fault conditions are
present. The converter dwells in operating state o4 (in the case of armature
line voltage fault) or o5 (in the case of field line voltage or field current fault)
or in o13.
Setting this parameter to 0.00s deactivates the "Automatic restart" function.
NOTE:
Setting values higher than 2.00s are effective only in relation to the voltages
at terminals 1U1, 1V1, 1W1, 3U1 and 3W1.
A "restart time" of 2.00 s is operative in this case for the voltage at terminals
5U1 and 5W1 (electronics power supply).
P087 Brake release time -10.00 to 10.00 Ind: None P052 = 3
[s] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
(G140) -10.00 to -0.01 s 0.01s Type: I2 Online
The "Release brake" command is delayed in relation to enabling of the
gating pulses for thyristors and controllers (i.e. operating state I, II or --) by
the delay time set in this parameter. During this period, the motor rotates
against the closed brake. This setting is useful, for example, for vertical
loads.

0.00 to +10.00 s
When a "Switch-on" or "Inching" or "Crawling" command is input with
"Operating enable", the drive dwells in operating state o1.0 for the delay
period set in this parameter; the internal controller enabling signal, and thus
enabling of the thyristor gating pulses, do not take effect until the delay
period has elapsed so as to give the holding brake time to open.

11-20 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P088 Brake closing time 0.00 to 10.00 Ind: None P052 = 3
[s] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
(G140) When the "Switch-on" or "Inching" or "Crawling" command is cancelled, or 0.01s Type: O2 Online
(G187) when the "Switch-on" command is not applied, or when the "Fast stop"
command is input, the internal controller disabling signal, and thus the
thyristor gating pulse disabling signal, is not actually activated after n<nmin
has been reached until the time delay set in this parameter has elapsed.
During this period, the drive continues to produce a torque (operating state
I, II or – –), so as to give the holding brake enough time to close.
P089 Maximum wait time for voltage to appear at power section 0.0 to 60.0 Ind: None P052 = 3
[s] FS=2.0 P051 = 40
When the line contactor has dropped out and the "Switch-on" or "Inching" or 0.1s Type: O2 Online
"Crawling" command is applied, the converter waits in operating states o4
and o5 for voltage to appear at the power section, for the actual field current
value (K0265) to reach > 50% of the field current setpoint (K0268). The
corresponding fault message is activated if no power section voltage and no
field current is detected. This parameter specifies the maximum total delay
period in which the drive may dwell in operating states o4 and o5 (response
threshold for function which checks for voltage at power section, see
parameter P353).
P090 Stabilization time for line voltage 0.01 to 1.00 Ind: None P052 = 3
[s] FS=0.02 P051 = 40
When the line contactor has dropped out and the "Switch-on" or "Inching" or 0.01s Type: O2 Online
"Crawling" command is applied, or after a phase failure has been detected
in the armature or field mains supply with active "Automatic restart" function
(P086>0), the converter dwells in operating state o4 and o5 until voltage
appears at the power section. Line voltage is not assumed to be applied to
the power terminals until the amplitude, frequency and phase symmetry
have remained within the permissible tolerance for a period exceeding the
setting in this parameter. The parameter applies to both the armature and
field power connections.
Caution:
The setting in P090 must be lower than the settings in P086 (except when
P086=0.0) and P089!
P091 Setpoint threshold 0.00 to 199.99 Ind: 2 P052 = 3
[%] FS= P051 = 40
i001: Threshold for function "Switch on only if setpoint is low“ 0.01% i001: 199.99 Online
The converter can be switched on only if a setpoint i002: 0.00
|K0193| ≤ P091.001 is applied to the ramp-function generator Type: O2
input. If the applied setpoint is higher, the converter dwells in
state o6 after "switch-on" until the absolute setpoint value is
≤ P091.001.
i002: Threshold for function
"Automatic pulse disable if setpoint is low“ [SW 2.0 and later]
If |n-set| (|K0193|) and |n-act| (K0166) are less than P091.002,
the firing pulses are disabled and the drive goes into state o2.0.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-21

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P092 Delay times for field reversal 0.0 to 10.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[s] FS= P051 = 40
(G200) These times are used to control a reversing contactor for reversing the field 0.1s i001: 3.0 Online
polarity on a 1-quadrant converter with field reversal. i002: 0.2
i001: Delay time for the field reduction before opening of the current i003: 0.1
field contactor i004: 3.0
When field polarity reversal is initiated, the delay time set in Type: O2
P092.i001 elapsed after reaching Ifield (K0265) < Ifield min
(P394) before the current field contactor is opened.
i002: Delay time before actuation of the new field contactor
[only SW 1.7 and later]
After opening the current field contactor the delay time set in
P092.i002 elapsed before the field contactor for the "new" field
direction is actuated (drop-out delay time of the contactor use is
usually longer then the pick-up delay time).
i003: Delay time for enabling the field firing pulses
[only SW 1.7 and later]
After actuation of the field contactor for the "new" field direction,
the delay time acc. to P092.i003 elapses before the field firing
pulses are enabled. This time must be longer than the pick-up
delay time of the contactor used.
i004: Delay time after the field build-up before armature enable
[only SW 1.7 and later]
After - directly following the field firing pulse enable - the actual
field current value Ifield in the "new" field direction has reached
the value Ifield (K0265) > Ifield set (K0268)*P398/100%, the
delay time acc. to P092.i004 elapses. Then the internal
(armature) "Operating enable of field reversal" is issued, i.e. the
Stopping of the drive in operating state ≥ o1.4 is canceled. This
delay time permits waiting of the end of overshooting of the
actual field current value and therefore overshooting of the EMF
of the DC machine straight after the field current has been built
up again, before the "armature operating enable" is issued. This
is intended to prevent armature overcurrents due to excessive
EMF during overshooting.
P093 Pick-up delay for line contactor 0.0 to 120.0 Ind: None P052 = 3
[s] FS=0.0 P051 = 40
Pick-up of the line contactor is delayed in relation to "Switch on auxiliaries" 0.1s Type: O2 Online
by the time delay set in this parameter.
P094 Switch-off delay for auxiliaries 0.0 to 6500.0 Ind: None P052 = 3
[s] FS=0.0 P051 = 40
Switch-off of the auxiliaries is delayed in relation to dropout of the line 0.1s Type: O2 Online
contactor by the time delay set in this parameter.
P095 Pick-up time for a contactor in the DC circuit 0.00 to 1.00 Ind: None P052 = 3
[s] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
If the DC output (terminals 1C1 and 1D1) is switched through to the motor 0.01s Type: O2 Online
via a contactor, and if this contactor is controlled by the "Relay for line
contactor" (terminals 109 and 110), then the gating pulses may not be
enabled until the contactor has safely picked up. For this purpose, it may be
necessary to parameterize an additional delay time for the pick-up
operation. The timer set in P095 commences during a pick-up operation
when the converter reaches operating state o5. If the timer has still not run
down by the time the converter exits state o4, then the converter dwells in
state o3.2 until the timer has finished.
During the time period set in P095, the "Main contactor checkback" signal
must also switch to "1" if this function is activated (see P691). Otherwise the
converter dwells in state o3.3 until the timer has finished and fault message
F004 is then output with fault value 6.
P096 After-running time for the device fan [SW 1.6 and later] 0.0 to 60.0 Ind: None P052 = 3
[min] FS=4.0 P051 = 40
After the drive has been shut down (operating state ≥ 7.0 reached) 0.1min Type: O2 on-line
the device fan continues to run until the power section has cooled down.
With this parameter you can set the minimum duration for the after-running
time.
Note:
If the field current is not switched off after the drive is shut down (see P082),
the field current can prevent cooling of the power section. In this case, the
equipment blower is never switched off.

11-22 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P097 Response of field current to fault messages [SW 2.1 and later] 0 to 1 Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
(G166) 0 Field pulses are blocked when a fault message is activated Type: O2 Online
1 Field pulses are not blocked when a fault message is activated,
but the field current setpoint cannot be increased above its
current setting.
P098 Contactor in DC circuit [SW 2.1 and later] 0 to 1 Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
0 The DC circuit does not include a contactor Type: O2 Online
1 The DC circuit contains a contactor which is controlled by the
“relay for the line contactor" (terminals 109 and 110).
The values for the armature voltage Ua and for EMF (K0123,
K0124, K0286, K0287, K0291, K0292, r037, r038) are set to 0%
whenever B0124 = 0 (request main contactor not active). This is
because the motor terminals are separated in this case from
output terminals 1C and 1D of the SIMOREG DC-MASTER and
it is then impossible to measure the armature voltage Ua (or the
EMF).

11.7 Definition of motor

P100 Rated motor armature current (acc. to motor rating plate) 0.0 to 6553.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* [A] FS=0.0 P051 = 40
FDS 0.0 Parameter not yet set 0.1A Type: O2 Offline
(G165)
P101 Rated motor armature voltage (acc. to motor rating plate) 10 to 2800 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* [V] FS=400 P051 = 40
Notes: 1V Type: O2 Offline
FDS
One of the functions of this parameter is to determine the point at which
(G165) field-weakening operation commences.
If possible, the rated motor armature voltage + the voltage drop in the motor
feeder cable (for a current setting acc. to P100) should be set in P101.
P102 Rated motor field current (acc. to motor rating plate) 0.00 to 600.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* [A] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
FDS 0.00 Parameter not yet set 0.01A Type: O2 Online
(G165)
P103 Minimum motor field current 0.00 to 100.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* [A] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
Note: 0.01A Type: O2 Offline
FDS
P103 must be set to <50% of P102 to execute the optimization run for field
(G165)
weakening (P051=27).
P104 Speed n1 (acc. to motor rating plate) 1 to 10000 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* st [rev/min] FS=5000 P051 = 40
1 point (speed value) in speed-dependent current limitation. 1rev/min Type: O2 Offline
FDS
This parameter is used together with P105, P106, P107 and P108 to define
(G161) the characteristic of the current limiting value as a function of actual speed.

P105 Armature current I1 (acc. to motor rating plate) 0.1 to 6553.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* st [A] FS=0.1 P051 = 40
1 point (current value) in speed-dependent current limitation. 0.1A Type: O2 Offline
FDS
This parameter is used together with P104, P106, P107 and P108 to define
(G161) the characteristic of the current limiting value as a function of actual speed.

P106 Speed n2 (acc. to motor rating plate) 1 to 10000 Ind: 4 P052 = 3

* nd [rev/min] FS=5000 P051 = 40
2 point (speed value) in speed-dependent current limitation. 1rev/min Type: O2 Offline
FDS
This parameter is used together with P104, P105, P107 and P108 to define
the characteristic of the current limiting value as a function of actual speed.
(G161)
P107 Armature current I2 (acc. to motor rating plate) 0.1 to 6553.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* nd [A] FS=0.1 P051 = 40
2 point (current value) in speed-dependent current limitation. 0.1A Type: O2 Offline
FDS
This parameter is used together with P104, P105, P106 and P108 to define
(G161) the characteristic of the current limiting value as a function of actual speed.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-23

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P108 Maximum operating speed n3 1 to 10000 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* [rev/min] FS=5000 P051 = 40
When the speed-dependent current limitation is in use, the maximum speed 1rev/min Type: O2 Offline
FDS which is defined by the selection of the actual speed source as set in P083,
must be entered in this parameter:
(G161)
When P083=1 (analog tacho):
Speed at which a tacho voltage as set in P741 is reached
When P083=2 (pulse encoder):
Same value as maximum speed set in P143
When P083=3 (operation without tacho):
Speed at which EMF as set in P115 is reached
P109 Control word for speed-dependent current limitation 0 to 1 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
FDS 0 Speed-dependent current limitation is deactivated Type: O2 Offline
(G161) (=standard setting, P104...P108 are not evaluated)
1 Speed-dependent current limitation is activated
P110 Armature circuit resistance 0.000 to 32.767 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [Ω] FS=0.000 P051 = 40
(G162) This parameter is set automatically during the optimization run for precontrol Type: O2 Online
0.001Ω
(G165) and current controller (armature and field) (P051=25).
P111 Armature circuit inductance 0.000 to 327.67 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [mH] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
(G162) This parameter is set automatically during the optimization run for precontrol 0.01mH Type: O2 Online
(G165) and current controller (armature and field) (P051=25).
P112 Field circuit resistance 0.0 to 3276.7 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[Ω] FS=0.0 P051 = 40
FDS This parameter is set automatically during the optimization run for precontrol Type: O2 Online
0.1Ω
(G166) and current controller (armature and field) (P051=25).
P113 Continuous current factor torque control / current control 0.50 to 2.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* 0.01 FS=1.00 P051 = 40
This parameter defines the current to be permitted as a continuous current Type: O2 Offline
FDS 2
by the I t motor monitoring function without activation of alarm message
A037 or fault message F037.
This current is the product of calculation P113 * P100.
P114 Thermal time constant of motor 0.0 to 80.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
(see Section 9.15) [min] FS=10.0 P051 = 40
FDS 0.1min Type: O2 Online
0.0 I2t monitoring deactivated
P115 EMF at maximum speed in operation without tachometer 1.00 to 140.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[% of P078.001] FS=100.00 P051 = 40
This parameter is used to adjust the speed in cases where the internal 0.01% Type: O2 Online
FDS actual EMF value is applied as the actual speed value. P115 defines the
EMF which corresponds to maximum speed as a percentage of P078.001.
(G151)
P117 Control word for field characteristic 0 to 1 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
0 No valid field characteristic has yet been recorded Type: O2 Offline
FDS
1 Valid field characteristic (P118 to P139 valid)

The parameter is set automatically during the field-weakening optimization

run (P051=27).
P118 Rated EMF value 0 to 2800 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[V] FS=340 P051 = 40
EMF that is reached with a full field (according to parameter P102) and a 1V Type: O2 Offline
FDS speed as set in parameter P119.
The parameter is set automatically during the field-weakening optimization
(G165) run (P051=27) and specifies in this case the setpoint EMF in the field-
weakening range.

Note:
As regards the closed-loop field-weakening control, only the ratio between
P118 and P119 is relevant. The EMF setpoint in the field-weakening range
is determined by (P101 – P100 * P110). When the setting in P100, P101 or
P110 is changed subsequently, the field-weakening optimization run need
not be repeated. However, P118 then no longer defines the setpoint EMF in
the field-weakening range.
When the setting in parameter P102 is changed subsequently, the field-
weakening optimization run must be repeated, the same applies if the
maximum speed setting is subsequently re-adjusted.

11-24 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P119 Rated speed 0.0 to 199.9 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[%] FS=100.0 P051 = 40
Speed at which an actual EMF value as set in parameter P118 is reached at 0.1% Type: O2 Offline
FDS full field (according to parameter P102).
This parameter is set automatically during the optimization run for field
(G165) weakening (P051=27) and specifies in this case the field-weakening
activation limit speed.

Note:
As regards the closed-loop field-weakening control, only the ratio between
P118 and P119 is relevant. When the setting in P100, P101 or P110 is
changed subsequently, the field-weakening optimization run need not be
repeated. However, P119 then no longer defines the field-weakening
activation limit speed.
When the setting in parameter P102 is changed subsequently, the field-
weakening optimization run must be repeated, the same applies if the
maximum speed setting is subsequently re-adjusted.

Magnetization characteristic (field characteristic)

Parameters P120 to P139 determine the curve shape of the magnetization characteristic (field characteristic) in normalized representation
(see example field characteristic below for further details).

Note:
When the setting in parameter P102 is changed subsequently, the field-weakening optimization run must be repeated, because this alters
the degree of saturation and thus the shape of the magnetization characteristic. (When parameter P100, P101 or P110, or the maximum
speed adjustment, is subsequently altered, the settings in P120 to P139 remain the same, but the values in P118 and/or P119 are
changed).
r120 Field current for 0% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 0) 0.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [% of P102] Type: O2
(G165) 0.1% of P102
(G166)
P121 Field current for 5% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 1) 0.0 to 100.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [%] FS=3.7 P051 = 40
(G165) 0.1% of P102 Type: O2 Offline
(G166)
P122 Field current for 10% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 2) 0.0 to 100.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [% of P102] FS=7.3 P051 = 40
(G165) 0.1% of P102 Type: O2 Offline
(G166)
P123 Field current for 15% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 3) 0.0 to 100.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [% of P102] FS=11.0 P051 = 40
(G165) 0.1% of P102 Type: O2 Offline
(G166)
P124 Field current for 20% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 4) 0.0 to 100.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [% of P102] FS=14.7 P051 = 40
(G165) 0.1% of P102 Type: O2 Offline
(G166)
P125 Field current for 25% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 5) 0.0 to 100.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [% of P102] FS=18.4 P051 = 40
(G165) 0.1% of P102 Type: O2 Offline
(G166)
P126 Field current for 30% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 6) 0.0 to 100.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [% of P102] FS=22.0 P051 = 40
(G165) 0.1% of P102 Type: O2 Offline
(G166)
P127 Field current for 35% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 7) 0.0 to 100.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [% of P102] FS=25.7 P051 = 40
(G165) 0.1% of P102 Type: O2 Offline
(G166)
P128 Field current for 40% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 8) 0.0 to 100.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [% of P102] FS=29.4 P051 = 40
(G165) 0.1% of P102 Type: O2 Offline
(G166)
P129 Field current for 45% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 9) 0.0 to 100.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [% of P102] FS=33.1 P051 = 40
(G165) 0.1% of P102 Type: O2 Offline
(G166)
P130 Field current for 50% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 10) 0.0 to 100.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [% of P102] FS=36.8 P051 = 40
(G165) 0.1% of P102 Type: O2 Offline
(G166)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-25

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P131 Field current for 55% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 11) 0.0 to 100.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [% of P102] FS=40.6 P051 = 40
(G165) 0.1% of P102 Type: O2 Offline
(G166)
P132 Field current for 60% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 12) 0.0 to 100.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [% of P102] FS=44.6 P051 = 40
(G165) 0.1% of P102 Type: O2 Offline
(G166)
P133 Field current for 65% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 13) 0.0 to 100.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [% of P102] FS=48.9 P051 = 40
(G165) 0.1% of P102 Type: O2 Offline
(G166)
P134 Field current for 70% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 14) 0.0 to 100.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [% of P102] FS=53.6 P051 = 40
(G165) 0.1% of P102 Type: O2 Offline
(G166)
P135 Field current for 75% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 15) 0.0 to 100.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [% of P102] FS=58.9 P051 = 40
(G165) 0.1% of P102 Type: O2 Offline
(G166)
P136 Field current for 80% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 16) 0.0 to 100.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [% of P102] FS=64.9 P051 = 40
(G165) 0.1% of P102 Type: O2 Offline
(G166)
P137 Field current for 85% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 17) 0.0 to 100.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [% of P102] FS=71.8 P051 = 40
(G165) 0.1% of P102 Type: O2 Offline
(G166)
P138 Field current for 90% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 18) 0.0 to 100.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [% of P102] FS=79.8 P051 = 40
(G165) 0.1% of P102 Type: O2 Offline
(G166)
P139 Field current for 95% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 19) 0.0 to 100.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [% of P102] FS=89.1 P051 = 40
(G165) 0.1% of P102 Type: O2 Offline
(G166)

11-26 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)

Example of a field characteristic

The example characteristic exhibits a sharper curvature (i.e. a lower degree of saturation) than the field characteristic produced by the
factory setting.

Φ Motor flux in % of ratet flux

100 1)

95

90

85

80

75

70

65

60

55

50

45

40

35

30

25

20

15

10

P124 P129 P134 P139 100,0% If

P123 P128 P133 P138
P122 P127 P132 P137 Field current in % of P102
P121 P126 P131 P136

r120 P125 P130 P135

1) For actual field currents If of > 100% of P102, the characteristic is extended linearly for internal calculation of the motor flux.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-27

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)

11.8 Definition of pulse encoder, speed sensing using pulse encoder

The following types of pulse encoder can be used (type selection in P140):

1. Pulse encoder type 1

Encoder with two pulse tracks mutually displaced by 90° (with/without zero marker)

Track 1
X173 28, 29

Track 2
X173 30, 31

Zero marker
X173 32, 33

2. Pulse encoder type 1a

Encoder with two pulse tracks mutually displaced by 90° (with/without zero marker). The zero marker is converted internally to a
signal
in the same way as on encoder type 1.
Track 1
X173 28, 29

Track 2
X173 30, 31

Zero marker
≤ 360°
X173 32, 33

225 ± 60°

internal zero marker

3. Pulse encoder type 2

Encoder with one pulse track per direction of rotation (with/without zero marker).
CW rotation CCW rotation
Track 1
X173 28, 29

Track 2
X173 30, 31

Zero marker
X173 32, 33

4. Pulse encoder type 3

Encoder with one pulse track and one output for direction of rotation (with/without zero marker).

CW rotation CCW rotation

Track 1
X173 28, 29 Pulse output

Track 2 Rot. direction

X173 30, 31

Zero marker
X173 32, 33 Zero marker

11-28 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
Notes on selecting a pulse encoder (number of pulses):

The lowest speed which can be measured by a pulse encoder is calculated with the following equation:

1
n min [ rev / min] =21973∗ Formula applies with a nominal measuring time of 1 ms when P146=0 and P147=0
X ∗P141

The following applies:

X = 1 for 1x evaluation of pulse encoder signals (P144=0)
2 for 2x evaluation of pulse encoder signals (P144=1)
4 for 4x evaluation of pulse encoder signals (P144=2)
see also ”Single/multiple evaluation of encoder pulses”

Lower speeds are interpreted as n=0.

The frequency of the pulse encoder signals at terminals 28 and 29 or 30 and 31 must not be higher than 300 kHz.
The highest speed which can be measured by a pulse encoder is calculated with the following equation:

18000000
n max [ rev / min] =
P141

When selecting a pulse encoder, therefore, it is important to ensure that the lowest possible speed ≠ 0 is significantly higher than nmin and
the highest possible speed does not exceed nmax.

21973
IM >> Equations for selection of pulses per revolution IM of pulse encoder
X ∗n min [ rev / min]
18000000
IM ≤
n max [ rev / min]

Single/multiple evaluation of encoder pulses:

The setting for single/multiple evaluation of encoder pulses is applicable for both the speed and position sensing functions.

1x evaluation: Only the rising edges of one pulse track are evaluated (applies to all encoder types).
2x evaluation: The rising and falling edges of one pulse track are evaluated (can be set for encoder types 1, 1a and 2).
4x evaluation: The rising and falling edges of both pulse tracks are evaluated (can be set for encoder types 1 and 1a)

See parameters P450 and P451 for position sensing function

P140 Selection of pulse encoder type 0 to 4 Ind: None P052 = 3

1 FS=0 P051 = 40
(G145) See beginning of this Section (11.8) for pulse encoder types Type: O2 Offline
0 No encoder/"Speed sensing with pulse encoder" function not
selected
1 Pulse encoder type 1
2 Pulse encoder type 1a
3 Pulse encoder type 2
4 Pulse encoder type 3
P141 Number of pulses of pulse encoder 1 to 32767 Ind: None P052 = 3
[pulses/rev] FS=500 P051 = 40
(G145) 1 pulse/rev Type: O2 Offline
P142 Matching to pulse encoder signal voltage 0 to 1 Ind: None P052 = 3
1 FS=1 P051 = 40
(G145) 0 Pulse encoder outputs 5 V signals Type: O2 Offline
1 Pulse encoder outputs 15V signals
Matching of internal operating points to signal voltage of incoming pulse
encoder signals.

CAUTION
Resetting parameter P142 to the alternative setting does not switch
over the supply voltage for the pulse encoder (terminals X173.26 and
27). Terminal X173.26 always supplies +15V. An external voltage
supply is must be provided for pulse encoders requiring a 5V supply.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-29

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P143 Setting the maximum speed for pulse encoder operation 1.0 to 6500.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [rev/min] FS=500.0 P051 = 40
(G145) The speed set in this parameter corresponds to an actual speed (K0040) of 0.1rev/min Type: O4 Online
100%.

Control parameters for speed sensing with pulse encoder P144 to P147:
P144 and P147 determine the basic setting for actual speed sensing by means of pulse encoder (single or multiple evaluation of pulse
encoder signals and nominal measuring time) and thus also define the lowest possible measurable speed (minimum speed).

P145 and P146 can be used in special cases to extend the measurable speed range down to even lower speeds, on the basis of the
minimum speed defined by the settings in P144 and P147.
P144 Multiple evaluation of encoder signals 0 to 2 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=2 P051 = 40
0 1x evaluation of pulse encoder signals Type: O2 Offline
FDS 1 2x evaluation of pulse encoder signals (for encoder types 1, 1a, 2)
2 4x evaluation of pulse encoder signals (for encoder types 1, 1a)
(G145)
Note:
In contrast to the 1x evaluation method, 2x or 4x evaluation reduces the
minimum measurable speed by a factor of 2 or 4 respectively, but may
produce an "unsteady" actual speed value on encoders with unequal
pulse/pause ratio or without an exact 90° displacement between encoder
signals.
P145 Automatic measuring range switchover for measurement of low 0 to 1 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* speeds - switchover of multiple evaluation 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
FDS Type: O2 Offline
0 Automatic switchover of multiple evaluation of pulse encoder
signals OFF (i.e. P144 is always active)
(G145)
1 Automatic switchover of multiple evaluation of pulse encoder
signals ON (i.e. when P144 = 0, 2x evaluation is selected for low
speeds and 4x evaluation for very low speeds. When P144 = 1,
4x evaluation is selected for low speeds)
As opposed to P145 = 0, this setting reduces the minimum
measurable speed by up to a factor of 4.
Caution:
Switching over the multiple evaluation method for encoder pulses also
affects the position sensing function in the measuring channel. For this
reason, this setting may not be used in conjunction with positioning
operations. Connectors K0042 to K0044 are inoperative when P145 = 1.
P146 Automatic measuring range switchover for measurement of low 0 to 1 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* speeds - switchover of measuring time 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
FDS Type: O2 Offline
0 Automatic switchover of measuring time OFF
(i.e. P147 is always active)
(G145)
1 Automatic switchover of measuring time ON
This setting extends the measuring time for low speeds (based
on the measuring time set in P147, i.e. when P147 = 0, the
nominal measuring time is switched over to 2 ms for low speeds
and to 4 ms for very low speeds. When P147 = 1, the nominal
measuring time is switched over to 4 ms for low speeds)
Caution:
When P146=1, the minimum measurable speed can be reduced by up to a
factor of 4 as opposed to a 0 setting. However, this setting results in a
longer actual speed sensing delay in the extended minimum speed range.

11-30 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P147 Nominal measuring time of pulse encoder signal evaluation 0 to 20 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
0 Nominal measuring time 1 ms, gating-pulse-synchronized Type: O2 Offline
FDS measurement
(G145) 1 Nominal measuring time 2 ms, gating-pulse-synchronized
measurement (produces "steadier" actual speed value than
setting 0)
2 Nominal measuring time 4 ms, gating-pulse-synchronized
measurement (for drives with high moment of inertia, produces
"steadier" actual speed value than setting 0)

12 Nominal measuring time 0.2 ms, asynchronous measurement

13 Nominal measuring time 0.3 ms, asynchronous measurement
...
20 Nominal measuring time 1 ms, asynchronous measurement
Note:
12 to 20 Nominal measuring time 0.2 ms to 1 ms, asynchronous
measurement
for highly dynamic drives, reduces dead time in the actual speed
value channel, but "less steady" actual speed value than
achieved with setting 0 to 2 [can be set only in SW 1.9 and later]
Notice:
When P147=1 or 2 the minimum measurable speed can be reduced by a
factor of 2 or 4 respectively as opposed to 0 or 12 to 20. However, these
settings increase the actual speed sensing delay. For this reason, P200
should be parameterized to at least 5ms before the optimization run for the
speed controller is executed.
P148 Pulse encoder monitoring function 0 to 1 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
0 Pulse encoder monitoring OFF (activation of F048 in response Type: O2 Offline
FDS to a defective pulse encoder is disabled)
(G145) 1 Pulse encoder monitoring ON (hardware monitoring of pulse
encoder signals for implausible behaviour (i.e. frequent speed
changes, distance between edges too short, encoder cable
defect or short between two encoder cables) may cause
activation of F048)

11.9 Closed-loop armature current control,auto-reversing stage,armature gating

unit
P150 Alpha G limit (armature) 0 to 165 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[degrees] FS=5 / 30 P051 = 40
FDS Rectifier stability limit for firing angle of armature converter. 1 degrees (for 1Q / 4Q Online
converters)
(G163) Type: O2
P151 Alpha W limit (armature) 120 to 165 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[degrees] FS=150 P051 = 40
FDS Inverter stability limit for firing angle of armature converter. 1 degrees Type: O2 Online
(G163) See also parameter P192 (Control word for Alpha W limit)
P152 Line frequency correction (armature) 1 to 20 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* FS=20 P051 = 40
FDS The internal line synchronization for the armature gating pulses derived from Type: O2 Online
the power terminals (armature mains infeed) is averaged over the number of
(G163) line periods set in this parameter. In operation on "weak" power supplies
with unstable frequencies, for example, on a diesel-driven generator
(isolated operation), this parameter must be set lower than for operation on
"constant V/Hz" systems in order to achieve a higher frequency correction
speed.
P153 Control word for the armature precontrol 0 to 3 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
0 Armature precontrol disabled, output of the precontrol=165° Type: O2 off-line
FDS
1 Armature precontrol active
(G162) 2 Armature precontrol active but EMF influence only active on
change in torque direction
3 Armature precontrol active but without EMF influence., i.e. for
precontrol, the EMF is assumed to be 0.
(recommended setting for supplying large inductance from
armature terminals, e.g. solenoids, field supply)
[can only be set on SW 1.7 and later]

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-31

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P154 Set armature current controller I component to zero 0 to 1 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
FDS 0 Set controller I component to zero (i.e. to obtain pure P Type: O2 Offline
(G162) controller)
1 Controller I component is active
P155 Armature current controller P gain 0.01 to 200.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
0.01 FS=0.10 P051 = 40
FDS Proportional gain of armature current controller Type: O2 Online
This parameter is automatically set during the optimization run for precontrol
(G162) and current controller (armature and field) (P051=25).
See also parameter P175
P156 Armature current controller reset time 0.001 to 10.000 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[s] FS=0,200 P051 = 40
FDS This parameter is automatically set during the optimization run for precontrol 0.001s Type: O2 Online
and current controller (armature and field) (P051=25).
(G162) See also parameter P176
P157 Control word for current setpoint integrator 0 to 1 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
0 Reduced gearbox stressing Type: O2 Offline
FDS The integrator is active only after a change in torque direction
(acts as ramp-function generator for armature current setpoint
(G162) only until the output reaches the setpoint at the integrator input
st
for the 1 time after a change in torque direction).
1 Current setpoint integrator
The integrator is always active (acts as ramp-function generator
for the armature current setpoint)
P158 Ramp-up time for current setpoint integrator (reduced gearbox 0.000 to 1.000 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
stressing) [s] FS=0.000 P051 = 40
FDS 0.001s Type: O2 Online
Period of an acceleration ramp with a setpoint step change from 0% to
(G162) 100% at r072.002.
For older DC machines (i.e. unsuitable for steep rates of current rise),
P157=1 and P158=0.040 must be set.
P159 Switchover threshold for auto-reversing stage (armature) 0.00 to 100.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[%] FS=0.01 P051 = 40
FDS requested torque direction 0.01% of n controller Type: O2 Online
output
(G163) 0.05%

0
Speed controller output

II
P159

P160 Additional torque-free interval 0.000 to 2.000 Ind: 4 P052 = 3

[s] FS=0.000 P051 = 40
FDS Additional torque-free interval for torque direction change in 4Q operation. 0.001s Type: O2 Online
It is particularly important to set this parameter to values of > 0 for converter
(G163) armatures which supply large inductances (e.g. lifting solenoids).

P161 Additional Alpha W pulses with disabled second pulses 0 to 100 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
1 FS=0 P051 = 40
FDS Number of additional Alpha W pulses with disabled second pulses after Type: O2 Online
detection of I=0 message prior to a change in torque direction.
(G163) It is particularly important to set this parameter to values of > 0 for converter
armatures which supply large inductances (e.g. lifting solenoids).
These pulses cause the current to decay prior to a change in torque
direction. When it drops below the thyristor holding current value, the
current is suddenly chopped by the unfired second thyristor and the residual
energy stored in the load inductor must be dissipated via a suppressor
circuit (e.g. a varistor) to prevent the load inductor from producing a surge
voltage. See also P179.

11-32 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P162 EMF calculation method for armature precontrol 0 to 3 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
0 The EMF derived from the measured armature voltage (K0123) Type: O2 Offline
FDS is applied
(G162) 1 The EMF derived from the calculated armature voltage (K0124)
is applied
(the purpose of this setting is to prevent the occurrence of any
low-frequency (< 15 Hz) armature current fluctuations)
2 The EMF for armature current precontrol is calculated from the
armature voltage selected with P193 (the resistive + inductive
armature voltage drop is subtracted internally; if P079 = 2, then
P110 and P111 only have an effect on half the value) [can only
be set in SW 2.1 and later]
3 The connector selected with P193 serves as the EMF for
armature current precontrol. This setting also facilitates DC link
voltage control [can only be set in SW 2.1 and later]
P163 EMF filtering method for armature precontrol 0 to 7 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=3 P051 = 40
0 No filtering Type: O2 Offline
FDS
1 Filtering element, filter time constant = half line period (10 ms at
(G162) 50 Hz line frequency)
(for use by works engineers only)
2 Averaging over the last 2 EMF values
(for use by works engineers only )
3 Averaging over the last 3 EMF values
4 Filtering element, filter time constant = line period (20 ms at
50 Hz line frequency) [can only be set in SW 2.1 and later]
5 Filtering element, filter time constant = 2 * line period (40 ms at
50 Hz line frequency) [can only be set in SW 2.1 and later]
6 Filtering element, filter time constant = 4 * line period (80 ms at
50 Hz line frequency) [can only be set in SW 2.1 and later]
7 Filtering element, filter time constant = 8 * line period (160 ms at
50 Hz line frequency) [can only be set in SW 2.1 and later]
P164 Set armature current controller P component to zero 0 to 1 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
FDS 0 Set controller P component to zero (i.e. to obtain pure I Type: O2 Offline
(G162) controller)
1 Controller P component is active
P165 Select the binector to control the "Enable a torque direction for torque All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* direction change" function 1 FS=220 P051 = 40
BDS Type: L2 Offline

(G163) 0 = Binector B0000

1 = Binector B0001
etc.
Binector status =
0 ... Enable for M0 or MII
1 ... Enable for M0 or MI

11.10 Current limitation, torque limitation

P169 Select closed-loop torque / current control 0 to 1 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
FDS See parameter P170 Type: O2 Offline
(G160)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-33

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P170 Select closed-loop torque / current control 0 to 1 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
P169 P170 Type: O2 Offline
FDS
0 0 Closed-loop current control and current limitation
0 1 Closed-loop torque control with torque limitation (the
(G160) torque setpoint is converted to a current setpoint: Current
setpoint = torque setpoint / motor flux)
Current limitation is active additionally
1 0 Closed-loop current control with torque limitation (the
specified torque limit is converted to a current limit:
Current limit = torque limit / motor flux)
Current limitation is active additionally
1 1 Do not set!

Note:
A valid field characteristic (P117=1) must be available when P169 or
P170=1. If one is not, the optimization run for field weakening (P051=27)
must be executed.
P263 determines the input quantity for the motor flux calculation.
P171 System current limit in torque direction I 0.0 to 300.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [% of P100] FS=100.0 P051 = 40
(G160) 0.1% of P100 Type: O2 Online
(G161)
P172 System current limit in torque direction II -300.0 to 0.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [% of P100] FS=-100.0 P051 = 40
(G160) 0.1% of P100 Type: I2 Online
(G161)
P173 Source for "Torque control / Current control" switchover All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* [SW 1.9 and later] 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
BDS Type: L2 Offline
The binector selected here has the same effect as parameter P170.
0 = binector B0000
(G160) 1 = binector B0001
etc.
P175 Source for variable P gain [SW 1.8 and later] All connector Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* numbers FS=1 P051 = 40
FDS 1 Type: L2 off-line
(G162) The content of the selected connector acts as the P gain for the armature
current controller after multiplication with P155.
P176 Source for variable Integration time [SW 1.8 and later] All connector Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* numbers FS=1 P051 = 40
FDS The content of the selected connector acts as the integration time for the 1 Type: L2 off-line
(G162) armature current controller after multiplication with P156.
P177 Source for the command "no immediate pulse disable" All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* [SW 1.8 and later] 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
BDS Type: L2 off-line
A low signal causes the armature firing pulses to be disabled immediately
(G163) without waiting for the I=0 signal or without outputting alpha-W pulses for
current reduction. The additional alpha-W pulses (acc. to parameters P179
and P161) are not output either. As long as this command is pending, it is
not possible to fall below operating state o1.6.
This command can be used, for example, if it is not a motor that is supplied
by the SIMOREG DC-MASTER but a field and the current is to be reduced
via an external parallel-connected de-excitation resistance.
P178 Source for the command "fire all thyristors simultaneously" All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* [SW 1.8 and later] 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
BDS Type: L2 off-line
Setting this command (high signal) causes all six thyristors of the thyristor
(G163) bridge I to be fired continuously and simultaneously. Switchover to long
pulses is automatic. This command is only active if no line voltage is applied
to the armature power section .

11-34 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P179 Additional Alpha W pulses with enabled second pulses 0 to 100 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[SW 1.9 and later] 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
FDS Type: O2 on-line
Number of additional Alpha W pulses with enabled second pulses after
(G163) detection of I=0 message prior to a change in torque direction.
It is particularly important to set this parameter to values of > 0 for converter
armatures which supply large inductances (e.g. lifting solenoids).
These pulses cause the current to decay before a change in torque
direction; the thyristors are fired in pairs to prevent sudden chopping, and
the generation of a surge voltage by the load inductor, when the current
drops below the thyristor holding current.
When a change in torque direction is required, the current in the existing
direction must be reduced.

This is achieved in the following ways:

If P179 > 0:
1) Alpha W pulses with enabled second pulses
until the I=0 signal arrives
2) Additional Alpha W pulses with enabled second pulses
(number as set in P179.F)
3) Additional Alpha W pulses with disabled second pulses
(number as set in P161.F)
4) Additional torque-free interval (period as set in P160.F)
If P179 = 0:
1) Alpha W pulses with disabled second pulses
until the I=0 signal arrives
2) Additional Alpha W pulses with disabled second pulses
(number as set in P161.F)
3) Additional torque-free interval (period as set in P160.F)
P180 Positive torque limit 1 -300.00 to 300.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[%] FS=300.00 P051 = 40
FDS 0.01% Type: I2 Online
of rated motor torque
(G160)
P181 Negative torque limit 1 -300.00 to 300.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[%] FS=-300.00 P051 = 40
FDS 0.01% Type: I2 Online
(G160) of rated motor torque
P182 Positive torque limit 2 -300.00 to 300.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[%] FS=300.00 P051 = 40
FDS If "Torque limit switchover" is selected (state of binector selected in P694 0.01% Type: I2 Online
=1) and the speed is higher than the threshold speed set in parameter of rated motor torque
(G160) P184, then torque limit 2 is activated in place of torque limit 1.

P183 Negative torque limit 2 -300.00 to 300.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3

[%] FS=-300.00 P051 = 40
FDS If "Torque limit switchover" is selected (state of binector selected in P694 0.01% Type: I2 Online
=1) and the speed is higher than the threshold speed set in parameter of rated motor torque
(G160) P184, then torque limit 2 is activated in place of torque limit 1.

P184 Threshold speed for torque limits 0.00 to 120.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
FDS If "Torque limit switchover" is selected (state of binector selected in P694 0.01% Type: O2 Online
=1) and the speed (K0166) is higher than the threshold speed set in of maximum speed
(G160) parameter P184, then torque limit 2 (P182, P183) is activated in place of
torque limit 1 (P180, P181).

P190 Filter time for setpoint for armature current precontrol 0 to 10000 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[SW 1.9 and later] [ms] FS=0 P051 = 40
FDS 1ms Type: O2 on-line
Filtering of the armature current setpoint at the input of the precontrol for the
(G162) armature current controller.
The purpose of this filter is to decouple the armature current precontrol from
the armature current controller.
P191 Filter time for setpoint for armature current controller 0 to 10000 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[SW 1.9 and later] [ms] FS=0 P051 = 40
FDS 1ms Type: O2 on-line
Filtering of the armature current setpoint at the input of the armature current
(G162) controller.
The purpose of this filter is to decouple the armature current precontrol from
the armature current controller.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-35

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P193 Source for the actual armature voltage or EMF value for armature All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
* current precontrol [SW 2.1 and later] numbers FS=287 P051 = 40
1 Type: L2 Offline
The connector which is used as the actual armature voltage (if P162.F = 2)
(G162) or EMF (if P162.F = 3) value for armature current precontrol is selected. The
selected connector value must correspond to half the motor armature
voltage or half the motor EMF in a 12-pulse series connection (P079 = 2).
0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
etc.

11.11 Auto-reversing stage, armature gating unit

P192 Control word for the Alpha W limit (armature) [as of SW 2.1] 0 to 1 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
FDS 0 Continuous current: Type: O2 Online
Inverter stability limit for the delay angle of the armature
(G163) converter (Alpha W) = value according to parameter P151
Intermittent current:
Alpha W = 165°
1 Inverter stability limit for the delay angle of the armature
converter (Alpha W) = value according to parameter P151

11.12 Speed controller

further parameters for the speed controller P550 - P567
Setting values for speed controller - actual value/setpoint processing
P200 Filter time for actual speed controller value 0 to 10000 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[ms] FS=0 P051 = 40
FDS Filtering of the actual speed value by means of a PT1 element. 1ms Type: O2 Online
(G152) This filter setting is taken into account by the speed controller optimization
run (P051=26).
P201 Band-stop 1: Resonant frequency 1 to 140 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [Hz] FS=1 P051 = 40
(G152) 1Hz Type: O2 Online
P202 Band-stop 1: Quality 0 to 3 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
1 FS=0 P051 = 40
FDS 0 Quality = 0.5 Type: O2 Online
1 Quality = 1
(G152) 2 Quality = 2
3 Quality = 3
P203 Band-stop 2: Resonant frequency 1 to 140 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [Hz] FS=1 P051 = 40
(G152) 1Hz Type: O2 Online
P204 Band-stop 2: Quality 0 to 3 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
1 FS=0 P051 = 40
FDS 0 Quality = 0.5 Type: O2 Online
1 Quality = 1
(G152) 2 Quality = 2
3 Quality = 3
P205 D element: Derivative-action time 0 to 1000 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [ms] FS=0 P051 = 40
(G152) 1ms Type: O2 Online
P206 D element: Filter time 0 to 100 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [ms] FS=0 P051 = 40
(G152) 1ms Type: O2 Online

r217 Indication of the active droop of the speed controller [SW 1.7 and later] 0.0 to 10.0 Ind: None P052 = 3
[%] Type: O2
(G151) 0.1%
r218 Indication of the active integration time of the speed controller 0.010 to 10.000 Ind: None P052 = 3
(G151) [SW 1.7 and later] [s] Type: O2
(G152) 0.001s
r219 Display of effective P gain of speed controller 0.01 to 200.00 Ind: None P052 = 3
(G151) 0.01 Type: O2
(G152)

11-36 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P221 Speed controller: Hysteresis for speed-dependent PI/P controller 0.00 to 100.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
switchover [SW 1.9 and later] [%] FS=2.00 P051 = 40
FDS 0.01% of maximum Type: O2 Online
(G152) See P222 for further details. speed
P222 Speed controller: Speed-dependent switchover threshold for PI / P 0.00 to 10.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
controller [%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
FDS 0.01% of maximum Type: O2 Online
0.00 Automatic switchover from PI to P controller deactivated. speed
(G152) > 0.00 Depending on the actual speed (K0166), the PI controller
switches over to a P controller if the speed drops below the
threshold set in parameter P222. The integrator is not switched
in again (with value of 0) until the actual speed is > P222 +
P221.
This function allows the drive to be stopped without overshoot
using a zero setpoint with the controllers enabled.
This function is active only if the binector selected in P698 is in
the log. "1" state.

Setting values for speed controller

P223 Control word for speed controller precontrol 0 to 1 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
0 Speed controller precontrol disabled Type: O2 Offline
FDS 1 Speed controller precontrol acts as torque setpoint (is added to
(G152) n controller output)
P224 Control word for speed controller I component 0 to 3 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
0 Set controller I component to 0 (i.e. to achieve a pure P Type: O2 Offline
FDS controller)
(G152) 1 Controller I component is active
The I component is stopped when a torque or current limit is
reached
2 Controller I component is active
The I component is stopped when a torque limit is reached
3 Controller I component is active
The I component is stopped only when ±199.99% is reached
P225 Speed controller P gain 0.10 to 200.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
0.01 FS=3.00 P051 = 40
FDS See also setting values for "Speed controller adaptation" function (P550 to Type: O2 Online
P559).
(G151) This parameter is set automatically during the speed controller optimization
run (P051=26).
P226 Speed controller reset time 0.010 to 10.000 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [s] FS=0,650 P051 = 40
(G151) This parameter is set automatically during the speed controller optimization 0.001s Type: O2 Online
run (P051=26).

Speed controller droop

Function: A parameterizable feedback loop can be connected in parallel to the I and P components of the speed controller (acts on
summation point of setpoint and actual value).
P227 Speed controller droop 0.0 to 10.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[%] FS=0.0 P051 = 40
FDS A 10% speed droop setting causes a 10% deviation in the speed from the 0.1% Type: O2 Online
setpoint at a 100% controller output (100% torque or armature current
(G151) setpoint) ("softening" of closed-loop control).
See also P562, P563, P630 and P684

P228 Filter time for speed setpoint 0 to 10000 Ind: 4 P052 = 3

[ms] FS=0 P051 = 40
FDS Filtering of setpoint by means of a PT1 element. 1ms Type: O2 Online
This parameter is automatically set to the same value as the speed
(G152) controller reset time during the speed controller optimization run (P051=26).
It may be useful to parameterize lower values when the ramp-function
generator is in use.
P229 Control of I component tracking for slave drive 0 to 1 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
0 On a slave drive, the I component of the speed controller is Type: O2 Offline
FDS made to follow such that M(set, ncontr.) = M(set, limit),
the speed setpoint is set to the actual speed value
(G152)
1 Tracking deactivated

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-37

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P230 Setting period of speed controller integrator [SW 1.9 and later] 0 to 10000 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[ms] FS=0 P051 = 40
FDS After a positive edge at the binector set in P695, the integrator of the speed 1ms Type: O2 on-line
controller is set to the instantaneous value of the connector set in P631.
(G152) If a time of > 0 is set on P230, this setting operation is not performed just
once, but the speed controller integrator is set continually to the setting
value for the parameterized time period.
P234 Set speed controller P component to zero 0 to 1 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
0 Set controller P component to zero (i.e. to obtain a pure I Type: O2 Offline
FDS controller)
(G152) 1 Controller P component is active
P236 Specifying the dynamic response of the speed control loop 10 to 100 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* [SW 2.0 and later] [%] FS=75 P051 = 40
FDS 1 Type: O2 online
The parameter value is used as the optimization criterion for the speed
G151 control loop.
Note:
Changes to this value do not take effect until the speed controller
optimization run (P051 = 26, see Section 7.5) has been executed.
Setting instructions:
- For drives, for example, with gear backlash, optimization should be
started with low dynamic response values (from 10%).
- For drives with top synchronism and dynamic response requirements,
values up to 100% should be used.

11.13 Closed-loop field current control, field gating unit

P250 Alpha G limit (field) 0 to 180 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [degrees] FS=0 P051 = 40
(G166) Rectifier stability limit for firing angle of field converter 1 degree Type: O2 Online
P251 Alpha W limit (field) 0 to 180 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [degrees] FS=180 P051 = 40
(G166) Inverter stability limit for firing angle of field converter 1 degree Type: O2 Online
P252 Filtering of line frequency correction (field) 0 to 200 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* [ms] FS=200 P051 = 40
The internal line synchronization for the field gating pulses derived from the 1ms Type: O2 Offline
FDS field mains infeed terminals is filtered with this time constant. In operation
(G166) on "weak" power supplies with unstable frequencies, for example, on a
diesel-driven generator (isolated operation), the filter time constant must be
set lower than for operation on "constant V/Hz" systems in order to achieve
a higher frequency correction speed.

Using the units position, the line synchronization function can be altered
additionally as follows:
When the parameter is set to an uneven number, the measured line zero
crossings for line synchronization are subjected to an extra "filter", may
improve performance in the case of difficulties with brief mains interruptions
(e.g. power supply via sliding current collectors), but may only be set for
constant V/Hz power supplies (not for weak isolated supply systems).

P253 Control word for field precontrol 0 to 1 Ind: 4 P052 = 3

* 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
0 Field precontrol disabled, precontrol output = 180° Type: O2 Offline
FDS
1 Field precontrol active, output is dependent on field current
(G166) setpoint, field line voltage, P112
P254 Set field current controller I component to zero 0 to 1 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
FDS 0 Set controller I component to zero (i.e. to obtain pure P Type: O2 Offline
(G166) controller)
1 Controller I component is active
P255 Field current controller P gain 0.01 to 100.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
0.01 FS=5.00 P051 = 40
FDS This parameter is set automatically during the optimization run for precontrol Type: O2 Online
(G166) and current controller (armature and field) (P051=25).
P256 Field current controller reset time 0.001 to 10.000 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[s] FS=0,200 P051 = 40
FDS This parameter is set automatically during the optimization run for precontrol 0.001s Type: O2 Online
(G166) and current controller (armature and field) (P051=25).

11-38 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P257 Standstill field 0.0 to 100.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[%] FS=0.0 P051 = 40
FDS Value to which the field current is reduced when "Automatic field current 0.1% of P102 Type: O2 Online
reduction" function is parameterized (by means of P082=2) or with signal-
(G166) driven selection of "Standstill excitation" function (selected in P692).
P258 Delay time with automatic field current reduction 0.0 to 60.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[s] FS=10.0 P051 = 40
FDS Delay after which the field current is reduced to the value set in parameter 0.1s Type: O2 Online
P257 with automatic or signal-driven "Field current reduction" function when
(G166) the drive is stopped after operating state o7.0 or higher is reached.

P260 Filter time for setpoint for field current precontrol [SW 1.9 and later] 0 to 10000 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[ms] FS=0 P051 = 40
FDS Filtering of the field current setpoint at the input of the precontrol for the field 1ms Type: O2 on-line
current controller.
(G166) The purpose of this filter is to decouple the field current precontrol from the
field current controller.
P261 Filter time for setpoint for field current controller [SW 1.9 and later] 0 to 10000 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[ms] FS=0 P051 = 40
FDS Filtering of the field current setpoint at the input of the field current 1ms Type: O2 on-line
controller.
(G166) The purpose of this filter is to decouple the field current precontrol from the
field current controller.
P263 Input quantity for motor flux calculation 0 to 2 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
0 The input quantity for the motor flux calculation is the field Type: O2 Offline
FDS current controller actual value according to P612 (K0265), to be
(G166) used in connection with a fully compensated DC machine
1 The input quantity for the motor flux calculation is the precontrol
output for the EMF controller (K0293)
(exception: Field current controller setpoint (K0268) with active
standstill field or with disabled field pulses), to be used in
connection with an non-compensated DC machine. The EMF
controller must be active when this setting is selected (EMF
controller compensates the armature reaction).
2 The input quantity for the motor flux calculation is the field
current controller setpoint (K0268). Advantage: Quantities
derived from the setpoint are generally "steadier" than those
derived from actual values.
P264 Set field current controller P component to zero 0 to 1 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
FDS 0 Set controller P component to zero (i.e. to obtain pure I Type: O2 Offline
(G166) controller)
1 Controller P component is active
P265 Source for selection of external field current monitoring signal All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* [SW 1.9 and later] 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
BDS Type: L2 off-line
Selection of the binector to supply the field monitoring signal when an
(G167) external field device is used.
(status "1" = field current is o.k., If > If-min)
The converter waits for this signal in state o5.0 as part of the power ON
routine. If this signal disappears during operation, the drive is shut down
with fault message F005 with fault value 4 (in the case of P086>0) or with
fault value 5 (in the case of P086=0).
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-39

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)

11.14 Closed-loop EMF control

P272 Operating mode of closed-loop EMF control 0 to 1 Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
0 Fault message F043 (”EMF for braking mode too high”) is Type: O2 Offline
(G165) active:
If a change in the torque direction is requested (MI or MII is to
be started) and the EMF is too high, both torque directions are
blocked.
Criterion for EMF too high: The calculated control angle (K0101)
for the armature current requested in the new torque direction is
> 165 degrees (when P192=0) or > P151 (when P192=1).
If the armature current requested in the new torque direction
(value from K0118 filtered by means of P190) is > 1% of the
device's rated direct current (r072.i02), fault message F043 is
also triggered. For possible causes, see section 10
1 Alarm A043 and automatic field reduction, if EMF in braking
mode is too high:
If the EMF is too high during braking and the requested
armature current (value from K0118 filtered by means of P190)
is > 1% of the device's rated direct current (r072.i02), alarm
A043 is emitted.
Criterion for EMF too high: For the armature control angle α
before limitation (K0101), the following applies: α > (αW – 5
degrees). αW is the inverter impact limit according to P151 (in
the case of continuous armature current or when P192=1) or
165 degrees (when P192=0 in the case of non-continuous
armature current)
At the same time as A043, field reduction takes place. This field
reduction is achieved by changing the armature control angle to
(αW – 5 degrees) by means of a P controller whose output
reduces the EMF controller setpoint. It is therefore necessary to
parmaterize "Field weakening mode by internal EMF control"
(P081=1) so that field weakening can have an effect.
If a change in the torque direction is requested (MI or MII is to
be started) and the EMF is too high, both torque directions are
blocked until the field and therefore the EMF have been lowered
accordingly. This is the case if the calculated control angle
(K0101) for the armature current requested in the new torque
direction is < 165 degrees (when P192=0) or < P151 (when
P192=1).
P273 Control word for EMF controller precontrol 0 to 1 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
0 EMF controller precontrol disabled, precontrol output = rated Type: O2 Offline
FDS motor field current (P102)
(G165)
1 EMF controller precontrol is active
P274 Set EMF controller I component to zero 0 to 1 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
FDS 0 Set controller I component to zero (i.e. to obtain pure P Type: O2 Offline
(G165) controller)
1 Controller I component is active
P275 EMF controller P gain 0.10 to 100.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* 0.01 FS=0.60 P051 = 40
FDS This parameter is automatically set during the field weakening optimization Type: O2 Online
(G165) run (P051=27).
P276 EMF controller reset time 0.010 to 10.000 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* [s] FS=0.200 P051 = 40
FDS This parameter is automatically set during the field weakening optimization 0.001s Type: O2 Online
(G165) run (P051=27).
P277 EMF controller droop 0.0 to 10.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* [%] FS=0.0 P051 = 40
FDS 0.1% Type: O2 Online
(G165)
P280 Filter time for setpoint for EMF controller precontrol [SW 1.9 and later] 0 to 10000 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[ms] FS=0 P051 = 40
FDS Filtering of the EMF setpoint at the input of the EMF controller precontrol. 1ms Type: O2 on-line
(G165) The purpose of this filter is to decouple the EMF controller precontrol from
the EMF controller.

11-40 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P281 Filter time for setpoint for EMF controller [SW 1.9 and later] 0 to 10000 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[ms] FS=0 P051 = 40
FDS Filtering of the EMF setpoint at the input of the EMF controller. 1ms Type: O2 on-line
(G165) The purpose of this filter is to decouple the EMF controller precontrol from
the EMF controller.
P282 Filter time for actual value for EMF controller [SW 1.9 and later] 0 to 10000 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[ms] FS=0 P051 = 40
FDS Filtering of actual EMF value at the input of the EMF controller. 1ms Type: O2 on-line
(G165)
P283 Filter time for actual value for EMF controller precontrol 0 to 10000 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[SW 1.9 and later] [ms] FS=0 P051 = 40
FDS 1ms Type: O2 on-line
(G165) Filtering of actual speed value at the input of the EMF controller precontrol.
The purpose of this filter is to stabilize the EMF controller precontrol, even
when the actual speed signal is unsteady or distorted by harmonics.
P284 Set EMF controller P component to zero 0 to 1 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
FDS 0 Set controller P component to zero Type: O2 Offline
(G165) (i.e. to obtain pure I controller)
1 Controller P component is active

11.15 Ramp-function generator

(see also Section 8, Sheet G136 and Section 9)
See P639 and P640 for ramp-function generator setting parameters
P295 Mode for rounding the ramp-function generator [SW 1.9 and later] 0 to 1 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FS=0 P051 = 40
FDS 0 If the setpoint is reversed during ramp-up (or ramp-down), 1 Type: O2 on-line
acceleration (deceleration) is aborted and initial rounding of the
(G136) deceleration (acceleration) process begins immediately. The
setpoint is not increased (decreased) any further, but the signal
at the ramp-function generator output has a breakpoint (i.e. a
step change in the acceleration rate).

Ramp generator
output

Ramp generator
input

1 If the setpoint is reversed during ramp-up or ramp-down,

acceleration/deceleration gradually changes to
deceleration/acceleration. The setpoint increases/decreases
further, but there is no breakpoint in the signal at the generator
output (i.e. there is no step change in the acceleration rate).

Ramp generator
output

Ramp generator
input

P296 Ramp-down time of ramp generator with emergency stop (OFF3) 0.00 to 650.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[SW 1.9 and later] [s] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
FDS 0.01 s Type: O2 on-line
(G136) When the "Emergency stop" command is issued, the drive must normally
brake down to 0 speed along the current limit. If the mechanical design of
the drive makes this option impermissible or undesirable, then a value of > 0
can be set here. In this case, the drive brakes along the deceleration ramp
programmed here when the "Emergency stop" command is issued.

see also parameter P330

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-41

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P297 Lower transition rounding of ramp generator with emergency stop 0.00 to 100.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
(OFF3) [SW 1.9 and later] [s] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
FDS 0.01s Type: O2 on-line
(G136) see also parameter P330
P298 Upper transition rounding of ramp generator with emergency stop 0.00 to 100.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
(OFF3) [SW 1.9 and later] [s] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
FDS 0.01s Type: O2 on-line
(G136) see also parameter P330

Limitation at ramp-function generator output (setpoint limiting)

The effective limitations are:
Upper limit: Minimum value of P300 and the four connectors selected with P632
Lower limit: Maximum value of P301 and the four connectors selected with P633
Note: The limiting values for both the positive and negative setpoint limits can have a positive or negative sign. The negative
setpoint limit, for example, can therefore be parameterized to a positive value and the positive setpoint limit to a negative
value.
P300 Positive limitation at ramp-function generator output -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [%] FS=100.00 P051 = 40
(G137) 0.01% Type: I2 Online
P301 Negative limitation at ramp-function generator output -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [%] FS=-100.00 P051 = 40
(G137) 0.01% Type: I2 Online
P302 Select ramp-function generator / ramp-up integrator mode 0 to 3 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
0 Normal ramp-function generator operation: Type: O2 Offline
FDS Ramp-function generator setting 1 (P303 to P306) is applied.
When a binary selectable input parameterized as "Ramp-
(G136) function generator setting 2" (P307 to P310)” (selected in P637)
or ”Ramp-function generator setting 3" (P311 to P314)”
(selected in P638), generator setting 2 or 3 is applied as
appropriate.
1 Ramp-up integrator operation:
When the setpoint is reached for the first time, ramp-function
generator setting 1 is switched over to a ramp-up/down
times = 0
2 Ramp-up integrator operation:
When the setpoint is reached for the first time, ramp-function
generator setting 1 is switched over to generator setting 2 (P307
to P310)
3 Ramp-up integrator operation:
When the setpoint is reached for the first time, ramp-function
generator setting 1 is switched over to generator setting 3 (P311
to P314)

Ramp-function generator parameter set 1 (see also parameter P330)

P303 Ramp-up time 1 0.00 to 650.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [s] FS=10.00 P051 = 40
(G136) 0.01s Type: O2 Online
P304 Ramp-down time 1 0.00 to 650.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [s] FS=10.00 P051 = 40
(G136) 0.01s Type: O2 Online
P305 Lower transition rounding 1 0.00 to 100.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [s] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
(G136) 0.01s Type: O2 Online
P306 Upper transition rounding 1 0.00 to 100.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [s] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
(G136) 0.01s Type: O2 Online

Ramp-function generator parameter set 2 (see also parameter P330)

Ramp-function generator parameter set 2 is selected via the binector parameterized in P637.
P307 Ramp-up time 2 0.00 to 650.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [s] FS=10.00 P051 = 40
(G136) 0.01s Type: O2 Online
P308 Ramp-down time 2 0.00 to 650.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [s] FS=10.00 P051 = 40
(G136) 0.01s Type: O2 Online
P309 Lower transition rounding 2 0.00 to 100.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [s] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
(G136) 0.01s Type: O2 Online

11-42 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P310 Upper transition rounding 2 0.00 to 100.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [s] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
(G136) 0.01s Type: O2 Online

Ramp-function generator parameter set 3 (see also parameter P330)

Ramp-function generator parameter set 3 is selected via the binector parameterized in P638.
P311 Ramp-up time 3 0.00 to 650.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [s] FS=10.00 P051 = 40
(G136) 0.01s Type: O2 Online
P312 Ramp-down time 3 0.00 to 650.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [s] FS=10.00 P051 = 40
(G136) 0.01s Type: O2 Online
P313 Lower transition rounding 3 0.00 to 100.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [s] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
(G136) 0.01s Type: O2 Online
P314 Upper transition rounding 3 0.00 to 100.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [s] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
(G136) 0.01s Type: O2 Online

Displays
r315 Display of effective times 0.00 to Ind: 4 P052 = 3
650.00 / 10.00 Type: O2
i001: Display of effective ramp-up time [s]
(G136) i002: Display of effective ramp-down time 0.01s
i003: Display of effective lower transition rounding
i004: Display of effective upper transition rounding
r316 Display of ramp-function generator status Ind: None P052 = 3
Type: V2
Mode of representation on operator panel (PMU):
(G136)

15

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Segment:
0 RFG enable
1 RFG start
2 Setpoint enable & /OFF1
3 Set RFG
4 RFG tracking
5 Bypass RFG
7 Ramp-down
15 Ramp-up

P317 Ramp-function generator tracking 0 to 1 Ind: 4 P052 = 3

* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
FDS 0 Ramp-function generator tracking is not active Type: O2 Offline
(G136) 1 Ramp-function generator tracking is active
P318 Set ramp-function generator output 0 to 2 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
This parameter determines how the ramp-function generator output is set at Type: O2 Offline
FDS the commencement of a "Shutdown" process:
(G136)
0 The ramp-function generator output is not set at the
commencement of a "Shutdown" process”
1 At the commencement of "Shutdown", the output is set to the
actual speed value K0167 (actual speed value K0167 is
"unfiltered")
2 At the commencement of "Shutdown", the output is set to the
actual speed value K0179 (value is filtered by PT1 in P200,
other filters may also be active)
(setting may not be used in conjunction with P205 > 0)
During a "Shutdown" process, the limitation at the ramp-function generator
output is not effective. P318 must be set to 1 or 2 to prevent any
(temporary) excess speed during "Shutdown" when the generator output is
limited.

P319 Delay time for enabling ramp-function generator [SW 1.5 and later] 0.00 to 10.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [s] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
(G136) 0.01s Type: O2 Online

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-43

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)

11.16 Setpoint processing

P320 Multiplier for main setpoint -300.00 to 300.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[%] FS=100.00 P051 = 40
FDS 0.01% Type: I2 Online
(G135)
P321 Multiplier for additional setpoint -300.00 to 300.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[%] FS=100.00 P051 = 40
FDS 0.01% Type: I2 Online
(G135)
P322 Source for multiplier for main setpoint All connector Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* numbers FS=1 P051 = 40
0 = Connector K0000 1 Type: L2 Offline
FDS 1 = Connector K0001
(G135) etc.
P323 Source for multiplier for additional setpoint All connector Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* numbers FS=1 P051 = 40
0 = Connector K0000 1 Type: L2 Offline
FDS 1 = Connector K0001
(G135) etc.

11.17 Ramp-function generator

P330 Factor for ramp-function generator times [SW 2.1 and later] 0 bis 1 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* 1 WE=0 P051 = 40
FDS Selection of a factor for the values set in parameters P296, P297, P298, Typ: O2 off-line
(G136) P303 to P314 and P542 (ramp-function generator times).
0 Factor = 1
1 Factor = 60
i.e. effective ramp-function generator times = values set in
[minutes] instead of in [seconds]

11.18 Setting values for monitoring functions and limits

Setting values for monitoring functions
P351 Threshold for undervoltage trip -90 to 0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[%] FS=-20 P051 = 40
FDS If the line voltage drops below a specific value (P078) and does not return to Armature: Type: I2 Online
the permissible tolerance range within the "Restart time" set in P086, fault 1% of P078.001
message F006 is activated. The drive dwells in operating state o4 or o5 Field:
while the line undervoltage persists. 1% of P078.002
P352 Source for overvoltage trip 0 to 99 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[%] FS=20 P051 = 40
FDS If the line voltage exceeds a specific value (P078) and does not return to the Armature: Type: O2 Online
permissible tolerance range within the "Restart time" set in P086, fault 1% of P078.001
message F007 is activated. Field:
1% of P078.002
P353 Response threshold for phase failure monitoring 10 to 100 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[%] FS=40 P051 = 40
FDS If the line voltage drops below the permissible value in operating states of Armature: Type: O2 Online
≤ o4 and does not return to an "acceptable" value within the "Restart time" 1% of P078.001
set in P086, fault message F004 or F005 is activated. Field:
The drive dwells in operating state o4 or o5 for the period that the line 1% of P078.002
voltage remains below the threshold and during the subsequent voltage
stabilization period set in P090.

When a switch-on command is entered, the converter dwells in operating

states o4 and o5 for a maximum total delay period for both states set in
P089 until the voltages in all phases exceed the threshold set in this
parameter before fault message F004 or F005 is activated.
P355 Stall protection time 0.0 to 600.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[s] FS=0,5 P051 = 40
FDS F035 is activated if the conditions for the "Stall protection" fault message are 0.1s Type: O2 Online
fulfilled for longer than the period set in P355.
When P355=0.0, the "Drive blocked" monitoring function (F035) is
deactivated and alarm A035 is likewise suppressed.

11-44 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P357 Threshold for tachometer interruption monitoring 10 to 70 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[%] FS=10 P051 = 40
FDS F042 is suppressed if the actual EMF value is lower than the value set in 1% Type: O2 Online
P357.
The setting is entered as a % of the ideal mean DC voltage value at α=0,
i.e. as a % of P078.001 * 1.35
P360 Response delay for external faults and alarms 0 to 10000 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[ms] FS=0 P051 = 40
(G180) The fault message or alarm is not activated on the converter until the 1ms Type: O2 Online
(G181) appropriate input or corresponding control word bit (as selected in P675,
P686, P688 or P689) has been in the LOW state for at least the time period
set in this parameter (see also Section 8, Sheets G180 and G181).

i001: Delay for external fault 1

i002: Delay for external fault 2
i003: Delay for external alarm 1
i004: Delay for external alarm 2
P361 Delay time for the undervoltage monitoring [SW 1.7 and later] 0 to 60000 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[ms] FS=0 P051 = 40
FDS Activation of the fault message F006 (line undervoltage) is delayed by the 1ms Type: O2 on-line
time that can be set in this parameter. During this delay time firing pulses
are output!
Another time which is parameterized for automatic restarting (P086) only
begins after the time set here has elapsed.
P362 Delay time for the overvoltage monitoring [SW 1.7 and later] 0 to 60000 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[ms] FS=10000 P051 = 40
FDS Activation of the fault message F007 (line overvoltage) is delayed by the 1ms Type: O2 on-line
time that can be set in this parameter. During this delay time firing pulses
are output!
Another time which is parameterized for automatic restarting (P086) only
begins after the time set here has elapsed.
P363 Threshold for the minimum line frequency [SW 1.8 and later] 23.0 to 60.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[Hz] FS=45.0 P051 = 40
FDS If the line frequency falls below the value set here and does not rise above it 0.1 Hz Type: O2 on-line
again within the "restart" time set in P086, the fault message F008 is
activated. As long as the line frequency is below the value set here, the
drive is kept in operating state o4 or o5.
[values < 45.0 Hz can be set in SW 1.9 and later]

CAUTION
Operation in the extended frequency range between 23 Hz and 110 Hz
is available on request.

P364 Threshold for the maximum line frequency [SW 1.8 and later] 50.0 to 110.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[Hz] FS=65.0 P051 = 40
FDS If the line frequency rises above the value set here and does not fall below it 0.1 Hz Type: O2 on-line
again within the "restart" time set in P086, the fault message F009 is
activated. As long as the line frequency is above the value set here, the
drive is kept in operating state o4 or o5.

CAUTION
Operation in the extended frequency range between 23 Hz and 110 Hz
is available on request.

11.19 Setting values for limit-value monitors

(see also Section 8, Sheet G187 und G188)
n < nmin signal
P370 Speed threshold nmin 0.00 to 199.99 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[%] FS=0,50 P051 = 40
FDS Speed threshold for n < nmin limit-value monitor. 0.01% of maximum Type: O2 Online
Note: speed
(G187) This threshold also affects the sequence of control operations for
"Shutdown", "Fast stop", cancellation of the "Inching" or "Crawling"
command, the "Braking with field reversal" function and the brake control
operation (see Section 9).

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-45

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P371 Hysteresis for n < nmin signal 0.00 to 199.99 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[%] FS=0,50 P051 = 40
FDS This value is added to the response threshold if n < nmin is active. 0.01% of maximum Type: O2 Online
(G187) speed

n < ncomp. signal

P373 Speed threshold ncomp. 0.00 to 199.99 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[%] FS=100.00 P051 = 40
FDS Speed threshold for n < ncomp. signal 0.01% of maximum Type: O2 Online
(G187) speed
P374 Hysteresis for < ncomp. signal (n < ncomp. signal) 0.00 to 199.99 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[%] FS=3.00 P051 = 40
FDS This value is added to the response threshold if n < ncomp. is active. 0.01% of maximum Type: O2 Online
(G187) speed
P375 OFF delay for n < ncomp. signal 0.0 to 100.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [s] FS=3.0 P051 = 40
(G187) 0.1s Type: O2 Online

Setpoint/actual value deviation 2

P376 Permissible setpoint/actual value deviation 2 [SW 1.9 and later] 0.00 to 199.99 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[%] FD=3.00 P051 = 40
FDS 0.01% of maximum Type: O2 on-line
(G187) speed
P377 Hysteresis for setpoint/actual value deviation 2 signal 0.00 to 199.99 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[SW 1.9 and later] [%] FS=1.00 P051 = 40
FDS 0.01% of maximum Type: O2 on-line
(G187) This value is added to the response threshold if a setpoint/actual value speed
deviation signal is active
P378 Response delay for setpoint/actual value deviation signal 2 0.0 to 100.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [SW 1.9 and later] [s] FS=3.0 P051 = 40
(G187) 0.1s Type: O2 on-line

Overspeed
P380 Maximum speed in positive direction of rotation 0.0 to 199.9 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[%] FS=120.0 P051 = 40
FDS 0.1% of maximum Type: O2 Online
(G188) speed
P381 Maximum speed in negative direction of rotation -199.9 to 0.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[%] FS=-120.0 P051 = 40
FDS 0.1% of maximum Type: I2 Online
(G188) speed

Setpoint/actual value deviation 1

P388 Permissible deviation between setpoint and actual value 1 0.00 to 199.99 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[%] FS=3.00 P051 = 40
FDS 0.01% of maximum Type: O2 Online
(G187) speed
P389 Hysteresis for setpoint/actual value deviation signal 1 0.00 to 199.99 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[%] FS=1.00 P051 = 40
FDS This value is added to the response threshold if a setpoint/actual value 0.01% of maximum Type: O2 Online
(G187) deviation signal is active speed
P390 Response delay for setpoint/actual value deviation signal 1 0.0 to 100.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [s] FS=3.0 P051 = 40
(G187) 0.1s Type: O2 Online

11-46 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
If < If min signal
P394 Field current threshold If min 0.00 to 199.99 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[%] FS=3.00 P051 = 40
FDS Field current threshold for If < If min limit-value monitor. 0.01% of converter Type: O2 Online
rated field DC
(G188) Note: current (r073.i02)
This threshold affects the sequence of control operations for the "Direction
of rotation reversal using field reversal" and "Braking with field reversal"
functions (see Section 9).
The If < If min signal is connected to binector B0215, the actual value at
field current controller input K0265 is applied as If.
B0215 = 0 when K0265 > threshold set in P394
B0215 = 1 when K0265 < threshold set in P394 + hysteresis set in P395
0 → 1 transition takes place when K0265 < P394
1 → 0 transition takes place when K0265 > P394 + P395

P395 Hysteresis for If < If min signal 0.00 to 100.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[%] FS=1.00 P051 = 40
FDS This value is added to the response threshold if If < If min is active. 0.01% of converter Type: O2 Online
(see also P394) rated field DC
(G188) current (r073.i02)

Field current monitoring

Fault message F005 (fault value 4) is activated if the actual field current (K0265) is lower than the percentage of the field current setpoint
(K0268) set in P396 for longer than the time set in parameter P397.
F005 is also triggered if "I Field extern < I f min" (see P265) is the case for longer than the time set at P397.
Note:
Fault message F005 is only activated, however, if the field current setpoint is > 2% of the converter rated DC current of the field (r073.i02)
ist.
P396 Threshold for field current monitoring [SW 1.9 and later] 1 to 100 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[%] FS=50 P051 = 40
FDS 0.01% of setpoint at Type: O2 on-line
field current con-
(G167) troller input (K0268)
P397 Field current monitoring time [SW 1.9 and later] 0.02 to 60.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [s] FS=0.50 P051 = 40
(G167) 0.01s Type: O2 on-line

If < If x signal
P398 Field current threshold If x 0.00 to 199.99 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[%] FS=80.00 P051 = 40
FDS Setpoint-oriented field current threshold for If < If x limit-value monitor. 0.01% of setpoint at Type: O2 Online
field current
(G188) Note: controller input
This threshold affects the sequence of control operations for the "Direction (K0268)
of rotation reversal using field reversal" and "Braking with field reversal"
functions (see Section 9).
The If < If x signal is connected to binector B0216, the actual value at field
current controller input K0265 is applied as If.
B0216 = 0 when K0265 > threshold set in P398
B0216 = 1 when K0265 < threshold set in P398 + hysteresis set in P399
0 → 1 transition takes place when K0265 < P398
1 → 0 transition takes place when K0265 > P398 + P399
P399 Hysteresis for If < If x signal 0.00 to 100.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[%] FS=1.00 P051 = 40
FDS This value is added to the response threshold if If < If x is active. 0.01% of converter Type: O2 Online
(see also P398) rated field DC
(G188) current (r073.i02)

11.20 Settable fixed values

Function: The value set in the parameter is applied to the specified connector
P401 K401 fixed value -199.99 to 199.99 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
(G120) is applied to connector K0401 0.01% Type: I2 Online

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-47

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P402 K402 fixed value -199.99 to 199.99 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
(G120) is applied to connector K0402 0.01% Type: I2 Online
P403 K403 fixed value -199.99 to 199.99 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
(G120) is applied to connector K0403 0.01% Type: I2 Online
P404 K404 fixed value -199.99 to 199.99 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
(G120) is applied to connector K0404 0.01% Type: I2 Online
P405 K405 fixed value -199.99 to 199.99 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
(G120) is applied to connector K0405 0.01% Type: I2 Online
P406 K406 fixed value -199.99 to 199.99 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
(G120) is applied to connector K0406 0.01% Type: I2 Online
P407 K407 fixed value -199.99 to 199.99 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
(G120) is applied to connector K0407 0.01% Type: I2 Online
P408 K408 fixed value -199.99 to 199.99 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
(G120) is applied to connector K0408 0.01% Type: I2 Online
P409 K409 fixed value -199.99 to 199.99 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
(G120) is applied to connector K0409 0.01% Type: I2 Online
P410 K410 fixed value -199.99 to 199.99 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
(G120) is applied to connector K0410 0.01% Type: I2 Online
P411 K411 fixed value -199.99 to 199.99 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
(G120) is applied to connector K0411 0.01% Type: I2 Online
P412 K412 fixed value -32768 to 32767 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
(G120) is applied to connector K0412 Type: I2 Online
P413 K413 fixed value -32768 to 32767 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
(G120) is applied to connector K0413 Type: I2 Online
P414 K414 fixed value -32768 to 32767 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
(G120) is applied to connector K0414 Type: I2 Online
P415 K415 fixed value -32768 to 32767 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
(G120) is applied to connector K0415 Type: I2 Online
P416 K416 fixed value -32768 to 32767 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
(G120) is applied to connector K0416 Type: I2 Online

11.21 Fixed control bits

Function: The value set in the parameter is applied to the specified binector
P421 B421 fixed bit 0 to 1 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
(G120) is applied to binector B0421 Type: O2 Online
P422 B422 fixed bit 0 to 1 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
(G120) is applied to binector B0422 Type: O2 Online
P423 B423 fixed bit 0 to 1 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
(G120) is applied to binector B0423 Type: O2 Online
P424 B424 fixed bit 0 to 1 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
(G120) is applied to binector B0424 Type: O2 Online
P425 B425 fixed bit 0 to 1 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
(G120) is applied to binector B0425 Type: O2 Online
P426 B426 fixed bit 0 to 1 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
(G120) is applied to binector B0426 Type: O2 Online
P427 B427 fixed bit 0 to 1 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
(G120) is applied to binector B0427 Type: O2 Online

11-48 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P428 B428 fixed bit 0 to 1 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
(G120) is applied to binector B0428 Type: O2 Online

11.22 Digital setpoint input (fixed setpoint, inching and crawling setpoints)
(see also Section 8, Sheets G127, G129 and G130)
Fixed setpoint

Function: Up to 8 connectors can be selected in P431 indices .01 to .08. These can be applied as an additional fixed setpoint (K0204,
K0209) via the binectors selected in P430, indices .01 to .08 (setpoint is applied when binector switches to log. "1" state). P432
indices .01 to .08 can be set to define for each setpoint individually whether the ramp-function generator must be bypassed on
setpoint injection.

If fixed setpoint injection is not selected, the connector set in P433 is applied to K0209.

P430 Source for fixed-setpoint injection All binector numbers Ind: 8 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
Selection of binector to control injection of the fixed setpoint Type: L2 Offline
(G127) ("1" state = fixed setpoint injected).
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
P431 Source for fixed setpoint All connector Ind: 8 P052 = 3
* numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
Selection of connector to be injected as the fixed setpoint 1 Type: L2 Offline
(G127) 0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
P432 Source for selection of ramp-function generator bypass 0 to 1 Ind: 8 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
Selection as to whether or not ramp-function generator must be bypassed Type: O2 Offline
(G127) when the fixed setpoint is injected.
The ramp-function generator is bypassed if the AND operation between the
binector selected via an index of P430 and the setting in the same index of
P432 produces a log. "1"
P433 Source for standard setpoint All connector Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* numbers FS=11 P051 = 40
Selection of the connector to be applied if fixed-setpoint injection is not 1 Type: L2 Offline
FDS selected
(G127) 0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

Inching setpoint
Function: Up to 8 connectors can be selected in P436 indices .01 to .08. These can be applied as an inching setpoint (K0202, K0207) via
the binectors selected in P435, indices .01 to .08 (setpoint is applied when binector switches to log. "1" state). P437 indices .01
to .08 can be set to define for each setpoint individually whether the ramp-function generator must be bypassed on setpoint
injection. If more than one inching setpoint is injected, an output value corresponding to inching setpoint = 0% is applied.

If inching setpoint injection is not selected, the connector set in P438 is applied to K0207.
P435 Source for injection of inching setpoint All binector numbers Ind: 8 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
Selection of binector to control injection of the inching setpoint Type: L2 Offline
(G129) ("1" state = inching setpoint injected).
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
P436 Source for inching setpoint All connector Ind: 8 P052 = 3
* numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
Selection of connector to be injected as the inching setpoint 1 Type: L2 Offline
(G129) 0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-49

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P437 Source for selection of ramp-function generator bypass 0 to 1 Ind: 8 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
Selection as to whether or not ramp-function generator must be bypassed Type: O2 Offline
(G129) when the inching setpoint is injected.
The ramp-function generator is bypassed if the AND operation between the
binector selected via an index of P435 and the setting in the same index of
P437 produces a log. "1".
P438 Source for standard setpoint All connector Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* numbers FS=208 P051 = 40
Selection of the connector to be applied if inching-setpoint injection is not 1 Type: L2 Offline
FDS selected
(G129) 0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

Crawling setpoint
Function: Up to 8 connectors can be selected in P441 indices .01 to .08. These can be applied as an additional crawling setpoint (K0201,
K0206) via the binectors selected in P440, indices .01 to .08. P445 can be set to define whether the setpoint must be applied
when the selected binectors have reached the log. "1" state (when P445=0) or in response to a 0 → 1 transition (when
P445=1). When setpoint injection in response to a 0 → 1 transition is selected, the setpoint injection function is reset when the
binector selected in P444 switches to the log. "0" state. P442 indices .01 to .08 can be set to define for each setpoint
individually whether the ramp-function generator must be bypassed on setpoint injection.

If crawling setpoint injection is not selected, the connector set in P443 is applied to K0206.
P440 Source for injection of crawling setpoint All binector numbers Ind: 8 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
Selection of binector to control injection of the crawling setpoint. Type: L2 Offline
(G130) 0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
P441 Source for crawling setpoint All connector Ind: 8 P052 = 3
* numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
Selection of connector to be injected as the crawling setpoint 1 Type: L2 Offline
(G130) 0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
P442 Source for selection of ramp-function generator bypass 0 to 1 Ind: 8 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
Selection as to whether or not ramp-function generator must be bypassed Type: O2 Offline
(G130) when the crawling setpoint is injected.
The ramp-function generator is bypassed if the AND operation between the
binector selected via an index of P440 and the setting in the same index of
P442 produces a log. "1".
P443 Source for standard setpoint All connector Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* numbers FS=207 P051 = 40
Selection of the connector to be applied if crawling-setpoint injection is not 1 Type: L2 Offline
FDS selected
(G130) 0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
P444 Source for standstill command All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
Selection of the binector to control the standstill operation (OFF1) or Type: L2 Offline
BDS resetting of crawling setpoint injection when P445=1 (log. "0" state = reset).
(G130) 0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

11-50 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P445 Selection of level/edge for switch-on/crawling 0 to 1 Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
Selection to define whether ON command must be input via terminal 37 and Type: O2 Offline
(G130) the crawling setpoint injected in response to a log. "1" level or to a 0 → 1
transition

0 ON with log. "1" state at terminal 37 and

injection of crawling setpoint with binectors selected in P440 in
log. "1" state
1 ON in response to 0 → 1 transition at terminal 37 and
injection of crawling setpoint in response to 0 → 1 transition of
binectors selected in P440
With this setting, the ON command or injection command for the
crawling setpoint is stored. The memory is reset when the
binector selected in P444 switches to the log. "0" state.

11.23 Position sensing with pulse encoder

See parameters P140 to P148 for pulse encoder definition and monitoring
P450 Resetting of position counter 0 to 3 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
0 Reset position counter OFF Type: O2 Offline
FDS
1 Reset position counter with zero marker
(G145) 2 Reset position counter with zero marker when LOW signal is
applied to terminal 39
3 Reset position counter when LOW signal is applied to terminal
39
Note: Counter resetting with P450 = 2 and 3 is executed in the hardware
and is not affected by how the binectors controlled by terminal 39 are
interconnected
P451 Position counter hysteresis 0 to 1 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
0 Hysteresis for rotational direction reversal OFF Type: O2 Offline
FDS
1 Hysteresis for rotational direction reversal ON (the first pulse
(G145) encoder input pulse after a change in rotational direction is not
counted)
P452 Source for "Reset position counter" command [SW 1.9 and later] All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
Selection of binector to control resetting of the position counter. Type: L2 off-line
BDS
0 = binector B0000
(G145) 1 = binector B0001
etc.
P453 Source for "Enable zero marker counter" command [SW 1.9 and later] All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
Selection of binector to control enabling of the zero marker counter Type: L2 off-line
BDS
0 = binector B0000
(G145) 1 = binector B0001
etc.

11.24 Connector selector switches

(see also Section 8, Function Diagram Sheet G124)
P455 Source for inputs of connector selector switch 1 [SW 1.9 and later] All connector Ind: 3 P052 = 3
* numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
Selection of connectors for the input signals for connector selector switch 1. 1 Type: L2 off-line
(G124) 0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
P456 Source for control of connector selector switch 1 [SW 1.9 and later] All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
Selection of binectors to control connector selector switch 1. Type: L2 off-line
(G124) 0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-51

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P457 Source for inputs of connector selector switch 2 [SW 1.9 and later] All connector Ind: 3 P052 = 3
* numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
Selection of connectors for the input signals for connector selector switch 2. 1 Type: L2 off-line
(G124) 0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
P458 Source for control of connector selector switch 2 [SW 1.9 and later] All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
Selection of binectors to control connector selector switch 2. Type: L2 off-line
(G124) 0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

11.25 Motorized potentiometer

(see also Section 8, Sheet G126)
P460 Control word for motorized potentiometer ramp-function generator 0 to 1 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
0 The motorized potentiometer ramp generator is bypassed in Type: O2 Offline
FDS Automatic mode (same effect as for P462 and P463 = 0.01, i.e.
the generator output is made to follow the automatic setpoint
(G126) without delay)
1 Motorized potentiometer ramp generator is active in Manual and
Automatic modes
P461 Source for setpoint in Automatic mode All connector Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
Selection of the connector to be applied as the Automatic setpoint to the 1 Type: L2 Offline
FDS ramp-function generator in the motorized potentiometer
(G126) 0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
P462 Ramp-up time for motorized potentiometer 0.01 to 300.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [s] FS=10.00 P051 = 40
(G126) 0.01s Type: O2 Online
P463 Ramp-down time for motorized potentiometer 0.01 to 300.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [s] FS=10.00 P051 = 40
(G126) 0.01s Type: O2 Online
P464 Time difference for dy/dt 0.01 to 300.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[s] FS=10.00 P051 = 40
FDS Setting of dt for the output of dy/dt at a connector, 0.01s Type: O2 Online
i.e. on K0241 the change in the output quantity (K0240) is output within the
(G126) time set in P464, multiplied by the factor set in P465
(unit of time setting is [s] if P465=0 or [min] if P465=1)
Example: - The ramp-function generator is currently ramping up with a
ramp-up time of P462=5s, i.e. a ramp-up operation from y=0%
to y=100% takes 5s.
- A time difference dt of P464=2s is set.
- ⇒ A dy/dt of 40% appears at connector K0241 since the dy
within the set dt of 2 s equals (2s/5s)*100%.
P465 Factor of expansion for motorized potentiometer 0 to 1 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
The effective ramp-up time, ramp-down time or time difference for dy/dt is Type: O2 Online
FDS the product of the time setting in parameter P462, P463 and P464
respectively, multiplied by the factor set in this parameter.
(G126)
0 Parameters P462, P463 and P464 are multiplied by a factor of 1
1 Parameters P462, P463 and P464 are multiplied by a factor of 60
P466 Source for motorized potentiometer setting value All connector Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
Selection of the connector to be injected as the motorized potentiometer 1 Type: L2 Offline
FDS setting value
(G126) 0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
P467 Motorized potentiometer starting value -199.9 to 199.9 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [%] FS=0.0 P051 = 40
(G126) Starting value of motorized potentiometer after ON when P473 = 0 0.1% Type: I2 Online
P468 Setpoint for "Raise motorized potentiometer” -199.99 to 199.99 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [%] FS=100.00 P051 = 40
(G126) Motorized potentiometer manual operation: Setpoint for "Raise motorized 0.01% Type: I2 Online
potentiometer"

11-52 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P469 Setpoint for "Lower motorized potentiometer ” -199.99 to 199.99 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [%] FS=-100.00 P051 = 40
(G126) Motorized potentiometer manual operation: Setpoint for "Lower motorized 0.01% Type: I2 Online
potentiometer"
P470 Source for clockwise/counter-clockwise switchover All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
Selection of binector to control "Clockwise/counter-clockwise Type: L2 Offline
BDS switchover"
("0" state = clockwise).
(G126)
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
P471 Source for manual/automatic switchover All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
Selection of binector to control "Manual/automatic switchover" Type: L2 Offline
BDS ("0" state = manual).
(G126) 0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
P472 Source for set motorized potentiometer All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
Selection of binector to control "Set motorized potentiometer" Type: L2 Offline
BDS ("0" to "1" transition = set motorized potentiometer).
(G126) 0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
P473 Storage of output value 0 to 1 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
0 No storage of output value: Type: O2 Offline
FDS The output is set to 0 in all operating states of >o5.
The starting point after ON is determined by P467 (MOP starting
(G126) value).
1 Non-volatile storage of output value:
The output value remains stored in all operating states and after
voltage disconnection or failure. The last value stored is output
again after voltage recovery/reconnection.

11.26 Oscillation

Function:
Parameters P480 to P483 define the waveshape of a rectangular signal (oscillation setpoint K0203). The value set in P480 determines the
signal level for the time period set in P481 and the value set in P482 the signal level for the time period set in P483.

Oscillation: Selected in P485. The free-running rectangular signal is switched through to the output K0208.
P480 Oscillation setpoint 1 -199.9 to 199.9 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[%] FS=0,5 P051 = 40
FDS 0.1% of maximum Type: I2 Online
(G128) speed
P481 Oscillation time 1 0.1 to 300.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [s] FS=0.1 P051 = 40
(G128) 0.1s Type: O2 Online
P482 Oscillation setpoint 2 -199.9 to 199.9 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[%] FS=-0,4 P051 = 40
FDS 0.1% of maximum Type: I2 Online
(G128) speed
P483 Oscillation time 2 0.1 to 300.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [s] FS=0.1 P051 = 40
(G128) 0.1s Type: O2 Online
P484 Source for standard setpoint All connector Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* numbers FS=209 P051 = 40
Selection of connector to be injected as the output value when the 1 Type: L2 Offline
FDS "Oscillation" function is not selected
(G128)
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-53

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P485 Source for oscillation selection All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
Selection of binector to control activation of the "Oscillation" function Type: L2 Offline
BDS (log. "1" state = oscillation active)
(G128)
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

11.27 Definition of "Motor interface"

(see also Section 8, Sheets G185 und G186)

CAUTION!
The encoders for measurement and monitoring of the brush length, bearing condition, air flow and motor temperature must be
safely isolated from the power circuit.

P490 Selection of temperature sensor for analog monitoring of motor 0 to 5 Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* temperature 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
Type: O2 Offline
(G185) i001: Temperature sensor at terminals 22 / 23:
i002: Temperature sensor at terminals 204 / 205:
Settings:
0 No temperature sensor
1 KTY84
2 PTC thermistor with R=600Ω 1)
3 PTC thermistor with R=1200Ω 1)
4 PTC thermistor with R=1330Ω 1)
5 PTC thermistor with R=2660Ω 1)

1) PTC thermistor according to DIN 44081 / 44082 with specified R at rated

response temperature, 1330Ω on Siemens motors (setting 4 must be
selected). When a PTC thermistor is selected as the temperature
sensor, it is not necessary to set parameters P491 and P492 (alarm and
trip temperatures). These two temperatures are predetermined by the
type of PTC thermistor installed. Whether an alarm or fault is output
when the operating point of the PTC thermistor is reached depends on
how the relevant input is parameterized (P493.F or P494.F).
P491 Analog monitoring of motor temperature: Alarm temperature 0 to 200 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [°C] FS=0 P051 = 40
(G185) Operative only when P490.x=1. 1°C Type: O2 Online
P492 Analog monitoring of motor temperature: Trip temperature 0 to 200 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [°C] FS=0 P051 = 40
(G185) Operative only when P490.x=1. 1°C Type: O2 Online
P493 Motor temperature analog 1 (temperature sensor at terminals 22 / 23): 0 to 3 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* Tripping of alarm or fault message 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
FDS Type: O2 Offline
Motor temperature grasped with KTY84
(G185) 0 Monitoring deactivated
1 Alarm (A029) at temperature > P491
2 Fault message (F029) at temperature > P492
3 Alarm (A029) at temperature > P491 and
fault message (F029) at temperature > P492
Motor temperature grasped with PTC thermistor
0 Monitoring deactivated
1 Alarm message (A029) when operating point of PTC thermistor
is reached
2 Fault message (F029) when operating point of PTC thermistor is
reached
3 Illegal setting

11-54 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P494 Motor temperature analog 2 (temperature sensor at terminals 204 / 0 to 3 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* 205): Tripping of alarm or fault message 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
FDS Type: O2 Offline
Motor temperature grasped with KTY84
0 Monitoring deactivated
(G185)
1 Alarm (A029) at temperature > P491
2 Fault message (F029) at temperature > P492
3 Alarm (A029) at temperature > P491 and
fault message (F029) at temperature > P492
Motor temperature grasped with PTC thermistor
0 Monitoring deactivated
1 Alarm message (A029) when operating point of PTC thermistor
is reached
2 Fault message (F029) when operating point of PTC thermistor is
reached
3 Illegal setting
P495 Brush length sensing: Tripping of alarm or fault message 0 to 2 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
0 No brush length sensing (terminal 211 is not scanned) Type: O2 Offline
FDS
1 Binary brush length sensing (terminal 211 is scanned)
Alarm (A025) in response to 0 signal
(G186) 2 Binary brush length sensing (terminal 211 is scanned)
Fault message (F025) in response to 0 signal
P496 Bearing condition: Tripping of alarm or fault message 0 to 2 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
0 No bearing condition sensing (terminal 212 is not scanned) Type: O2 Offline
FDS
1 Bearing condition sensing (terminal 212 is scanned)
Alarm (A026) in response to 1 signal
(G186) 2 Bearing condition sensing (terminal 212 is scanned)
Fault message (F026) in response to 1 signal
P497 Air flow: Tripping of alarm or fault message 0 to 2 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
0 No air flow monitoring (terminal 213 is not scanned) Type: O2 Offline
FDS
1 Air flow monitoring (terminal 213 is scanned)
Alarm (A027) in response to 0 signal
(G186) 2 Air flow monitoring (terminal 213 is scanned)
Fault message (F027) in response to 0 signal
P498 Temperature switch: Tripping of alarm or fault message 0 to 2 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
0 No temperature switch connected (terminal 214 is not scanned) Type: O2 Offline
FDS
1 Temperature switch connected (terminal 214 is scanned)
Alarm (A028) in response to 0 signal
(G186) 2 Temperature switch connected (terminal 214 is scanned)
Fault message (F028) in response to 0 signal

11.28 Configuring of torque shell input

P500 Source for torque setpoint for slave drive All connector Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* numbers FS=170 P051 = 40
Selection of the connector to be injected as the torque setpoint for a slave 1 Type: L2 Offline
BDS drive
(G160) 0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
P501 Source for additional torque setpoint All connector Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
Selection of connector to be injected as the additional torque setpoint 1 Type: L2 Offline
BDS
0 = connector K0000
(G160) 1 = connector K0001
etc.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-55

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P502 Source for value to be added to speed controller output All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
* numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
Selection of connector to be injected as the value to be added to the speed 1 Type: L2 Offline
(G152) controller output (in addition to friction and moment of inertia compensation)
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
P503 Multiplier for torque setpoint in slave mode -300.00 to 300.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [%] FS=100.00 P051 = 40
(G160) 0.01% Type: I2 on-line

11.29 Speed limiting controller

(see also Section 8, Sheet G160)
The output of the speed limiting controller comprises a positive (K0136) and a negative (K0137) torque limit. These limits are applied to
the torque limitation
P509 Source for input quantity (n-act) of speed limiting controller All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
* numbers FS=167 P051 = 40
(G160) 0 = connector K0000 1 Type: L2 Offline
1 = connector K0001
etc.
P510 Source for pos. torque limit of speed limiting controller All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
* numbers FS=2 P051 = 40
Selection of the connector to be injected as the limit value for torque 1 Type: L2 Offline
(G160) limitation 1
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
P511 Source for neg. torque limit of speed limiting controller All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
* numbers FS=4 P051 = 40
Selection of the connector to be injected as the limit value for torque 1 Type: L2 Offline
limitation 2
(G160)
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
P512 Maximum speed in positive direction of rotation 0.0 to 199.9 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [%] FS=105.0 P051 = 40
(G160) 0.1% of rated speed Type: O2 Online
P513 Maximum speed in negative direction of rotation -199.9 to 0.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [%] FS=-105.0 P051 = 40
(G160) 0.1% of rated speed Type: I2 Online
P515 P gain of speed limiting controller 0.10 to 200.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS 0.01 FS=3.00 P051 = 40
(G160) Type: O2 Online

11.30 Friction compensation

(see also Section 8, Sheet G153)
Parameters P520 to P530 are the armature current and torque setpoint required for a stationary input signal (factory setting: speed
controller actual value K0179) of 0%, 10% to 100% of the maximum value (in steps of 10%).
These parameters are intermediate points along the friction curve. Depending on P170 (0 or 1) they are either an armature current or a
torque setpoint and are set automatically when the friction and moment of inertia compensation (P051=28) are optimized. P520 is then set
to 0.0%.
The intermediate points are interpolated linearly during which the output of the friction compensation assumes the sign of the input signal.
P530 is specified by the friction compensation even for input signals >100% of the maximum signal.
During operation in both directions we recommend leaving P520 at 0.0% in order to avoid armature current vibration at 0% of the input
signal.

11-56 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P519 Source for input signal of the friction compensation [SW 2.0 and later] All connector Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* numbers FS= P051 = 40
Selection of the input signals that are added and led to the input of the 1 i001: 179 offline
(G153) friction compensation. i002: 0
i001 Input signal, with sign Type: L2

i002 Input signal with absolute value generator

Settings:
0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
etc.
P520 Friction at 0% speed 0.0 to 100.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[%] FS=0.0 P051 = 40
FDS Setting as % of converter rated DC current or rated torque 0.1% Type: O2 Online
(G153)
P521 Friction at 10% speed 0.0 to 100.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[%] FS=0.0 P051 = 40
FDS Setting as % of converter rated DC current or rated torque 0.1% Type: O2 Online
(G153)
P522 Friction at 20% speed 0.0 to 100.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[%] FS=0.0 P051 = 40
FDS Setting as % of converter rated DC current or rated torque 0.1% Type: O2 Online
(G153)
P523 Friction at 30% speed 0.0 to 100.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[%] FS=0.0 P051 = 40
FDS Setting as % of converter rated DC current or rated torque 0.1% Type: O2 Online
(G153)
P524 Friction at 40% speed 0.0 to 100.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[%] FS=0.0 P051 = 40
FDS Setting as % of converter rated DC current or rated torque 0.1% Type: O2 Online
(G153)
P525 Friction at 50% speed 0.0 to 100.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[%] FS=0.0 P051 = 40
FDS Setting as % of converter rated DC current or rated torque 0.1% Type: O2 Online
(G153)
P526 Friction at 60% speed 0.0 to 100.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[%] FS=0.0 P051 = 40
FDS Setting as % of converter rated DC current or rated torque 0.1% Type: O2 Online
(G153)
P527 Friction at 70% speed 0.0 to 100.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[%] FS=0.0 P051 = 40
FDS Setting as % of converter rated DC current or rated torque 0.1% Type: O2 Online
(G153)
P528 Friction at 80% speed 0.0 to 100.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[%] FS=0.0 P051 = 40
FDS Setting as % of converter rated DC current or rated torque 0.1% Type: O2 Online
(G153)
P529 Friction at 90% speed 0.0 to 100.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[%] FS=0.0 P051 = 40
FDS Setting as % of converter rated DC current or rated torque 0.1% Type: O2 Online
(G153)
P530 Friction at 100% speed and higher 0.0 to 100.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[%] FS=0.0 P051 = 40
FDS Setting as % of converter rated DC current or rated torque 0.1% Type: O2 Online
(G153)

11.31 Compensation of moment of inertia (dv/dt injection)

(see also Section 8, Sheet G153)
P540 Acceleration time 0.00 to 650.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[s] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
FDS The acceleration time is the time that would be needed to accelerate the 0.01s Type: O2 Online
drive from 0% to 100% of maximum speed (with no friction) at 100%
(G153) converter rated DC current (armature) and 100% rated motor field current
(i.e. 100% flux). It is a measure of the moment of inertia on the motor shaft.
This parameter is set automatically during the optimization run for friction
and moment of inertia compensation (P051=28).
P541 P gain of acceleration 0.00 to 650.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
0.01 FS=0.00 P051 = 40
FDS Proportional gain for "SAD-dependent acceleration" function (see also Type: O2 Online
(G153) parameter P543)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-57

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P542 Time difference for dy/dt of ramp-function generator 0.01 to 300.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[s] FS=0.01 P051 = 40
FDS Ramp-function generator: 0.01s Type: O2 Online
Setting of dt for the output of dy/dt at a connector, i.e. at K0191, the change
(G136) in the output quantity of the ramp-function generator (K0190) is output within
the period set in P542

Example: - The ramp-function generator is currently ramping up with a

ramp-up time of P311=5s, i.e. a ramp-up operation from y=0%
to y=100% takes 5s.
- A time difference dt of P542=2s is set.
- ⇒ A dy/dt of 40% appears at connector K0191 since the dy
within the set dt of 2 s equals (2s/5s)*100%..

(see also parameter P330)

P543 Threshold for SAD-dependent acceleration 0.00 to 100.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
FDS With respect to the SAD-dependent acceleration function, only the 0.01% of maximum Type: O2 Online
component of the speed controller setpoint/actual value difference which speed
(G153) has an absolute value in excess of the threshold set in this parameter is
switched through (see also parameter P541).

Output (value to be multiplied by P541)

199.99%

negative
threshold
-200.00% (-P543) Input (setp./act. val. diff.)
positive 199.99%
threshold
(P543)

-200.00%

P546 Filter time for compensation of moment of inertia 0 to 10000 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [ms] FS=0 P051 = 40
(G153) 1ms Type: O2 Online

11-58 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)

11.32 Speed controller

(see also Section 8, Sheet G151)
further parameters for the speed controller P200 - P236

Speed controller adaptation

The parameters of the speed controller (Kp, Tn, droop) can be altered as a function of any connector to adapt the speed controller
optimally to a changing controlled system.
The diagrams below show the active P gain, the active Integration time and the active droop depending on the value of the set connector.

Adaptation of the P gain:

KP
P550

P225

Threshold 1 Threshold 2 Input

P556 P559 selected in P553
Adaptation of the integration time:
Tn
P551

P226

Threshold 1 Threshold 2 Input

P557 P560 selected in P554

Adaptation of the droop:

St
P552

P227

Threshold 1 Threshold 2 Input

P558 P561 selected in P555

For parameter pairs P225/P550, P226/P551 and P227/P552 all values can be set completely mutually independently, e.g., P550 does not
have to be greater than P225. The above diagrams show only the effect of the individual parameters.
Threshold 1 must always be set smaller than threshold 2, otherwise the fault message F058 is activated.
P550 P gain in the adaptation range 0.10 to 200.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS 0.01 FS=3.00 P051 = 40
(G151) Value of Kp, if Influencing quantity ≤ Threshold 1 Type: O2 on-line
P551 Integration time in the adaptation range [SW 1.7 and later] 0.010 to 10.000 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [s] FS=0.650 P051 = 40
(G151) Value of Tn, if Influencing quantity ≤ Threshold 1 0.001s Type: O2 on-line
P552 Droop in the adaptation range [SW 1.7 and later] 0.0 to 10.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [%] FS=0.0 P051 = 40
(G151) Value of droop, if Influencing quantity ≤ Threshold 1 0.1% Type: O2 on-line
P553 Source for the Influencing quantity of the Kp adaptation All connector Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
Selection of which connector is connected at the influencing quantity for 1 Type: L2 off-line
FDS adaptation of the n controllers P gain
(G151) 0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
P554 Source for the Influencing quantity of the Tn-adaptation All connector Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* [SW 1.7 and later] numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
FDS 1 Type: L2 off-line
Selection of which connector is connected at the influencing quantity for
adaptation of the n controllers integration time
(G151)
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-59

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P555 Source for the Influencing quantity of the droop adaptation All connector Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* [SW 1.7 and later] numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
FDS 1 Type: L2 off-line
Selection of which connector is connected at the influencing quantity for
adaptation of the n controllers droop
(G151)
0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
etc.
P556 Adaptation n controller P gain: Threshold 1 0.00 to 100.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
(G151) 0.01% Type: O2 on-line
P557 Adaptation n controller integration time: Threshold 1 [SW 1.7 and later] 0.00 to 100.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
(G151) 0.01% Type: O2 on-line
P558 Adaptation n controller droop: Threshold 1 [SW 1.7 and later] 0.00 to 100.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
(G151) 0.01% Type: O2 on-line
P559 Adaptation n controller P gain: Threshold 2 0.00 to 100.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
(G151) 0.01% Type: O2 on-line
P560 Adaptation n controller integration time: Threshold 2 [SW 1.7 and later] 0.00 to 100.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
(G151) 0.01% Type: O2 on-line
P561 Adaptation n controller droop: Threshold 2 [SW 1.7 and later] 0.00 to 100.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
(G151) 0.01% Type: O2 on-line

Drehzahlregler - Begrenzung der Statik

P562 Positive speed droop limitation 0.00 to 199.99 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [%] FS=100.00 P051 = 40
(G151) 0.01% Type: O2 Online
P563 Negative speed droop limitation -199.99 to 0.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
FDS [%] FS=-100.00 P051 = 40
(G151) 0.01% Type: I2 Online

Speed controller optimization for drives with oscillating mechanical system

On drives with oscillating mechanical components, it can be useful to optimize the speed controller using optimization run P051=29. The
frequency response of the controlled system for frequencies from 1 Hz to 100 Hz is recorded during optimization.
The drive is first accelerated up to a base speed (P565, FS=20%). A sinusoidal speed setpoint with low amplitude (P566, FS=1%) is then
injected. The frequency of this supplementary setpoint is incremented in 1 Hz steps from 1 Hz up to 100 Hz. An average per frequency is
calculated over a parameterizable number of current peaks (P567, FS=300).
P565 Base speed for frequency response recording [SW 1.9 and later] 1.0 to 30.0 Ind: None P052 = 3
[%] FS=20.0 P051 = 40
0.1% Type: O2 on-line
P566 Amplitude for frequency response recording [SW 1.9 and later] 0.01 to 5.00 Ind: None P052 = 3
[%] FS=1.00 P051 = 40
0.01% Type: O2 on-line
P567 Number of current peaks for frequency response recording 100 to 1000 Ind: None P052 = 3
[SW 1.9 and later] 1 FS=300 P051 = 40
Type: O2 on-line
While the frequency response is being recorded, an average over the
number of current peaks set here is calculated for each measuring
frequency. High values improve the result, but extend the measuring time.
When P567 = 1000, the frequency response recording takes about 9
minutes.

11-60 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)

11.33 Field reversal

(see also Section 9)
P580 Source for selection of "Direction of rotation reversal using field All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* reversal” 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
BDS Type: L2 Offline
Selection of binector to control the "Direction of rotation reversal using field
reversal" function
(G200) 0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
Signal 0: Positive field direction is selected (B0260 = 1, B0261 = 0),
actual speed value is not inverted
Signal 1: Negative field direction is selected (B0260 = 0, B0261 = 1),
actual speed value is inverted
P581 Source for selection of "Braking with field reversal” All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
Selection of binector to control the ”Braking with field reversal" function Type: L2 Offline
BDS
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
(G200) etc.
Signal change 0→1: Reversal of field direction (causes braking);
When n<n-min is reached, the original field direction is
selected again. The drive switches to state o7.2
P582 Source for selection of "Field reversal” [SW 1.9 and later] All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
Selection of binector to control "Field reversal" function Type: L2 off-line
BDS
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
(G200) etc.
Signal 0: Positive field direction is selected (B0260 = 1, B0261 = 0)
Signal 1: Negative field direction is selected (B0260 = 0, B0261 = 1)

P583 Source for actual speed signal for field reversal logic All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
* [SW 1.9 and later] numbers FS=167 P051 = 40
1 Type: L2 off-line
Selection of connector to be used as actual speed value for the field
(G200) reversal logic.
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

11.34 Input quantities for signals

(see also Section 8, Sheet G187 and G188)
P590 Source for setpoint of “nset = nact signal 1” All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
* numbers FS=174 P051 = 40
Setpoint/actual value deviation signal: 1 Type: L2 Offline
(G187) Selection of connector to be injected as input quantity "nset" for the
setpoint/actual value deviation signal.
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
P591 Source for actual value of "n-set = n-act signal 1" All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
* numbers FS=167 P051 = 40
Setpoint/actual value deviation signal: 1 Type: L2 Offline
(G187) Selection of connector to be injected as input quantity "nact" for the
setpoint/actual value deviation signal.
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-61

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P592 Source for actual value of "n < ncomp. signal” All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
* numbers FS=167 P051 = 40
n < ncomp. signal: 1 Type: L2 Offline
(G187) Selection of connector to be injected as input quantity (n) for the n < ncomp.
signal.
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
P593 Source for actual value of “n < nmin signal” All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
* numbers FS=167 P051 = 40
n < nmin signal: 1 Type: L2 Offline
(G187) Selection of connector to be injected as input quantity (n) for the n < nmin
signal.
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
P594 Source for input quantity of "Polarity signal” All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
* numbers FS=170 P051 = 40
Polarity signal of speed setpoint: 1 Type: L2 Offline
(G188) Selection of connector to be injected as input quantity "nset" for the polarity
signal of the speed setpoint.
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
P595 Source for actual value of "Overspeed signal” All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
* numbers FS=167 P051 = 40
Overspeed signal: 1 Type: L2 Offline
(G188) Selection of connector to be injected as input quantity "nact" for the
overspeed signal.
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
P596 Source for setpoint of "nset = nact signal 2” [SW 1.9 and later] All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
* numbers FS=174 P051 = 40
Setpoint/actual value deviation signal: 1 Type: L2 off-line
(G187) Selection of connector to be injected as input quantity "nset" for the
setpoint/actual value deviation signal.
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
P597 Source for actual value of “nset = nact signal 2” [SW 1.9 and later] All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
* numbers FS=167 P051 = 40
Setpoint/actual value deviation signal: 1 Type: L2 off-line
(G187) Selection of connector to be injected as input quantity "nact" for the
setpoint/actual value deviation signal.
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

11.35 Configuring of closed-loop control

Setting values for configuring of torque shell
P600 Source for gating unit input (armature) All connector Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* numbers FS= P051 = 40
i001 to i004: 1 i001: 102 off-line
(G163) Selects which connectors are applied as the gating unit input i002: 0
(armature). All four values are added. i003: 0
Settings: i004: 0
0 = connector K0000 Typ: L2
1 = connector K0001
etc.

11-62 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P601 Source for armature current controller setpoint All connector Ind: 6 P052 = 3
* numbers FS= P051 = 40
i001,i002 Speed limiting controller: 1 i001: 141 Offline
(G160) Selection of connectors to be injected as input quantities for i002: 0
(G161) the speed limiting controller. Both values are added. i003: 134
(G162) i003,i004 Current limitation: i004: 0
Selection of connectors to be injected as armature current i005: 125
i006: 0
controller setpoint (before current limitation). Both values are
Type: L2
added.
i005,i006 Current control: [SW 1.8 and later]
Selection of which connectors are connected as the armature
current controller setpoint (before current controller). The
two values are added. The magnitude is formed from the
value selected with index 6.
Settings:
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
P602 Source for armature current controller actual value All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
* numbers FS=117 P051 = 40
Selection of connector to be injected as armature current controller 1 Type: L2 Offline
actual value
(G162)
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
P603 Source for variable current limit in torque direction I All connector Ind: 7 P052 = 3
* numbers FS= P051 = 40
1 i001: 1 Offline
i001..i004 Selection of connector to be injected as variable current limit i002: 1
(G161) i003: 1
in torque direction I
Normalization: +100% corresponds to P100*P171 i004: 1
i005: 1
i005 Selection of connector to be injected as current limit in torque i006: 2
direction I with Fast Stop or Shutdown i007: 2
Normalization: +100% corresponds to P100*P171 Type: L2
i006 Selection of connector to be injected as variable current limit
in torque direction I
Normalization: +100% corresponds to r072.002
[can be set in SW 1.9 and later]
i007 Selection of connector to be injected as current limit in torque
direction I with Emergency Stop or Shutdown
Normalization: +100% corresponds to r072.002
[can be set in SW 1.9 and later]

Settings:
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-63

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P604 Source for variable current limit in torque direction II All connector Ind: 7 P052 = 3
* numbers FS=9 P051 = 40
i001..i004 Selection of connector to be injected as variable current limit 1 Type: L2 Offline
in torque direction II
(G161) Normalization: -100% corresponds to P100*P172
i005 Selection of connector to be injected as current limit in torque
direction II with Fast Stop or Shutdown
Normalization: -100% corresponds to P100*P172
i006 Selection of connector to be injected as variable current limit
in torque direction II
Normalization: -100% corresponds to r072.002
[can be set in SW 1.9 and later]
i007 Selection of connector to be injected as current limit in torque
direction II with Emergency Stop or Shutdown
Normalization: -100% corresponds to r072.002
[can be set in SW 1.9 and later]

Settings:
0 = connector K0000
...
8 = connector K0008
9 = value as set in parameter P603.ixx ∗ (−1)
10 = connector K0010
etc.
P605 Source for variable positive torque limit All connector Ind: 5 P052 = 3
* numbers FS=2 P051 = 40
Torque limitation: 1 Type: L2 Offline
(G160) Selection of connectors to be injected as the variable positive torque limit

i001..i004 Normalization:
100% of the connector value corresponds to the positive
system torque limit according to Ia=P171 and If = P102
i005 Normalization:
100% of the connector value corresponds to the positive
torque limit according to Ia=r072.002 and If = P102
[can be set in SW 1.9 and later]

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
P606 Source for variable negative torque limit All connector Ind: 5 P052 = 3
* numbers FS=9 P051 = 40
Torque limitation: 1 Type: L2 Offline
(G160) Selection of connectors to be injected as the variable negative torque limit

i001..i004 Normalization:
100% of the connector value corresponds to the negative
system torque limit according to Ia=P172 and If = P102
i005 Normalization:
100% of the connector value corresponds to the negative
torque limit according to Ia=r072.002 and If = P102
[can be set in SW 1.9 and later]

0 = connector K0000
...
8 = connector K0008
9 = value as set in parameter P605 ∗ (−1)
10 = connector K0010
etc.
P607 Source for torque setpoint for master drive All connector Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* numbers FS=148 P051 = 40
Torque limitation: 1 Type: L2 Offline
BDS Selection of connector to be injected as the torque setpoint for a master
drive
(G160)
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

11-64 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
Speed controller
P609 Source for actual speed controller value All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
* numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
Selection of connector to be injected as the actual speed controller value 1 Type: L2 Offline
(G151) when P083=4
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

Setting values for configuring of closed-loop field and EMF control

P610 Source for gating unit input (field) All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
* numbers FS=252 P051 = 40
Selection of connector to be applied to the gating unit input (field) 1 Type: L2 Offline
(G166)
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
P611 Source for field current controller setpoint All connector Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* numbers FS= P051 = 40
Limitation at EMF controller output: 1 i001: 277 Offline
(G165) Selection of connectors to be injected as the field current controller i002: 0
setpoint. The connectors selected in the four indices are added. i003: 0
i004: 0
0 = connector K0000 Type: L2
1 = connector K0001
etc.
P612 Source for actual field current controller value All connector Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* numbers FS= P051 = 40
Selection of connectors to be injected as the field current controller actual 1 i001: 266 Offline
(G166) value. The two values are added. i002: 0
0 = connector K0000 Type: L2
1 = connector K0001
etc.
P613 Source for variable field current setpoint upper limit All connector Ind: 5 P052 = 3
* numbers FS=1 P051 = 40
Limitation at EMF controller output 1 Type: L2 Offline
(G165)
Selection of connector to be injected as the variable field current setpoint
upper limit
i001..i004 Normalization:
100% of the connector value corresponds to the rated
excitation current of the motor (P102)
i005 Normalization:
100% of the connector value corresponds to the actual
converter rated DC current (field) (r073.002)
[can be set in SW 1.9 and later]

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
P614 Source for variable field current setpoint lower limit All connector Ind: 5 P052 = 3
* numbers FS=1 P051 = 40
Limitation at EMF controller output 1 Type: L2 Offline
(G165)
Selection of connector to be injected as the variable field current setpoint
lower limit
i001..i004 Normalization:
100% of the connector value corresponds to the minimum
excitation current of the motor (P103)
i005 Normalization:
100% of the connector value corresponds to the actual
converter rated DC current (field) (r073.002)
[can be set in SW 1.9 and later]

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-65

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P615 Source for EMF controller setpoint All connector Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* numbers FS= P051 = 40
Selection of connectors to be injected as the EMF controller setpoint. The 1 i001: 289 Offline
(G165) connectors selected in the four indices are added. i002: 0
0 = connector K0000 i003: 0
1 = connector K0001 i004: 0
etc. Type: L2

P616 Source for actual EMF controller value All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
* numbers FS=286 P051 = 40
Selection of connector to be injected as the actual EMF controller value 1 Type: L2 Offline
(G165)
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

Configuring of injection of acceleration value

P619 Source for acceleration injection value All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
* numbers FS=191 P051 = 40
Selection of connector to be applied as the acceleration injection value 1 Type: L2 Offline
(G153) 0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

Speed controller
Speed controller, setpoint/actual value deviation
Function:
The connectors selected in parameters P621 and P622 are added and those selected in P623 and 624 subtracted
P620 Source for speed controller setpoint/actual value deviation All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
* numbers FS=165 P051 = 40
Selection of connector to be injected as the control deviation 1 Type: L2 Offline
(G152) 0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
P621 Source for speed controller setpoint All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
* numbers FS=176 P051 = 40
0 = connector K0000 1 Type: L2 Offline
(G152) 1 = connector K0001
etc.
P622 Source for speed controller setpoint All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
* numbers FS=174 P051 = 40
0 = connector K0000 1 Type: L2 Offline
(G152) 1 = connector K0001
etc.
P623 Source for actual speed controller value All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
* numbers FS=179 P051 = 40
0 = connector K0000 1 Type: L2 Offline
(G152) 1 = connector K0001
etc.
P624 Source for actual speed controller value All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
* numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
0 = connector K0000 1 Type: L2 Offline
(G152) 1 = connector K0001
etc.
Speed controller: Filtering of setpoint and actual value, band-stop filters
P625 Source for speed controller setpoint All connector Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* numbers FS=170 P051 = 40
Selection of connector to be injected as the input signal for speed setpoint 1 Type: L2 Offline
FDS filtering
(G152) 0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

11-66 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P626 Source for actual speed controller value All connector Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* numbers FS=167 P051 = 40
Selection of connector to be injected as the input signal for actual speed 1 Type: L2 Offline
FDS value filtering
(G152) 0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
P627 Source for input of D element All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
* numbers FS=178 P051 = 40
Selection of connector to be injected as the input signal for the D element 1 Type: L2 Offline
(G152) 0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
P628 Source for input of band-stop filter 1 All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
* numbers FS=179 P051 = 40
Selection of connector to be injected as the input signal for band-stop filter 1 1 Type: L2 Offline
(G152) 0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
P629 Source for band-stop filter 2 All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
* numbers FS=177 P051 = 40
Selection of connector to be injected as the input signal for band-stop filter 2 1 Type: L2 Offline
(G152) 0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Speed controller droop
P630 Source for influencing quantity for speed droop All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
* numbers FS=162 P051 = 40
Selection of connector to be injected as the influencing quantity 1 Type: L2 Offline
(G151)
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Setting the speed controller I component
Function: When the binector selected in P695 switches state from log. "0" to log. "1", the I component of the speed controller is set to the
value of the connector selected in P631.
With this function it is possible, for example, to use the same signal (binector) to control controller enabling commands and
setting of the I component.
P631 Source for setting value for speed controller integrator All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
* numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
Selection of connector to be injected as the setting value for the I 1 Type: L2 Offline
(G152) component
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

Setting values for configuring the setpoint processing function and ramp-function generator
Limitation at ramp-function generator output (setpoint limitation)
(see also Section 8, Sheet G136)
The effective limitations are:
Upper limit: Minimum value of P300 and the four connectors selected with P632
Lower limit: Maximum value of P301 and the four connectors selected with P633
Note: The limiting values for both the positive and negative setpoint limits can have a positive or negative sign. The negative setpoint
limit, for example, can therefore be parameterized to a positive value and the positive setpoint limit to a negative value.
P632 Source for variable positive limitation at ramp-function generator All connector Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* output numbers FS=1 P051 = 40
1 Type: L2 Offline
(G137) Selection of connectors to be injected at the variable positive limitation at
the ramp-function generator output (setpoint limitation).
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-67

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P633 Source for variable negative limitation at ramp-function generator All connector Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* output numbers FS=9 P051 = 40
1 Type: L2 Offline
(G137) Selection of connectors to be injected at the variable negative limitation at
the ramp-function generator output (setpoint limitation).
0 = connector K0000
...
8 = connector K0008
9 = value as set in parameter P632 ∗ (−1)
10 = connector K0010
etc.
P634 Source for limitation input at ramp-function generator output All connector Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* numbers FS= P051 = 40
Selection of connectors which must be added up to provide the limitation 1 i001: 190 Offline
(G137) input at the ramp-function generator output (setpoint limitation). i002: 0
0 = connector K0000 Type: L2
1 = connector K0001
etc.
P635 Source for ramp-function generator setpoint All connector Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* numbers FS=194 P051 = 40
Selection of connector to be injected as the ramp-function generator 1 Type: L2 Offline
FDS setpoint
(G135) 0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
P636 Source for reduction signal for ramp-function generator times All connector Ind: 6 P052 = 3
* numbers FS=1 P051 = 40
Selection of connector to be injected as the reduction signal for the ramp- 1 Type: L2 Offline
(G136) function generator times
i001 acts on ramp-up and ramp-down time (P303, P304)
i002 acts on lower and upper transition roundings (P305, P306)
i003 acts on ramp-up time (P303)
i004 acts on ramp-down time (P304)
i005 acts on lower transition rounding (P305)
i006 acts on upper transition rounding (P306)

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
P637 Source for selection of "Ramp-function generator setting 2" All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
Selection of binector to control switchover to "Ramp-function generator Type: L2 Offline
BDS setting 2".
With a log. "1" signal at the binector, ramp-function generator parameter set
(G136) 2 (P307 - P310) is selected. This function has a higher priority than the
ramp-up integrator function.
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
P638 Source for selection of "Ramp-function generator setting 3” All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
Selection of binector to control switchover to "Ramp-function generator Type: L2 Offline
BDS setting 3".
With a log. "1" signal at the binector, ramp-function generator parameter set
(G136) 3 (P311 - P314) is selected. This function has a higher priority than the
ramp-up integrator function.
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

11-68 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P639 Source for the ramp-function generator setting values All connector Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* numbers FS=167 P051 = 40
Selection of the connectors that are connected as the ramp-function 1 Type: L2 ≥off-line
(G136) generator setting values.

i001 Setting value for the ramp-function generator output in state log.
"1" of the binector selected via P640
i002 Setting value for the ramp-function generator output if the drive
is not in state "Operating" (B0104=0) and the binector selected
via P640 is in state log. "0"
[i002 only available with SW 1.6 and later]

0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
etc.
P640 Source for selection of "Set ramp-function generator” All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
Selection of binector to control the "Set ramp-function generator" function Type: L2 Offline
BDS
0 = binector B0000
(G136) 1 = binector B0001
etc.
P641 Source for selection of "Bypass ramp-function generator” All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
Selection of binector to control the "Bypass ramp-function generator" Type: L2 Offline
BDS function
(G136) 0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

P642 Source for variable positive limitation of main setpoint All connector Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* numbers FS=2 P051 = 40
Selection of connectors to be injected at the variable positive limitation of 1 Type: L2 Offline
(G135) the main setpoint.
The lowest value in each case of the connectors selected via the 4 indices
is applied as the limit.

Note: Negative values at the selected connectors result in a negative

maximum value at the output of the limitation.
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
P643 Source for variable negative limitation of main setpoint All connector Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* numbers FS=9 P051 = 40
Selection of connectors to be injected at the variable negative limitation of 1 Type: L2 Offline
(G135) the main setpoint.
The lowest value in each case of the connectors selected via the 4 indices
is applied as the limit.

Note: Positive values at the selected connectors result in a positive

minimum value at the output of the limitation.
0 = connector K0000
...
8 = connector K0008
9 = value as set in parameter P642 ∗ (−1)
10 = connector K0010
etc.
P644 Source for main setpoint All connector Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* numbers FS=206 P051 = 40
Selection of connector to be injected as the main setpoint 1 Type: L2 Offline
FDS
0 = connector K0000
(G135) 1 = connector K0001
etc.
P645 Source for additional setpoint All connector Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
Selection of connector to be injected as an additional setpoint 1 Type: L2 Offline
FDS
0 = connector K0000
(G135) 1 = connector K0001
etc.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-69

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P646 Source for enable signal for ramp-up integrator switchover All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
Selection of binector to control enabling of the ramp-function integrator Type: L2 Offline
BDS switchover function.
(G136) 0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
P647 Source for enable signal for ramp-function generator tracking All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* [SW 2.1 and later] 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
BDS Type: L2 Offline
Selection of binector to control enabling of the ramp-function generator
tracking function.
(G136)
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

11.36 Control word, status word

Selection of sources of control words 1 and 2
P648 Source for control word 1 All connector Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* numbers FS=9 P051 = 40
Selection of connector to act as the source for control word 1. 1 Type: L2 Offline
BDS
0 = connector K0000
(G180) ...
8 = connector K0008
9 = parameters P654 to P675 are effective
(every individual bit of control word 1 is input by a binector)
10 = connector K0010
etc.
P649 Source for control word 2 All connector Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* numbers FS=9 P051 = 40
Selection of connector to act as the source for control word 2. 1 Type: L2 Offline
BDS
0 = connector K0000
(G181) ...
8 = connector K0008
9 = parameters P676 to P691 are effective
(every individual bit of control word 2 is input by a binector)
10 = connector K0010
etc.

Display of control words 1 and 2

r650 Display of control word 1 Ind: None P052 = 3
Type: V2
(G180) Mode of representation on operator panel (PMU):

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Segments 0 to 15 correspond to bits 0 to 15 of the control word

Segment ON: Corresponding bit is in log. "1" state

Segment OFF: Corresponding bit is in log. "0" state
r651 Display of control word 2 Ind: None P052 = 3
Type: V2
(G181) Mode of representation on operator panel (PMU):

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Segments 0 to 15 correspond to bits 16 to 31 of the control word

Segment ON: Corresponding bit is in log. "1" state

Segment OFF: Corresponding bit is in log. "0" state

11-70 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
Display of status words 1 and 2
r652 Display of status word 1 Ind: None P052 = 3
Type: V2
(G182) Mode of representation on operator panel (PMU):

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Segments 0 to 15 correspond to bits 0 to 15 of the status word

Segment ON: Corresponding bit is in log. "1" state

Segment OFF: Corresponding bit is in log. "0" state
r653 Display of status word 2 Ind: None P052 = 3
Type: V2
(G183) Mode of representation on operator panel (PMU):

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Segments 0 to 15 correspond to bits 16 to 31 of the status word

Segment ON: Corresponding bit is in log. "1" state

Segment OFF: Corresponding bit is in log. "0" state

The following parameters are used to select the binectors (some of which are gated with one another or with other signals) to be applied to
the individual bits of the control word.
The settings of all these parameters are as follows:
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
The functions and logic operations are also shown on Sheets G180 and G181 in Section 8.
Control word 1
P654 Source for control word 1, bit0 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
BDS (0=OFF1, 1=ON; ANDed with terminal 37) Type: L2 Offline
(G130)
P655 1st source for control word 1, bit1 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* nd rd 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
BDS (0=OFF2; ANDed with 2 and 3 sources for bit1) Type: L2 Offline
(G180)
P656 2nd source for control word 1, bit1 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* st rd 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
BDS (0=OFF2; ANDed with 1 and 3 sources for bit1) Type: L2 Offline
(G180)
P657 3rd source for control word 1, bit1 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* st nd 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
BDS (0=OFF2; ANDed with 1 and 2 sources for bit1) Type: L2 Offline
(G180)
P658 1st source for control word 1, bit2 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* nd rd 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
BDS (0=OFF3=Fast stop; ANDed with 2 and 3 sources for bit2) Type: L2 Offline
(G180)
P659 2nd source for control word 1, bit2 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* st rd 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
BDS (0=OFF3=Fast stop; ANDed with 1 and 3 sources for bit2) Type: L2 Offline
(G180)
P660 3rd source for control word 1, bit2 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* st nd 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
BDS (0=OFF3=Fast stop; ANDed with 1 and 2 sources for bit2) Type: L2 Offline
(G180)
P661 Source for control word 1, bit3 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
BDS (0=pulse disable, 1=enable; ANDed with terminal 38) Type: L2 Offline
(G180)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-71

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P662 Source for control word 1, bit4 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
BDS (0=set ramp-function generator to zero, 1=enable ramp-function generator) Type: L2 Offline
(G180)
P663 Source for control word 1, bit5 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
BDS (0=ramp-function generator stop, 1=ramp-function generator start) Type: L2 Offline
(G180)
P664 Source for control word 1, bit6 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
BDS (0=enable setpoint, 1=disable setpoint) Type: L2 Offline
(G180)
P665 1st source for control word 1, bit7 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* nd rd
1 FS=0 P051 = 40
BDS (0→1 transition=acknowledge; ORed with 2 and 3 sources for bit7) Type: L2 Offline
(G180)
P666 2nd source for control word 1, bit7 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* st rd
1 FS=0 P051 = 40
BDS (0→1 transition=acknowledge; ORed with 1 and 3 sources for bit7) Type: L2 Offline
(G180)
P667 3rd source for control word 1, bit7 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* st nd
1 FS=0 P051 = 40
BDS (0→1 transition=acknowledge; ORed with 1 and 2 sources for bit7) Type: L2 Offline
(G180)
P668 Source for control word 1, bit8 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
BDS (1=inching bit0) Type: L2 Offline
(G180)
P669 Source for control word 1, bit9 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
BDS (1=inching bit1) Type: L2 Offline
(G180)
P671 Source for control word 1, bit11 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
BDS (0=pos. direction of rotation disabled, 1=pos. direction of rotation enabled) Type: L2 Offline
(G180)
P672 Source for control word 1, bit12 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
BDS (0= neg. direction of rotation disabled, 1= neg. direction of rotation enabled) Type: L2 Offline
(G180)
P673 Source for control word 1, bit13 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
BDS (1=raise motorized potentiometer) Type: L2 Offline
(G180)
P674 Source for control word 1, bit14 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
BDS (1=lower motorized potentiometer) Type: L2 Offline
(G180)
P675 Source for control word 1, bit15 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
BDS (0=external fault, 1=no external fault) Type: L2 Offline
(G180)

Control word 2
P676 Source for control word 2, bit16 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
BDS (select function data set bit 0) Type: L2 Offline
(G181)
P677 Source for control word 2, bit17 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
BDS (select function data set bit 1) Type: L2 Offline
(G181)
P680 Source for control word 2, bit20 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
BDS (select fixed setpoint 0) Type: L2 Offline
(G181)
P681 Source for control word 2, bit21 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
BDS (select fixed setpoint 1) Type: L2 Offline
(G181)

11-72 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P684 Source for control word 2, bit24 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
BDS (0=n controller speed droop disabled, 1=enabled) Type: L2 Offline
(G181)
P685 Source for control word 2, bit25 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
BDS (0=n controller disabled, 1=n controller enabled) Type: L2 Offline
(G181)
P686 Source for control word 2, bit26 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
BDS (0=external fault 2, 1=no external fault 2) Type: L2 Offline
(G181)
P687 Source for control word 2, bit27 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
BDS (0=master drive, speed control, 1=slave drive, torque control) Type: L2 Offline
(G181)
P688 Source for control word 2, bit28 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
(0=external alarm 1, 1=no external alarm 1) Type: L2 Offline
BDS
(G181)
P689 Source for control word 2, bit29 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
BDS (0=external alarm 2, 1=no external alarm 2) Type: L2 Offline
(G181)
P690 Source for control word 2, bit30 All binector numbers Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
(G181) (0=select Bico data set 1, 1=select Bico data set 2) Type: L2 Offline
P691 Source for control word 2, Bit31 [SW 1.8 and later] All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
Main contactor checkback signal: Type: L2 Offline
BDS (0 = main contactor dropped out, 1 = main contactor picked up)
(G181) This control input is intended as a means of looping an auxiliary contact of
the main contactor into the device control.
During the Power ON routine, this signal must switch to "1" within the time
period set in P095. If it does not, or it disappears during operation, fault
message F004 with fault value 6 is activated.

P691 = 0: Bit 31 of control word 2 is inoperative.

(This setting of P691 is always active, regardless of whether
control word 2 is input in word mode [P649 <> 9] or bit mode
[P649 = 9])

P691 = 1: Bit 31 of control word 2 is inoperative.

(This setting of P691 is active only when control word 2 is input
in bit mode, i.e. when P649 = 9)
P691 >= 2: The function of bit 31 of control word 2 has an effect in the case
of P649=9.

11.37 Further configuring measures

P692 Source for selection of injection of standstill field All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
Selection of binector to control injection of the standstill field ("0" state = Type: L2 Offline
BDS inject standstill field)
(G166) Note: The delay time set in P258 is not effective when this function is
active.
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
P693 Source for selection of enabling command for EMF controller All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
Selection of binector which is to control enabling of the EMF controller Type: L2 Offline
BDS
0 = binector B0000
(G165) 1 = binector B0001
etc.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-73

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P694 Source for selection of enabling command for "Torque limit All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* switchover” 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
BDS Type: L2 Offline
Selection of binector which is to control enabling of the "Torque limit
switchover" function (1=enable, see also Sheet G160 in Section 8 and P180
(G160) to P183)
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
P695 Source for selection of "Set speed controller I component" function All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
Selection of binector to control the "Set I component" function Type: L2 Offline
BDS
0 = binector B0000
(G152) 1 = binector B0001
etc.

When the binector selected in P695 switches from log. "0" to log. "1", the I
component of the speed controller is set to the value of the connector
selected in P631.
With this function it is possible, for example, to use the same signal
(binector) to control controller enabling commands and setting of the I
component.

P696 Source for selection of "Stop speed controller I component" function All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
Selection of binector to control the "Stop I component" function Type: L2 Offline
BDS
0 = binector B0000
(G152) 1 = binector B0001
etc.

When the binector selected in P696 changes to the log. "1" state, the I
component of the speed controller is stopped.
P697 Source for selection of enabling of dv/dt injection All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
Selection of binector to control enabling of dv/dt injection (state "1" = Type: L2 Offline
BDS enable)
(G153) 0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
P698 Source for selection of enabling command for speed-dependent speed All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
* controller PI / P function switchover 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
BDS Type: L2 Offline
Selection of binector to control enabling of the speed-dependent PI / P
controller switchover function (see also P222)
(G152)
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

11.38 Analog inputs (main actual value, main setpoint, selectable inputs)
(see also Section 8, Sheets G113 and G114)
Analog input terminals 4 / 5 (main setpoint)
P700 Signal type of "Main setpoint" analog input 0 to 2 Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
0 = Voltage input 0 to ±10 V Type: O2 Offline
(G113) 1 = Current input 0 to ±20 mA
2 = Current input 4 to 20 mA

11-74 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P701 Normalization of "Main setpoint" analog input -1000.0 to 1000.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[%] FS=100.0 P051 = 40
This parameter specifies the percentage value which is generated for an 0.1% Type: I2 Online
FDS input voltage of 10V (or an input current of 20mA) at the analog input.
(G113) The following generally applies:
For voltage input:
Y
P701 [%] = 10 V ∗ X .. Input voltage in volts
X
Y .. % value which is generated for input
voltage X
With current input:
Y
P701 [%] = 20 mA ∗ X .. Input current in mA
X
Y .. % value which is generated for input
current X
P702 Offset for "Main setpoint" analog input -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: None P052 = 3
[%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
(G113) 0.01% Type: I2 Online
P703 Mode of signal injection at "Main setpoint" analog input 0 to 3 Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
0= Injection of signal with sign Type: O2 Offline
(G113) 1= Injection of absolute value of signal
2= Injection of signal with sign, inverted
3= Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted
P704 Source for selection of sign reversal at "Main setpoint" analog input All binector numbers Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
Selection of binector to control sign reversal at the analog input ("1" state Type: L2 Offline
(G113) = reverse sign)
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
P705 Filtering time for "Main setpoint" analog input 0 to 10000 Ind: None P052 = 3
[ms] FS=0 P051 = 40
(G113) Note: Hardware filtering of approximately 1 ms is applied as standard. 1ms Type: O2 Online
P706 Source for enabling of "Main setpoint" analog input All binector numbers Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
Selection of binector to control enabling of the analog input ("1" state = Type: L2 Offline
(G113) enabled)
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-75

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P707 Resolution of "Main setpoint" analog input 11 to 14 Ind: None P052 = 3
* [Bit] FS=12 P051 = 40
The voltage applied to the analog input is converted to a digital value (A/D 1 bit Type: O2 Offline
(G113) conversion) for further processing. The method used calculates an average
value of the input voltage over a specific measuring time.
The A/D conversion process produces a scale for the voltage range of 0 to ±
10V, the number of steps (divisions) along this scale can be set in P707 (i.e.
the smallest possible differentiable change in the input voltage
(quantization) can be set in this parameter). The number of scale steps or
intervals is referred to as "Resolution".
The resolution is normally specified in bits:
± 11 bits means 2 * 2048 scale divisions
± 12 bits means 2 * 4096 scale divisions
± 13 bits means 2 * 8192 scale divisions
± 14 bits means 2 * 16384 scale divisions

The following applies:

The higher the resolution, the longer the averaging time and thus also the
delay period between the application of an analog step change and the
earliest possible moment of availability of the digital value for further
processing.
For this reason, it is important to find a compromise between the resolution
and delay period.

Param. Resolution Quantization Delay period

value better than
11 ± 11 bits 4.4 mV 0.53 ms
12 ± 12 bits 2.2 mV 0.95 ms
13 ± 13 bits 1.1 mV 1.81 ms
14 ± 14 bits 0.56 mV 3.51 ms

If the analog input is operating as a current input (0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA),

the above applies analogously.

Analog input terminals 6 / 7 (analog selectable input 1)

P710 Signal type of "Analog selectable input 1" 0 to 2 Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
0 = Voltage input 0 to ±10 V Type: O2 Offline
(G113) 1 = Current input 0 to ±20 mA
2 = Current input 4 to 20 mA
P711 Normalization of "Analog selectable input 1" -1000.0 to 1000.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[%] FS=100.0 P051 = 40
This parameter specifies the percentage value which is generated for an 0.1% Type: I2 Online
FDS input voltage of 10V (or an input current of 20mA) at the analog input.
(G113) The following generally applies:

For voltage input:

Y
P711 [%] = 10 V ∗ X .. Input voltage in volts
X
Y .. % value which is generated for input
voltage X
With current input:
Y
P711 [%] = 20 mA ∗ X .. Input current in mA
X
Y .. % value which is generated for input
current X
P712 Offset for "Analog selectable input 1" -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: None P052 = 3
[%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
(G113) 0.01% Type: I2 Online
P713 Mode of signal injection at "Analog selectable input 1" 0 to 3 Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
0= Injection of signal with sign Type: O2 Offline
(G113) 1= Injection of absolute value of signal
2= Injection of signal with sign, inverted
3= Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted

11-76 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P714 Source for selection of sign reversal at "Analog selectable input 1" All binector numbers Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
Selection of binector to control sign reversal at the analog input ("1" state Type: L2 Offline
(G113) = reverse sign)
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
P715 Filtering time for "Analog selectable input 1" 0 to 10000 Ind: None P052 = 3
[ms] FS=0 P051 = 40
(G113) Note: Hardware filtering of approximately 1 ms is applied as standard. 1ms Type: O2 Online
P716 Source for enabling of "Analog selectable input 1" All binector numbers Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
Selection of binector to control enabling of the analog input ("1" state = Type: L2 Offline
(G113) enabled)
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
P717 Resolution of "Analog selectable input 1" 10 to 14 Ind: None P052 = 3
* [Bit] FS=12 P051 = 40
(G113) See P707 1 bit Type: O2 Offline

Analog input terminals 8 / 9 (analog selectable input 2)

P721 Normalization of "Analog selectable input 2" -1000.0 to 1000.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[%] FS=100.0 P051 = 40
This parameter specifies the percentage value which is generated for an 0.1% Type: I2 Online
FDS input voltage of 10V (or an input current of 20mA) at the analog input.
(G114) The following generally applies:
For voltage input:
Y
P721 [%] = 10 V ∗ X .. Input voltage in volts
X
Y .. % value which is generated for input
voltage X
With current input:
Y
P721 [%] = 20 mA ∗ X .. Input current in mA
X
Y .. % value which is generated for input
current X

P722 Offset for "Analog selectable input 2" -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: None P052 = 3
[%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
(G114) 0.01% Type: I2 Online
P723 Mode of signal injection at "Analog selectable input 2" 0 to 3 Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
0= Injection of signal with sign Type: O2 Offline
(G114) 1= Injection of absolute value of signal
2= Injection of signal with sign, inverted
3= Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted
P724 Source for selection of sign reversal at "Analog selectable input 2" All binector numbers Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
Selection of binector to control sign reversal at the analog input ("1" state Type: L2 Offline
(G114) = reverse sign)
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
P725 Filtering time for "Analog selectable input 2" 0 to 10000 Ind: None P052 = 3
[ms] FS=0 P051 = 40
(G114) Note: Hardware filtering of approximately 1 ms is applied as standard. 1ms Type: O2 Online
P726 Source for enabling of "Analog selectable input 2" All binector numbers Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
Selection of binector to control enabling of the analog input ("1" state = Type: L2 Offline
(G114) enabled)
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-77

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
Analog input terminals 10 / 11 (analog selectable input 3)
P731 Normalization of "Analog selectable input 3" -1000.0 to 1000.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[%] FS=100.0 P051 = 40
This parameter specifies the percentage value which is generated for an 0.1% Type: I2 Online
FDS input voltage of 10V (or an input current of 20mA) at the analog input.
(G114) The following generally applies:
For voltage input:
Y
P731 [%] = 10 V ∗ X .. Input voltage in volts
X
Y .. % value which is generated for input
voltage X
With current input:
Y
P731 [%] = 20 mA ∗ X .. Input current in mA
X
Y .. % value which is generated for input
current X
P732 Offset for "Analog selectable input 3" -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: None P052 = 3
[%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
(G114) 0.01% Type: I2 Online
P733 Mode of signal injection at "Analog selectable input 3" 0 to 3 Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
0= Injection of signal with sign Type: O2 Offline
(G114) 1= Injection of absolute value of signal
2= Injection of signal with sign, inverted
3= Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted
P734 Source for selection of sign reversal at "Analog selectable input 3" All binector numbers Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
Selection of binector to control sign reversal at the analog input ("1" state Type: L2 Offline
(G114) = reverse sign)
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
P735 Filtering time for "Analog selectable input 3" 0 to 10000 Ind: None P052 = 3
[ms] FS=0 P051 = 40
(G114) Note: Hardware filtering of approximately 1 ms is applied as standard. 1ms Type: O2 Online
P736 Source for enabling of "Analog selectable input 3" All binector numbers Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
Selection of binector to control enabling of the analog input ("1" state = Type: L2 Offline
(G114) enabled)
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

Analog input terminals 103 / 104 (main actual value)

P741 Normalization for "Main actual value” -270.00 to 270.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[V] FS=60.00 P051 = 40
FDS Rated value of input voltage at nmax (=tachometer voltage at maximum 0.01V Type: I2 Online
speed)
(G113) This parameter defines the maximum speed when P083=1.
P742 Offset for "Main actual value" analog input -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: None P052 = 3
[%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
(G113) 0.01% Type: I2 Online
P743 Mode of signal injection at "Main actual value" analog input 0 to 3 Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
0= Injection of signal with sign Type: O2 Offline
(G113) 1= Injection of absolute value of signal
2= Injection of signal with sign, inverted
3= Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted
P744 Source for selection of sign reversal at "Main actual value" analog All binector numbers Ind: None P052 = 3
* input 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
Type: L2 Offline
(G113) Selection of binector to control sign reversal at the analog input ("1" state
= reverse sign)
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

11-78 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P745 Filtering time for "Main actual value" analog input 0 to 10000 Ind: None P052 = 3
[ms] FS=0 P051 = 40
(G113) Note: Hardware filtering of approximately 1 ms is applied as standard. 1ms Type: O2 Online
P746 Source for enabling of "Main actual value" analog input All binector numbers Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
Selection of binector to control enabling of the analog input ("1" state = Type: L2 Offline
(G113) enabled)
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

11.39 Analog outputs

(see also Section 8, Sheets G115 and G116)
Analog output terminals 12 / 13 (actual current display)
P749 Control word for terminal 12 (actual current display) 0 to 3 Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
0 Output with correct sign Type: O2 Online
(G115) (positive voltage: Current in torque direction MI)
(negative voltage: Current in torque direction MII)
1 Output of absolute value (positive voltage only)
2 Output with sign, inverted
(positive voltage: Current in torque direction MII)
(negative voltage: Current in torque direction MI)
3 Output of absolute value, inverted (negative voltage only)

Analog output terminals 14 / 15

P750 Source for output value at analog output 1 All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
* numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
Selection of connector whose value is to applied to the analog output 1 Type: L2 Online
(G115) 0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
P751 Mode of signal injection at analog output 1 0 to 3 Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
0= Injection of signal with correct sign Type: O2 Online
(G115) 1= Injection of absolute value of signal
2= Injection of signal with sign, inverted
3= Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted

P752 Filtering time for analog output 1 0 to 10000 Ind: None P052 = 3
[ms] FS=0 P051 = 40
(G115) 1ms Type: O2 Online
P753 Normalization of analog output 1 -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: None P052 = 3
[V] FS=10.00 P051 = 40
(G115) P753 0.01V Type: I2 Online
y [V ] = x ∗
100 %
x = Normalization input (corresponds to filtering output)
y = Normalization output (corresponds to output voltage at analog output
with offset = 0)

P754 Offset for analog output 1 -10.00 to 10.00 Ind: None P052 = 3
[V] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
(G115) 0.01V Type: I2 Online

Analog output terminals 16 / 17

P755 Source for output value at analog output 2 All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
* numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
Selection of connector whose value is to applied to the analog output 1 Type: L2 Online
(G115) 0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-79

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P756 Mode of signal injection at analog output 2 0 to 3 Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
0= Injection of signal with correct sign Type: O2 Online
(G115) 1= Injection of absolute value of signal
2= Injection of signal with sign, inverted
3= Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted
P757 Filtering time for analog output 2 0 to 10000 Ind: None P052 = 3
[ms] FS=0 P051 = 40
(G115) 1ms Type: O2 Online
P758 Normalization of analog output 2 -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: None P052 = 3
[V] FS=10.00 P051 = 40
(G115) P758 0.01V Type: I2 Online
y [V ] = x ∗
100 %

x = Normalization input (corresponds to filtering output)

y = Normalization output (corresponds to output voltage at analog output
with offset = 0)
P759 Offset for analog output 2 -10.00 to 10.00 Ind: None P052 = 3
[V] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
(G115) 0.01V Type: I2 Online

Analog output terminals 18 / 19

P760 Source for output value at analog output 3 All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
* numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
Selection of connector whose value is to applied to the analog output 1 Type: L2 Online
(G116) 0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
P761 Mode of signal injection at analog output 3 0 to 3 Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
0= Injection of signal with correct sign Type: O2 Online
(G116) 1= Injection of absolute value of signal
2= Injection of signal with sign, inverted
3= Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted
P762 Filtering time for analog output 3 0 to 10000 Ind: None P052 = 3
[ms] FS=0 P051 = 40
(G116) 1ms Type: O2 Online
P763 Normalization of analog output 3 -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: None P052 = 3
[V] FS=10.00 P051 = 40
(G116) P763 0.01V Type: I2 Online
y [V ] = x ∗
100 %

x = Normalization input (corresponds to filtering output)

y = Normalization output (corresponds to output voltage at analog output
with offset = 0)
P764 Offset for analog output 3 -10.00 to 10.00 Ind: None P052 = 3
[V] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
(G116) 0.01V Type: I2 Online

Analog output terminals 20 / 21

P765 Source for output value at analog output 4 All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
* numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
Selection of connector whose value is to applied to the analog output 1 Type: L2 Online
(G116) 0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

P766 Mode of signal injection at analog output 4 0 to 3 Ind: None P052 = 3

* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
0= Injection of signal with correct sign Type: O2 Online
(G116) 1= Injection of absolute value of signal
2= Injection of signal with sign, inverted
3= Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted
P767 Filtering time for analog output 4 0 to 10000 Ind: None P052 = 3
[ms] FS=0 P051 = 40
(G116) 1ms Type: O2 Online

11-80 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P768 Normalization of analog output 4 -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: None P052 = 3
[V] FS=10.00 P051 = 40
(G116) P768 0.01V Type: I2 Online
y [V ] = x ∗
100 %
x = Normalization input (corresponds to filtering output)
y = Normalization output (corresponds to output voltage at analog output
with offset = 0)
P769 Offset for analog output 4 -10.00 to 10.00 Ind: None P052 = 3
[V] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
(G116) 0.01V Type: I2 Online

11.40 Binary outputs

(see also Section 8, Sheet G112)
P770 Control word for binary selectable outputs 0 to 1 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
i001: 0 Binary selectable output at terminal 46 is not inverted Type: O2 Online
1 Binary selectable output at terminal 46 is inverted
(G112)
(G200) i002: 0 Binary selectable output at terminal 48 is not inverted
1 Binary selectable output at terminal 48 is inverted
i003: 0 Binary selectable output at terminal 50 is not inverted
1 Binary selectable output at terminal 50 is inverted
i004: 0 Binary selectable output at terminal 52 is not inverted
1 Binary selectable output at terminal 52 is inverted
P771 Source for output value at binary output 1 All binector numbers Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
Selection of binector to be injected at binary selectable output, terminal 46 Type: L2 Online
(G112) 0 = binector B0000
(G200) 1 = binector B0001
etc.
P772 Source for output value at binary output 2 All binector numbers Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
Selection of binector to be injected at binary selectable output, terminal 48 Type: L2 Online
(G112) 0 = binector B0000
(G200) 1 = binector B0001
etc.
P773 Source for output value at binary output 3 All binector numbers Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
Selection of binector to be injected at binary selectable output, terminal 50 Type: L2 Online
(G112) 0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
P774 Source for output value at binary output 4 All binector numbers Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
Selection of binector to be injected at binary selectable output, terminal 52 Type: L2 Online
(G112) 0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
P775 Delay for output value at binary output 1 0 to 10000 Ind: None P052 = 3
[ms] FS=0 P051 = 40
The logic level at the binary selectable output changes only if the internal 1ms Type: O2 Online
(G112) signal level remains constant for the set delay period (internal signal level
(G200) changes which do not last as long as this delay period are not switched
through to the output)
P776 Delay for output value at binary output 2 0 to 10000 Ind: None P052 = 3
[ms] FS=0 P051 = 40
The logic level at the binary selectable output changes only if the internal 1ms Type: O2 Online
(G112) signal level remains constant for the set delay period (internal signal level
(G200) changes which do not last as long as this delay period are not switched
through to the output)
P777 Delay for output value at binary output 3 0 to 10000 Ind: None P052 = 3
[ms] FS=0 P051 = 40
The logic level at the binary selectable output changes only if the internal 1ms Type: O2 Online
(G112) signal level remains constant for the set delay period (internal signal level
changes which do not last as long as this delay period are not switched
through to the output)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-81

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P778 Delay for output value at binary output 4 0 to 10000 Ind: None P052 = 3
[ms] FS=0 P051 = 40
The logic level at the binary selectable output changes only if the internal 1ms Type: O2 Online
(G112) signal level remains constant for the set delay period (internal signal level
changes which do not last as long as this delay period are not switched
through to the output)

11.41 Configuration of serial interfaces on basic converter

G-SST 1 (RS485 / RS232 on X300) (see also Section 8, Sheet G170 and Section 9)
P780 Selection of protocol for G-SST1 basic converter interface 0, 2, 8, 9 Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=2 P051 = 40
(G170) 0 Setting has no function Type: O2 Offline
2 USS protocol
8 for factory purposes
9 For internal factory test purposes
P781 Number of process data for G-SST1 0 to 16 Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=2 P051 = 40
(G170) When P780 = 0 or 9 is selected: Parameter is irrelevant Type: O2 Offline
When USS protocol (P780=2) is selected: Number of PZD elements

0 No process data are expected or sent in the USS protocol

1...16 Number of process data words in USS protocol (same number
applies to transmission and receipt)
The received PZD elements (1 to max. 16) are available at
connectors (K2001 to K2016) and, in some cases, bit-serially at
binectors for "internal wiring" purposes.
The PZD elements to be transmitted (1 to max. 16) are selected
in parameters P784.01 to P784.16.
P782 Length of parameter jobs for G-SST1 0, 3, 4, 127 Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=127 P051 = 40
(G170) This parameter is effective only when P780=2 (USS protocol). Type: O2 Offline

0 No PKW data are expected or sent in the USS protocol.

3, 4 3 or 4 PKW data words are expected in the USS protocol and 3
or 4 PKW data words are also sent (for transmission of
parameter values).
127 Number of PKWs is determined by the telegram length
P783 Baud rate for G-SST1 1 to 13 Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=6 P051 = 40
(G170) 1 300 baud Type: O2 Offline
2 600 baud
3 1200 baud
4 2400 baud
5 4800 baud
6 9600 baud
7 19200 baud
8 38400 baud
9 56700 baud
11 93750 baud
13 187500 baud
P784 Source for transmit data for G-SST1 All connector Ind: 16 P052 = 3
* numbers FS= P051 = 40
(G170) Selection of connectors to be transferred as transmit data to the USS 1 i001: 32 Offline
master via USS interface 1. i002: 167
i003: 0
i001: Selection for word 1 i004: 33
i002: Selection for word 2 i005-i016: 0
... Type: L2
i016: Selection for word 16

Applicable settings:
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

11-82 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P785 Options for G-SST1 0 to 1 Ind: 2 P052 = 3
1 FS=0 P051 = 40
i001: 0 = Bus terminator OFF Type: O2 Offline
(G170) 1 = Bus terminator ON
st
i002: 0 = Bit 10 of the 1 receive word does not function as "Control
by PLC".
st
1 = Bit 10 of the 1 receive word does function as "Control by
st
PLC“, i.e. when bit 10 = 0, all other bits of the 1 receive word,
as well as receive words 2 to 16, are not written to connectors
K2001 to K2016, or to binectors B2100 to B2915. All these
connectors and binectors retain their old values.
P786 USS bus address for G-SST1 0 to 30 Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
(G170) This parameter is functional only when P780=2 (USS protocol). Address via Type: O2 Offline
which the unit can be addressed in USS bus operation.
P787 Telegram failure time for G-SST1 0.000 to 65.000 Ind: None P052 = 3
[s] FS=0.000 P051 = 40
The failure time set in this parameter is valid when setting P780=2 (USS 0.001s Type: O2 Offline
(G170) protocol) is selected.

0.000 No time monitoring

0.001...65.000 Time which may elapse between the receipt of two
telegrams addressed to the unit before a fault message
is activated.

Fault message F011 is activated if no valid telegram is received within this

time period.

Note:
The telegram monitoring function is active
• from the receipt of the first error-free telegram after connection of the
electronics power supply
• from the receipt of the first error-free telegram after the telegram monitor
has responded (i.e. monitoring timeout).
P788 Source for activation of F011 2030, 2031 Ind: None P052 = 3
* FS=2030 P051 = 40
(G170) Selection of binector which will activate fault message F011 when it Type: L2 Offline
switches to log. "1"
2030 = binector B2030
2031 = binector B2031
r789 Diagnostic information for G-SST1 Ind: 10 P052 = 3
Type: O2
Free-running counter, overflow at 65535
(G170)
i001: Number of error-free telegrams
i002: Number of errored telegrams:
Byte frame, parity, overrun or BCC error
i003: Number of byte frame errors
i004: Number of overrun errors
i005: Parity error
i006: STX error:
Start interval before STX not observed,
telegram residual transfer time not observed,
delay time of LGE character too long,
erroneous STX, i.e. ≠ 02
i007: Violation of telegram residual transfer time
i008: Block check error
i009: Incorrect telegram length:
With P782=3 or 4 only:
The length of the received telegram is ≠ P781 + P782
(Note: If the received values are correct, they will be processed
even when this error has been detected)
i010: Timeout error:
No valid telegram has been received for a period exceeding the
setting in P787. After the occurrence of a timeout error, this
counter is not activated again until the next valid telegram is
received.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-83

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
G-SST 2 (RS485 on X172) (see also Section 8, Sheets G171 and G173 and Section 9)
P790 Selection of protocol for G-SST2 basic converter interface 0, 2, 5, 6, 9 Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
(G171) 0 Setting has no function Type: O2 Offline
(G173) 2 USS protocol
5 ”Peer-to-peer” communication
6 Communication with the SIMOREG CCP
9 For internal factory test purposes
P791 Number of process data for G-SST2 0 to 16 Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=2 P051 = 40
(G171) When P790 = 0 or 9 is selected: Parameter is irrelevant Type: O2 Offline
(G173)
When USS protocol (P790=2) is selected: Number of PZD elements

0 No process data are expected or sent in the USS protocol

1...16 Number of process data words in USS protocol (same number
applies to transmission and receipt)
The received PZD elements (1 to max. 16) are available at
connectors (K6001 to K6016) and, in some cases, bit-serially at
binectors for "internal wiring" purposes.
The PZD elements to be transmitted (1 to max. 16) are selected
in parameters P794.01 to P794.16.

When peer-to-peer (P790= 5) is selected: Number of transferred words

0 Illegal setting
1...5 Number of transferred words
6...16 Illegal setting
P792 Length of parameter jobs for G-SST2 0, 3, 4, 127 Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=127 P051 = 40
(G171) This parameter is effective only when P790=2 (USS protocol). Type: O2 Offline

0 No PKW data are expected or sent in the USS protocol.

3, 4 3 or 4 PKW data words are expected in the USS protocol and 3
or 4 PKW data words are also sent (for transmission of
parameter values).
127 Number of PKWs is determined by the telegram length
P793 Baud rate for G-SST2 1 to 13 Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=6 P051 = 40
(G171) 1 300 baud Type: O2 Offline
(G173) 2 600 baud
3 1200 baud
4 2400 baud
5 4800 baud
6 9600 baud
7 19200 baud
8 38400 baud
9 56700 baud
11 93750 baud
13 187500 baud

11-84 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P794 Source for transmit data for G-SST2 All connector Ind: 16 P052 = 3
* numbers FS= P051 = 40
(G171) Selection of connectors to be transferred as transmit data via basic 1 i001: 32 Offline
(G173) converter interface 2 i002: 167
i003: 0
When USS protocol (P790=2) is selected: i004: 33
i005-i016: 0
i001: Selection for word 1 Type: L2
i002: Selection for word 2
...
i016: Selection for word 16

When peer-to-peer (P790=5) is selected:

i001: Selection for word 1

i002: Selection for word 2
...
i005: Selection for word 5

i006: Not used

...
i016: Not used

Applicable settings:
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
P795 Options for G-SST2 0 to 1 Ind: 2 P052 = 3
1 FS=0 P051 = 40
(G171) i001: 0 = Bus terminator OFF Type: O2 Offline
(G173) 1 = Bus terminator ON
st
i002: 0 = Bit 10 of the 1 receive word does not function as "Control
by PLC".
st
1 = Bit 10 of the 1 receive word does function as "Control by
st
PLC“, i.e. when bit 10 = 0, all other bits of the 1 receive word,
as well as receive words 2 to 16, are not written to connectors
K6001 to K6016, or to binectors B6100 to B6915. All these
connectors and binectors retain their old values.
P796 USS bus address for G-SST2 0 to 30 Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
(G171) This parameter is functional only when P790=2 (USS protocol). Address via Type: O2 Offline
which the unit can be addressed in USS bus operation.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-85

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P797 Telegram failure time for G-SST2 0.000 to 65.000 Ind: None P052 = 3
[s] FS=0.000 P051 = 40
(G171) The failure time set in this parameter is valid when setting P790=2 (USS 0.001s Type: O2 Offline
(G173) protocol) or P790=5 (peer-to-peer) is selected.

0.000 No time monitoring

0.001...65.000 Time which may elapse between the receipt of two
telegrams addressed to the unit before a fault message
is activated.

Fault message F012 is activated if no valid telegram is received within this

time period.

Note:
The telegram monitoring function is active
• from the receipt of the first error-free telegram after connection of the
electronics power supply
• from the receipt of the first error-free telegram after the telegram monitor
has responded (i.e. monitoring timeout).

Since the telegram transfer time is dependent on the set baud rate, the
following minimum setting values for P797 are recommended:

Baud rate as set in P793: Recommended minimum value for P797:

300 baud 0.520s
600 baud 0.260s
1200 baud 0.140s
2400 baud 0.080s
≥ 4800 baud 0.040s

Note:
If the "Automatic restart" function is selected (P086>0) on the peer-to-peer
communication partner, then only a parameter setting of P797>P086 (on the
communication partner) is meaningful.
P798 Source for activation of F012 6030, 6031 Ind: None P052 = 3
* FS=6030 P051 = 40
(G171) Selection of binector which will activate fault message F012 when it Type: L2 Offline
(G173) switches to log. "1"
6030 = binector B6030
6031 = binector B6031
r799 Diagnostic information for G-SST2 Ind: 10 P052 = 3
Type: O2
Free-running counter, overflow at 65535
(G171)
(G173) i001: Number of error-free telegrams
i002: Number of errored telegrams:
Byte frame, parity, overrun or BCC error
i003: Number of byte frame errors
i004: Number of overrun errors
i005: Parity error
i006:*) STX error:
Start interval before STX not observed,
telegram residual transfer time not observed,
delay time of LGE character too long,
erroneous STX, i.e. ≠ 02
i007:*) Violation of telegram residual transfer time (USS prot. only)
i008:*) Block check error
i009:*) Incorrect telegram length:
With P792=3 or 4 only:
The length of the received telegram is ≠ P791 + P792
(Note: If the received values are correct, they will be processed
even when this error has been detected)
i010: Timeout error:
No valid telegram has been received for a period exceeding the
setting in P797. After the occurrence of a timeout error, this
counter is not activated again until the next valid telegram is
received.
*) Indices i006 to i009 are irrelevant for communication with the SIMOREG
CCP (P790 = 6)

11-86 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
G-SST 3 (RS485 on X162) (see also Section 8, Sheets G172 and G174 and Section 9)
P800 Selection of protocol for G-SST3 basic converter interface 0, 2, 5, 9 Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
(G172) 0 Setting has no function Type: O2 Offline
(G174) 2 USS protocol
5 ”Peer-to-peer” communication
9 For internal factory test purposes
P801 Number of process data for G-SST3 0 to 16 Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=2 P051 = 40
(G172) When P800 = 0 or 9 is selected: Parameter is irrelevant Type: O2 Offline
(G174)
When USS protocol (P800=2) is selected: Number of PZD elements

0 No process data are expected or sent in the USS protocol

1...16 Number of process data words in USS protocol (same number
applies to transmission and receipt)
The received PZD elements (1 to max. 16) are available at
connectors (K6001 to K6016) and, in some cases, bit-serially at
binectors for "internal wiring" purposes.
The PZD elements to be transmitted (1 to max. 16) are selected
in parameters P804.01 to P804.16.

When peer-to-peer (P800= 5) is selected: Number of transferred words

0 Illegal setting
1...5 Number of transferred words
6...16 Illegal setting
P802 Length of parameter jobs for G-SST3 0, 3, 4, 127 Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=127 P051 = 40
(G172) This parameter is effective only when P800=2 (USS protocol). Type: O2 Offline

0 No PKW data are expected or sent in the USS protocol.

3, 4 3 or 4 PKW data words are expected in the USS protocol and 3
or 4 PKW data words are also sent (for transmission of
parameter values).
127 Number of PKWs is determined by the telegram length
P803 Baud rate for G-SST3 1 to 13 Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=13 P051 = 40
(G172) 1 300 baud Type: O2 Offline
(G174) 2 600 baud
3 1200 baud
4 2400 baud
5 4800 baud
6 9600 baud
7 19200 baud
8 38400 baud
9 56700 baud
11 93750 baud
13 187500 baud

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-87

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P804 Source for transmit data for G-SST3 All connector Ind: 16 P052 = 3
* numbers FS= P051 = 40
(G172) Selection of connectors to be transferred as transmit data via basic 1 i001: 32 Offline
(G174) converter interface 3 i002: 167
i003: 0
When USS protocol (P800=2) is selected: i004: 33
i005-i016: 0
i001: Selection for word 1 Type: L2
i002: Selection for word 2
...
i016: Selection for word 16

When peer-to-peer (P800=5) is selected:

i001: Selection for word 1

i002: Selection for word 2
...
i005: Selection for word 5

i006: Not used

...
i016: Not used

Applicable settings:
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
P805 Options for G-SST3 0 to 1 Ind: 2 P052 = 3
1 FS=0 P051 = 40
i001: 0 = Bus terminator OFF Type: O2 Offline
(G172) 1 = Bus terminator ON
st
(G174) i002: 0 = Bit 10 of the 1 receive word does not function as "Control
by PLC".
st
1 = Bit 10 of the 1 receive word does function as "Control by
st
PLC“, i.e. when bit 10 = 0, all other bits of the 1 receive word,
as well as receive words 2 to 16, are not written to connectors
K9001 to K9016, or to binectors B9100 to B9915. All these
connectors and binectors retain their old values.
P806 USS bus address for G-SST3 0 to 30 Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
(G172) This parameter is functional only when P800=2 (USS protocol). Address via Type: O2 Offline
which the unit can be addressed in USS bus operation.

11-88 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P807 Telegram failure time for G-SST3 0.000 to 65.000 Ind: None P052 = 3
[s] FS=0.000 P051 = 40
The failure time set in this parameter is valid when setting P800=2 (USS 0.001s Type: O2 Offline
(G172) protocol) or P800=5 (peer-to-peer) is selected.
(G174)
0.000 No time monitoring
0.001...65.000 Time which may elapse between the receipt of two
telegrams addressed to the unit before a fault message
is activated.

Fault message F013 is activated if no valid telegram is received within this

time period.

Note:
The telegram monitoring function is active
• from the receipt of the first error-free telegram after connection of the
electronics power supply
• from the receipt of the first error-free telegram after the telegram monitor
has responded (i.e. monitoring timeout).

Since the telegram transfer time is dependent on the set baud rate, the
following minimum setting values for P807 are recommended:

Baud rate as set in P803: Recommended minimum value for P807:

300 baud 0.520s
600 baud 0.260s
1200 baud 0.140s
2400 baud 0.080s
≥ 4800 baud 0.040s

Note:
If the "Automatic restart" function is selected (P086>0) on the peer-to-peer
communication partner, then only a parameter setting of P807>P086 (on the
communication partner) is meaningful.
P808 Source for activation of F013 9030, 9031 Ind: None P052 = 3
* FS=9030 P051 = 40
(G172) Selection of binector which will activate fault message F013 when it Type: L2 Offline
(G174) switches to log. "1"
9030 = binector B9030
9031 = binector B9031
r809 Diagnostic information for G-SST3 Ind: 10 P052 = 3
Type: O2
Free-running counter, overflow at 65535
(G172)
(G174) i001: Number of error-free telegrams
i002: Number of errored telegrams:
Byte frame, parity, overrun or BCC error
i003: Number of byte frame errors
i004: Number of overrun errors
i005: Parity error
i006: STX error:
Start interval before STX not observed,
telegram residual transfer time not observed,
delay time of LGE character too long,
erroneous STX, i.e. ≠ 02
i007: Violation of telegram residual transfer time (USS prot. only)
i008: Block check error
i009: Incorrect telegram length:
With PP802=3 or 4 only:
The length of the received telegram is ≠ P801 + P802
(Note: If the received values are correct, they will be processed
even when this error has been detected)
i010: Timeout error:
No valid telegram has been received for a period exceeding the
setting in P807. After the occurrence of a timeout error, this
counter is not activated again until the next valid telegram is
received.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-89

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
r810 Receive data on G-SST1 Ind: 20 P052 = 3
Type: L2
Display of data received via USS interface 1
(G170)
i001: Display process data word 1
...
i016 Display process data word 16
i017: Display parameter data word 1
...
i020: Display parameter data word 4
r811 Transmit data on G-SST1 Ind: 20 P052 = 3
Type: L2
Display of the data to be transmitted via USS interface 1
(G170)
i001: Display process data word 1
...
i016 Display process data word 16
i017: Display parameter data word 1
...
i020: Display parameter data word 4
r812 Receive data on G-SST2 Ind: 20 P052 = 3
Type: L2
When USS protocol (P790=2) is selected:
(G171) Display of data received via USS interface 2
(G173)
i001: Display process data word 1
...
i016 Display process data word 16
i017: Display parameter data word 1
...
i020: Display parameter data word 4

When peer-to-peer (P790=5) is selected:

Display of data received via peer-to-peer interface 2

i001: Receive data word 1

...
i005 Receive data word 5
i006: Not used
...
i020 Not used

When communication with the SIMOREG CCP is selected (P790 = 6):

Data received from the SIMOREG CCP via interface 2 is displayed

i001: Last received 1-byte message

i002: Last received header of a multibyte message
...
i018 Free-running counter for the number of received 1-byte
messages
i019 Free-running counter for the number of received headers of a
multibyte message
i020 Free-running counter for the number of received sequence bytes
of a multibyte message

11-90 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
r813 Transmit data on G-SST2 Ind: 20 P052 = 3
Type: L2
When USS protocol (P790=2) is selected:
(G171) Display of the data to be transmitted via USS interface 2
(G173)
i001: Display process data word 1
...
i016 Display process data word 16
i017: Display parameter data word 1
...
i020: Display parameter data word 4

When peer-to-peer (P790=5) is selected:

Display of the data to be transmitted via peer-to-peer interface 2

i001: Transmit data word 1

...
i005 Transmit data word 5
i006: Not used
...
i020 Not used
r814 Receive data on G-SST3 Ind: 20 P052 = 3
Type: L2
When USS protocol (P800=2) is selected:
(G172) Display of data received via USS interface 3
(G174)
i001: Display process data word 1
...
i016 Display process data word 16
i017: Display parameter data word 1
...
i020: Display parameter data word 4

When peer-to-peer (P800=5) is selected:

Display of data received via peer-to-peer interface 3

i001: Receive data word 1

...
i005 Receive data word 5
i006: Not used
...
i020 Not used
r815 Transmit data on G-SST3 Ind: 20 P052 = 3
Type: L2
When USS protocol (P800=2) is selected:
(G172) Display of the data to be transmitted via USS interface 3
(G174)
i001: Display process data word 1
...
i016 Display process data word 16
i017: Display parameter data word 1
...
i020: Display parameter data word 4

When peer-to-peer (P800=5) is selected:

Display of the data to be transmitted via peer-to-peer interface 3

i001: Transmit data word 1

...
i005 Transmit data word 5
i006: Not used
...
i020 Not used

Peer-to-peer interfaces: Enable transmission and receipt of telegrams:

If transmission on a peer-to-peer interface is disabled, the associated output drivers are connected to high impedance. If reception is
disabled on a peer-to-peer interface, then the telegram failure monitoring function is deactivated.
P816 Peer-to-peer 2: Source for data reception enabling command All binector numbers Ind: None P052 = 3
1 FS=1 P051 = 40
(G173) 0 = binector B0000 Type: L2 Offline
1 = binector B0001
etc.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-91

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P817 Peer-to-peer 2: Source for data transmission enabling command All binector numbers Ind: None P052 = 3
1 FS=1 P051 = 40
0 = binector B0000 Type: L2 Offline
(G173) 1 = binector B0001
etc.
P818 Peer-to-peer 3: Source for data reception enabling command All binector numbers Ind: None P052 = 3
1 FS=1 P051 = 40
(G174) 0 = binector B0000 Type: L2 Offline
1 = binector B0001
etc.
P819 Peer-to-peer 3: Source for data transmission enabling command All binector numbers Ind: None P052 = 3
1 FS=1 P051 = 40
(G174) 0 = binector B0000 Type: L2 Offline
1 = binector B0001
etc.

11.42 Deactivation of monitoring functions

WARNING
If monitoring functions are deactivated, there may be a risk to the safety of operating personnel or of
substantial property damage if a fault or error actually occurs!

P820 Deactivation of fault messages 0 to 147 Ind: 99 P052 = 3

* 1 FS= P051 = 40
The numbers of all fault messages to be deactivated must be entered in this see column Online
parameter. Fault numbers can be entered in any order. 0 must be entered on left
for any unused indices of the parameter. Type: O2
Factory setting:
i001 = 7 (overvoltage)
i002 = 18 (short circuit at binary outputs)
i003 = 31 (monitoring of speed controller)
i004 = 35 (drive blocked)
i005 = 36 (armature current cannot flow)
i006 = 37 (I2t motor monitoring function has responded)
i007 to i099 = 0
P821 Deactivation of alarms 0 to 147 Ind: 99 P052 = 3
* 1 FS= 0 P051 = 40
The numbers of all alarm messages to be deactivated must be entered in Type: O2 Online
this parameter. Alarm numbers can be entered in any order. 0 must be
entered for any unused indices of the parameter.

11.43 Compensation values

r824 A7006 compensation values 0 to 65535 Ind: 10 P052 = 3
1 Type: O2
These data contain compensation values for the analog section of
electronics board A7006
P825 Offset compensation for actual field current channel 13000 to 25000 Ind: 3 P052 = 3
1 FS=19139 P051 = 40
These data contain compensation values for the actual field current sensing Type: O2 Online
function. They are automatically set during "Restore factory settings"
(P051=21) and during the automatic offset compensation run (P051=22).

11-92 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P826 Correction of natural commutation timing -100 to 100 * 1.333 Ind: 6 P052 = 3
[µs] FS=0 P051 = 40
(G163) If there is a variation in the armature current peak value (in spite of a 1.333µs Type: I2 Online
constant firing angle), it can be corrected by offsetting the firing angle
reference time of the appropriate line phase in parameter P826. One line
phase (UV, UW, VW, VU, WU, WV) is assigned to each parameter index
(i001 to i006).
Increasing the parameter setting by a value of 1 corresponds to an increase
of 1.333 µs in the firing angle (0.024 degrees at 50Hz line frequency),
consequently reducing the armature current peak in the appropriate line
phase.
P826 is automatically set during the optimization run for precontrol and
current controller (armature and field) (P051=25) (only when U800=0; when
U800=1 or 2, parameters P826.001 to 006 are set to 0).
Caution:
Even an asymmetrical system causes variations in the magnitude of
armature current peaks. However, the system asymmetry may also change.
r827 Internal diagnosis 0 to 65535 Ind: 3 P052 = 3
1 Type: O2
i001: Number of write access operations to EEPROM
i002: Number of Page-Write access operations to EEPROM
i003: Counter for DUAL-PORT RAM timeouts
r828 MLFB data 0 to 65535 Ind: 16 P052 = 3
1 Type: O2
These data contain details about the power section design (model)
r829 A7001 compensation values 0 to 65535 Ind: 68 P052 = 3
1 Type: O2
These data contain compensation values for the analog section of
electronics board A7001

11.44 Thyristor diagnosis

P830 Control word for thyristor diagnosis 0 to 3 Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
0 Thyristor check function deactivated Type: O2 Offline
1 Thyristors are checked on initial SWITCH-ON or INCHING
command after connection of the electronics supply voltage.
2 Thyristors are checked on every SWITCH-ON or INCHING
command.
3 Thyristors will be checked on the next SWITCH-ON or INCHING
command. Parameter P830 is set to 0 if no fault is detected.
Note:
The thyristor check function may not be activated (setting P830=0 must be
selected)
− when the ”Enable a torque direction for torque direction change by
parallel drive” function is in use (see also parameter P165) or
− when the converter is used to supply large inductances (e.g. field supply
from armature terminals, supply of lifting solenoids, etc.).

11.45 Parameters for DriveMonitor and OP1S

P831 Parameters for the Trace function of DriveMonitor P052 = 3
to
r849 These parameters are settings for the data exchange between DriveMonitor
and the SIMOREG converter. They must not be changed!
r850 Parameters for the OP1S P052 = 3
to
P899 These parameters are settings for the data exchange between OP1S and
the SIMOREG converter. They must not be changed!

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-93

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)

11.46 Profile parameters

P918 CB bus address 0 to 200 Ind: 2 P052 = 3
1 FS=3 P051 = 40
Protocol-dependent bus address for communication boards Type: O2 Offline
(Z110)
(Z111) Note:
The validity of the bus address is monitored by the communication board.
(Bus addresses 0 to 2 are reserved for Master stations on PROFIBUS
boards and must not therefore be set for other purposes). If the value is not
accepted by the COM BOARD, fault F080 is displayed with fault value 5
P927 Parameterization enable 0 to 127 Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=6 P051 = 40
(G170) Enabling of interfaces for parameterization. A parameter value can only be Type: V2 Offline
(G171) altered via an enabled interface.
(G172) 0: None
(Z110) 1: Communications board (CB)
(Z111) 2: Parameterizing unit (PMU)
4: G-SST1 serial interface and OP1S
8: Reserved
16: Technology board (TB)
32: G-SST2 serial interface
64: G-SST3 serial interface
Setting information:
Every interface has a numeric code.
The number for one specific interface, or the sum of various numbers
assigned to several interfaces, must be entered in this parameter in order to
enable the relevant interface(s) for use as a parameterization interface.
Example:
Factory setting value 6 (=4+2) means that the PMU and G-SST1 interfaces
are enabled for parameterization purposes.

11-94 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)

11.47 Fault memory

r947 Fault memory Ind: 64 P052 = 3
Type: O2
Display of fault messages generated in response to 8 recent faults. A fault
(G189) value and fault time is assigned to each fault number (see Section 10 for
details of fault numbers and fault values).The interrelationship between the
associated parameters is shown in the diagram below.
The fault numbers of the last (maximum 8) fault events are stored under the
indices of parameter P947. r947.001 displays the fault number of the current
(still not acknowledged) fault, index 9 displays the number of the most
recent acknowledged fault, index 17 the fault number of the second most
recent acknowledged fault, etc. An entry of "0" means that no "earlier" fault
has occurred. Since only one fault message can be stored with respect to
any fault event on the SIMOREG 6RA70, only indices 1, 9, 17, 25, 33, 41,
49 and 57 are relevant.
A fault value is assigned to each fault number in the corresponding index of
parameter r949. This provides further information about the nature of the
fault.
In addition, the fault time (the current reading of the hours run counter as
the fault occurred (r048)), is stored for each fault in r049. The data for the
current (not yet acknowledged) fault are stored as the "Hours run counter
reading" in index 1. The data for earlier, already acknowledged faults are
stored under the following indices.
r947 r949 r049
Fault number Fault value Fault time [h]

Index 1 Current Current Current Index 1

0 0 1 acknowl.
st Index 2
0 0 2nd acknowl. Index 3

0 0 3rd acknowl. Index 4

0 0 4th acknowl. Index 5

0 0 5th acknowl. Index 6
0 0 6th acknowl. Index 7
0 0 7th acknowl. Index 8
Index 9 1st acknowl. 1st acknowl.
0 0

0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
Index 17 2 acknowl.
nd 2 acknowl.
nd

... ...

Plaintext information about the fault numbers is available under the

corresponding index of parameter r951.
r949 Fault value Ind: 64 P052 = 3
Type: O2
Fault value of faults, allows more detailed diagnosis for a variety of
(G189) parameters.
The fault values are stored in the same indices as the associated fault
numbers (r947) - see parameter r947.
r951 Fault text 0 to 65535 Ind: 101 P052 = 3
1 Type: O2

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-95

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
P952 Number of faults 0 to 65535 Ind: None P052 = 3
1 FS=0 P051 = 40
Settings: Type: O2 Offline
0 Deletes the entire fault memory (r947, r949 and r049) by
resetting to 0
Note: P952 cannot be reset while a fault is pending
>0 Display of the faults stored in the fault memory (r947, r949 and
r049)

11.48 Visualization parameters: Alarms

r953 Alarm parameter 1 Ind: None P052 = 3
Type: V2
Display of active alarms in bit-coded form (A001 to A016).
If one of the alarms between 1 and 16 is generated, the corresponding
segment in the display lights up.

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

See Section 10.2 for meaning of individual alarms.

r954 Alarm parameter 2 Ind: None P052 = 3
Type: V2
Display of active alarms in bit-coded form (A017 to A032).
If one of the alarms between 17 and 32 is generated, the corresponding
segment in the display lights up.

32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25

24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17

See Section 10.2 for meaning of individual alarms

r955 Alarm parameter 3 Ind: None P052 = 3
Type: V2
Parameter alarms 3
If one of the alarms between 33 and 48 is generated, the corresponding
segment in the display lights up.

48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41

40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33

r956 Alarm parameter 4 Ind: None P052 = 3

Type: V2
Parameter alarms 4
If one of the alarms between 49 and 64 is generated, the corresponding
segment in the display lights up.

64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57

56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49

r957 Alarm parameter 5 Ind: None P052 = 3

Type: V2
Parameter alarms 5
If one of the alarms between 65 and 80 is generated, the corresponding
segment in the display lights up..

80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73

72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65

11-96 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
r958 Alarm parameter 6 Ind: None P052 = 3
Type: V2
Parameter alarms 6 (CB alarms)
If one of the alarms between 81 and 96 is generated, the corresponding
segment in the display lights up.

96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89

88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81

r959 Alarm parameter 7 Ind: None P052 = 3

Type: V2
Parameter alarms 7 (TB alarms 1)
If one of the alarms between 97 and 112 is generated, the corresponding
segment in the display lights up.

112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105

104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97

r960 Alarm parameter 8 Ind: None P052 = 3

Type: V2
Parameter alarms 8 (TB alarms 2)
If one of the alarms between 113 and 128 is generated, the corresponding
segment in the display lights up.

128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121

120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113

11.49 Device identification

r964 Parameters for device identification on the PROFIBUS 0 to 65535 Ind: 6 P052 = 1
[SW 2.0 and later] 1 Type: O2
Display parameters to support overview and diagnosis of all nodes on the
PROFIBUS-DP during and after commissioning
(coding according to PROFIBUS profile V3)
i001: Display of the manufacturer of the
SIMOREG DC-MASTER 6RA70 : SIEMENS = 42
i002: Display of device type: SIMOREG DC-MASTER 6RA70 = 4110
i003: Display of the software version of the SIMOREG DC-MASTER
6RA70
(see r060.001)
i004: Display of year of generation of the software of the SIMOREG
DC-MASTER 6RA70: y y y y
(see r061.001)
i005: Display of the month and day of generation of the software of
the SIMOREG DC-MASTER 6RA70: d d m m
(see r061.003 and r061.002)
i006: Display of the controlled axes of the SIMOREG DC-MASTER
6RA70: 1

11.50 Visualization parameters: Control and status word

r967 Display of control word 1 Ind: None P052 = 3
Type: V2
Visualization parameter for control word 1 (bits 0-15)
Identical to r650 (control word 1)
r968 Display of status word 1 Ind: None P052 = 3
Type: V2
Visualization parameter for status word 1 (bits 0 - 15)
Identical to r652 (status word 1)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-97

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)

11.51 Resetting and storing parameters,

list of existing and modified P and r parameters
P970 Restore factory setting 0 to 1 Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
Reset parameters to factory setting (default) Type: O2 Offline
0: Parameter reset: All parameters are reset to their original values
(factory setting). This parameter is then automatically reset to 1.
1: No parameter reset

Note: Function can also be selected by setting P051=21.

P971 EEPROM transfer 0 to 1 Ind: None P052 = 3
* 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
Transfer of parameter values from RAM to EERPROM on switchover from 0 Type: O2 Offline
to 1.
It takes approximately 15s to process all values. The PMU remains in value
mode for this period.
r980 List of existing parameter numbers, start Ind: 101 P052 = 3
Type: O2
Visualization parameter for displaying the first 100 parameter numbers in
the P or r parameter range (0 to 999). The parameter numbers are listed in
ascending sequence.
Repetition of a number over several indices means that there are no further
parameter numbers in the 0 to 999 range.
The list is continued at the parameter whose number is displayed under
index 101.
See also r989
r981 List of existing parameter numbers, continuation Ind: 101 P052 = 3
Type: O2
See r980.
r982 List of existing parameter numbers, continuation Ind: 101 P052 = 3
Type: O2
See r980.
r983 List of existing parameter numbers, continuation Ind: 101 P052 = 3
Type: O2
See r980.
r984 List of existing parameter numbers, continuation Ind: 101 P052 = 3
Type: O2
See r980.
r985 List of existing parameter numbers, continuation Ind: 101 P052 = 3
Type: O2
See r980.
r986 List of existing parameter numbers, continuation Ind: 101 P052 = 3
Type: O2
See r980.
r987 List of existing parameter numbers, continuation Ind: 101 P052 = 3
Type: O2
See r980.
r988 List of existing parameter numbers, continuation Ind: 101 P052 = 3
Type: O2
See r980.
r989 List of existing parameter numbers, continuation Ind: 101 P052 = 3
Type: O2
Continuation of the list can be found under index 101. Please note:
860 = r860 (TECH BOARD installed)
2980 = n980
See also r980.
r990 List of modified parameter numbers, start Ind: 101 P052 = 3
Type: O2
Visualization parameter for displaying the first 100 modified parameters in
the P or r parameter range (0 to 999). The parameter numbers are listed in
ascending sequence.
Repetition of a number over several indices means that there are no further
modified parameters in the 0 to 999 range.
The list is continued at the parameter whose number is displayed under
index 101.
See also r999.
r991 List of modified parameter numbers, continuation Ind: 101 P052 = 3
Type: O2
See r990.

11-98 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
r992 List of modified parameter numbers, continuation Ind: 101 P052 = 3
Type: O2
See r990.
r993 List of modified parameter numbers, continuation Ind: 101 P052 = 3
Type: O2
See r990.
r994 List of modified parameter numbers, continuation Ind: 101 P052 = 3
Type: O2
See r990.
r995 List of modified parameter numbers, continuation Ind: 101 P052 = 3
Type: O2
See r990.
r996 List of modified parameter numbers, continuation Ind: 101 P052 = 3
Type: O2
See r990.
r997 List of modified parameter numbers, continuation Ind: 101 P052 = 3
Type: O2
See r990.
r998 List of modified parameter numbers, continuation Ind: 101 P052 = 3
Type: O2
See r990.
r999 List of modified parameter numbers, continuation Ind: 101 P052 = 3
Type: O2
Continuation of the list can be found under index 101. Please note:
2990 = n990
See also r990.

11.52 Password protection, key/lock mechanism

Key/lock mechanism
To prevent unintended parameterization of the devices and to protect the know-how stored in the parameterization, you can restrict
access to the (basic converter) parameters and define your own passwords (=pairs of numbers that you can choose). This done in
parameters:
• U005 key and
• U006 lock.
If U005 and U006 are parameterized differently, it is only possible to access the following parameters:
All visualization parameters (rxxx, nxxx)
All parameters that can be changed with P051 = 0 (See parameter list)
All "user parameters" (see Parameter U007)
All other parameters neither be read nor altered.
Only when U005 and U006 are parameterized to the same values, are these restrictions removed again.

When using the key-lock-mechanism you should follow this procedure:

1. Program the den lock parameter U006 in both parameter indices with your specific password.
2. Set Parameter P051 to the value 0. This activates the password you have just set (in U006).
After that, P051 can be set to 40 again and the password protection remains active.
Examples:
Lock Key Result
U006.1 = 0 (factory setting) U005.1 = 0 (factory setting) The key and lock are parameterized identically,
U006.2 = 0 U005.2 = 0 all parameters are accessible
U006.1 = 12345 U005.1 = 0 The key and lock are parameterized differently,
U006.2 = 54321 U005.2 = 0 only the visualization parameters, the parameters that can be
altered with P051=0, and the "user parameters" are accessible
U006.1 = 12345 U005.1 = 12345 The key and lock are parameterized identically,
U006.2 = 54321 U005.2 = 54321 all parameters are accessible

NOTE: If you forget or lose your password, you can only regain access to all parameters by restoring the factory setting (P051=21).
U005 Key [SW 1.7 and later] 0 to 65535 Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2005) 1 FS=0 P051 = 0
* Parameter for entering the keys for the key/lock mechanism Type: O2 on-line

U006 Lock [SW 1.7 and later] 0 to 65535 Ind: 2 P052 = 3

(2006) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* Parameter for entering the password for the key/lock mechanism Type: O2 on-line

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-99

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
U007 Numbers of the user parameters [SW 1.7 and later] 0 to 999 Ind: 100 P052 = 3
(2007) 2000 to 2005 FS=0 P051 = 40
* Parameters for entering the numbers of those parameters that are to be 2008 to 2999 Type: O2 on-line
accessible if the key and lock are set differently. 1
NOTE: Parameters U000 to U999 must be entered as 2000 to 2999

11.53 Processor utilization

n009 Processor utilization 0.0 to 100.0 Ind: 6 P052 = 3
(2009) [%] Type: O2
This parameter is particularly relevant as regards the selection of function 0.1%
blocks of technology software in the basic unit (option S00) and the
definition of the time slices in which these function blocks are processed
(see also Section 8, Function Diagram B101 and parameters U950 to
U952).

i001: Current total processor utilization (=K9990)

i002: Extrapolated total processor utilization for line frequency = 65Hz
(=K9991)
i003: Current total processor utilization by programs in
time slice 10 (=K9992)
i004: Current total processor utilization by programs in
time slice 4 (=K9993)
i005: Current total processor utilization by programs in
time slice 2 (=K9994)
i006: Current total processor utilization by programs in
time slice 1 (=K9995)

11.54 Display parameters for technology functions with S00

Only active with optional technology software S00
Connector/binector converters
n010 Connector/binector converter 1 (bit field 1) FB 10 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2010) Type: V2
Displays the status of the bits in the bit field on the bars of the 7-segment
S00 display

(B120)
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Segment ON: Bit (binector) = log. "1" state

Segment OFF: Bit (binector) = log. "0" state
n011 Connector/binector converter 2 (bit field 2) FB 11 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2011) Type: V2
As for n010
S00
(B120)
n012 Connector/binector converter 3 (bit field 3) FB 12 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2012) Type: V2
As for n010
S00
(B120)

Binector/connector converters
n013 Binector/connector converter 1 (bit field 4) FB 13 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2013) Type: V2
Displays the status of the bits in the bit field on the bars of the 7-segment
S00 display

(B121)
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Segment ON: Bit = log. "1" state

Segment OFF: Bit = log. "0" state

11-100 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
n014 Binector/connector converter 2 (bit field 5) FB 14 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2014) Type: V2
As for n013
S00
(B121)
n015 Binector/connector converter 3 (bit field 6) FB 15 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2015) Type: V2
As for n013
S00
(B121)

Technology controller
n016 Actual value display FB 260 -200.0 to 199.9 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2016) [%] Type: I2
S00 0.1
(B170)
n017 Setpoint display FB 260 -200.0 to 199.9 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2017) [%] Type: I2
S00 0.1
(B170)
n018 Display of effective Kp factor FB 260 0.00 to 30.00 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2018) 0.01 Type: O2
S00
(B170)
n019 Display of technology controller output FB 260 -200.0 to 199.9 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2019) [%] Type: I2
S00 0.1
(B170)

Velocity/speed calculator
n020 Display of actual speed FB 261 -200.0 to 199.9 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2020) [%] Type: I2
S00 0.1
(B190)
n021 Display of actual velocity FB 261 -32.768 to 32767 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2021) [m/s] Type: I2
S00 0.001
(B190)
n022 Display of setpoint velocity FB 261 -32.768 to 32767 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2022) [m/s] Type: I2
S00 0.001
(B190)
n023 Display of setpoint speed FB 261 -200.0 to 199.9 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2023) [%] Type: I2
S00 0.1
(B190)

11.55 Miscellaneous
n024 Display of the speed actual value in rpm [SW 2.0 and later] -32768 to 32767 Ind: 2 P052 = 2
[rpm] Type: I2
(2024) 1
i001: Display of the speed actual value from the pulse generator input
(G145) of basic device X173
(Z120) i002: Display of speed actual value from tacho module SBP

U040 Reserved for later use [SW 2.0 and later] P052 = 3
to
U041 These parameters must not be changed by the user!

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-101

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
n042 Warning memory [SW 2.0 and later] Ind: 8 P052 = 2
Type: V2
(2042) Warning memory for flagging warnings that have occurred since the
electronics supply voltage was last switched on.
The contents of the warning memory are lost when the electronics supply
voltage is switched off and can be deleted with U043.
The warnings are displayed in bit code as for r953 to r960
i001: Display of warnings 1 to 16
i002: Display of warnings 17 to 32
i003: Display of warnings 33 to 48
i004: Display of warnings 49 to 64
i005: Display of warnings 65 to 80
i006: Display of warnings 81 to 96
i007: Display of warnings 97 to 112
i008: Display of warnings 113 to 128

See Section 10.2 for the meaning of the individual warnings

U043 Deleting the warning memory [SW 2.0 and later] 0 to 1 Ind: none P052 = 3
1 FS=1
(2043) Settings: Type: O2
* 0 Deletes the entire warning memory n042 by resetting it to 0.
Subsequently the parameter is automatically set back to value
1.
1 Not active

U044 Connector display, decimal [SW 2.0 and later] All connector Ind: 5 P052 = 3
(2044) numbers FS=0 P051 =40
* Selects those connectors whose value is to be displayed as a decimal with 1 Type: L2 online
n045
(G121)
i001: Selects the connector to be displayed with n045.01
i002: Selects the connector to be displayed with n045.02
i003: Selects the connector to be displayed with n045.03
i004: Selects the connector to be displayed with n045.04
i005: Selects the connector to be displayed with n045.05
n045 Connector display, decimal [SW 2.0 and later] -32768 to 32767 Ind:5 P052 = 3
(2045) 1 Type: I2
Decimal display with sign of the values of the connectors selected with
(G121) U044. In the case of double-word connectors the H word is displayed.

i001: Display of the connector selected with U044.01

i002: Display of the connector selected with U044.02
i003: Display of the connector selected with U044.03
i004: Display of the connector selected with U044.04
i005: Display of the connector selected with U044.05
U046 Connector display, hexadecimal [SW 2.0 and later] All connector Ind: 5 P052 = 3
(2046) numbers FS=0 P051 =40
* Selection of connectors whose value is to be displayed as a hexadecimal 1 Type: L2 online
value with n047l
(G121)
i001: Selection of the connector to be displayed with n047.01
i002: Selection of the connector to be displayed with n047.02
i003: Selection of the connector to be displayed with n047.03
i004: Selection of the connector to be displayed with n047.04
i005: Selection of the connector to be displayed with n047.05
n047 Connector display, hexadecimal [SW 2.0 and later] 0000h to FFFFh Ind:5 P052 = 3
(2047) 1 Type: L2
Hexadecimal display of values of connectors selected with U046. In the
(G121) case of double-word connectors the H word is displayed.

i001: Display of the connector selected with U046.01

i002: Display of the connector selected with U046.02
i003: Display of the connector selected with U046.03
i004: Display of the connector selected with U046.04
i005: Display of the connector selected with U046.05

11-102 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
U049 OP1S operating display [SW 1.9 and later] 0 to 3999 Ind:5 P052 = 3
1 FS= P051 =40
(2049) Function parameter for selecting parameters whose values must be i001: 19 on-line
included in the operating display of the optional i002: 38
OP1S convenience operator panel. i003: 25
st i004: 28
i001: 1 line on left i005: 59
st
i002: 1 line on right Type: O2
nd
i003: 2 line (actual value), visualization parameter only
rd
i004: 3 line (setpoint)
th
i005: 4 line

Connector type converters (only active with optional technology software S00)
2 connectors are converted into one double word connector.
st
U098 Operands for 1 connector type converter (result = KK9498) FB 298 All connector Ind: 4 P052 = 3
nd
(2098) Operands for 2 connector type converter (result = KK9499) FB 299 numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* [SW 1.9 and later] 1 Type: L2 off-line
S00
i001: Source for the low word of output connector KK9498
(B151) i002: Source for the high word of output connector KK9498
i003: Source for the low word of output connector KK9499
i004: Source for the high word of output connector KK9499
Settings:
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

11.56 Settable fixed values

Only active with optional technology software S00
U099 Fixed value [SW 1.8 and later] -199.99 to 199.99 Ind: 100 P052 = 3
(2099) [%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
The values set in Index .001 to .100 are connected to connectors K9501 to 0.01% Type: I2 on-line
S00 K9600
(B110)

11.57 Activation of fault messages and alarm messages

Only active with optional technology software S00
U100 Source for the activation of F023 and F019 FB 2, FB 286 All binector numbers Ind: 8 P052 = 3
(2100) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* Selection of the binectors that activate fault messages F023 or F019 on log. Type: L2 off-line
S00 "1"
0 = Binector B0000
(B115) 1 = Binector B0001
etc.
Up to SW 1.7: F023 (without fault value) if binector = 1 (FB 2)
SW 1.8 and later:
i001: F023 with fault value 1 (FB 2)
i002: F023 with fault value 2
i003: F023 with fault value 3
i004: F023 with fault value 4
i005: F019 with fault value 1 (FB 286)
i006: F019 with fault value 2
i007: F019 with fault value 3
i008: F019 with fault value 4

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-103

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
U101 Source for the activation of F024 and F020 FB 3, FB 287 All binector numbers Ind: 8 P052 = 3
(2101) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* Selection of the binectors that activate fault messages F024 or F020 on Type: L2 off-line
S00 log. "1"
0 = Binector B0000
(B115) 1 = Binector B0001
etc.
Up to SW 1.7: F024 (without fault value) if binector = 1 (FB 3)
SW 1.8 and later:
i001: F024 with fault value 1 (FB 3)
i002: F024 with fault value 2
i003: F024 with fault value 3
i004: F024 with fault value 4
i005: F020 with fault value 1 (FB 287)
i006: F020 with fault value 2
i007: F020 with fault value 3
i008: F020 with fault value 4
U102 Source for the activation of F033 and F053 FB 4, FB 288 All binector numbers Ind: 8 P052 = 3
(2102) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* Selection of the binectors that activate fault messages F033 or F053 on Type: L2 off-line
S00 log. "1"
0 = Binector B0000
(B115) 1 = Binector B0001
etc.
Up to SW 1.7: F033 (without fault value) if binector = 1 (FB 4)
SW 1.8 and later:
i001: F033 with fault value 1 (FB 4)
i002: F033 with fault value 2
i003: F033 with fault value 3
i004: F033 with fault value 4
i005: F053 with fault value 1 (FB 288)
i006: F053 with fault value 2
i007: F053 with fault value 3
i008: F053 with fault value 4
U103 Source for the activation of F034 and F054 FB 5, FB 289 All binector numbers Ind: 8 P052 = 3
(2103) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* Selection of the binectors that activate fault messages F034 or F054 on log. Type: L2 off-line
S00 "1"
0 = Binector B0000
(B115) 1 = Binector B0001
etc.
Up to SW 1.7: F034 (without Fault value) if binector = 1 (FB 5)
SW 1.8 and later:
i001: F034 with fault value 1 (FB 5)
i002: F034 with fault value 2
i003: F034 with fault value 3
i004: F034 with fault value 4
i005: F054 with fault value 1 (FB 289)
i006: F054 with fault value 2
i007: F054 with fault value 3
i008: F054 with fault value 4
U104 Source for the activation of A023 and A019 FB 6, FB 256 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2104) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* Selection of the binectors that activate alarm A023 or A019 on log. "1" Type: L2 off-line
S00 0 = Binector B0000
1 = Binector B0001
(B115) etc.
Up to SW 1.7: A023 (FB 6)
SW 1.8 and later:
i001: A023 (FB 6)
i002: A019 (FB 256)

11-104 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
U105 Source for the activation of A024 and A020 FB 7, FB 257 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2105) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* Selection of the binectors that activate alarm A024 or A020 on log. "1" Type: L2 off-line
S00 0 = Binector B0000
1 = Binector B0001
(B115) etc.
Up to SW 1.7: A024 (FB 7)
SW 1.8 and later:
i001: A024 (FB 7)
i002: A020 (FB 257)
U106 Source for the activation of A033 and A053 FB 8, FB 258 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2106) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* Selection of the binectors that activate alarm A033 or A053 on log. "1" Type: L2 off-line
S00 0 = Binector B0000
1 = Binector B0001
(B115) etc.
Up to SW 1.7: A033 (FB 8)
SW 1.8 and later:
i001: A033 (FB 8)
i002: A053 (FB 258)
U107 Source for the activation of A034 and A054 FB 9, FB 259 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2107) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* Selection of the binectors that activate alarm A034 or A054 on log. "1" Type: L2 off-line
S00 0 = Binector B0000
1 = Binector B0001
(B115) etc.
Up to SW 1.7: A034 (FB 9)
SW 1.8 and later:
i001: A034 (FB 9)
i002: A054 (FB 259)

11.58 Connector/binector converters, binector/connector converters

Only active with optional technology software S00
U110 Source for connector/binector converter 1 FB 10 All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
(2110) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* Connector which must be converted to binectors B9052 (bit 0) to B9067 (bit 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 15)
0 = connector K0000
(B120) 1 = connector K0001
etc.
U111 Source for connector/binector converter 2 FB 11 All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
(2111) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* Connector which must be converted to binectors B9068 (bit 0) to B9083 (bit 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 15)
0 = connector K0000
(B120) 1 = connector K0001
etc.
U112 Source for connector/binector converter 3 FB 12 All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
(2112) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* Connector which must be converted to binectors B9084 (bit 0) to B9099 (bit 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 15)
0 = connector K0000
(B120) 1 = connector K0001
etc.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-105

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
U113 Source for binector/connector converter 1 FB 13 All binector numbers Ind: 16 P052 = 3
(2113) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* Binectors which must be converted to connector K9113 Type: L2 Offline
st
S00 i001: 1 binector (bit 0)
nd
i002: 2 binector (bit 1)
(B121) ...
th
i016: 16 binector (bit 15)
Settings:
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
U114 Source for binector/connector converter 2 FB 14 All binector numbers Ind: 16 P052 = 3
(2114) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* Binectors which must be converted to connector K9114 Type: L2 Offline
st
S00 i001: 1 binector (bit 0)
nd
i002: 2 binector (bit 1)
(B121) ...
th
i016: 16 binector (bit 15)
Settings:
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
U115 Source for binector/connector converter 3 FB 15 All binector numbers Ind: 16 P052 = 3
(2115) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* Binectors which must be converted to connector K9115 Type: L2 Offline
st
S00 i001: 1 binector (bit 0)
nd
i002: 2 binector (bit 1)
(B121) ...
th
i016: 16 binector (bit 15)
Settings:
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

11.59 Binector/connector converter for serial interfaces

U116 Source for binector/connector converter for GSST1 [SW1.4 and later] All binector numbers Ind: 16 P052 = 3
(2116) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* Binectors which must be converted to connector K2020 Type: L2 Offline
st
(G170) i001: 1 binector (bit 0)
nd
i002: 2 binector (bit 1)
...
th
i016: 16 binector (bit 15)
Settings:
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
U117 Source for binector/connector converter for GSST2 [SW1.4 and later] All binector numbers Ind: 16 P052 = 3
(2117) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* Binectors which must be converted to connector K6020 Type: L2 Offline
st
(G171) i001: 1 binector (bit 0)
nd
(G173) i002: 2 binector (bit 1)
...
th
i016: 16 binector (bit 15)
Settings:
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

11-106 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
U118 Source for binector/connector converter for GSST3 [SW1.4 and later] All binector numbers Ind: 16 P052 = 3
(2118) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* Binectors which must be converted to connector K9020 Type: L2 Offline
st
(G172) i001: 1 binector (bit 0)
nd
(G174) i002: 2 binector (bit 1)
...
th
i016: 16 binector (bit 15)
Settings:
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

U119 Parameters for the Trace function of DriveMonitor [SW1.4 and later]
(2119)
* This parameter is a setting for the exchange of process data between
DriveMonitor and the SIMOREG converter. It must not be changed!

11.60 Mathematical functions

Only active with optional technology software S00
Adder / subtractor
The 3 operands of a function block are selected by 3 indices each of a parameter.
U120 to U131:
The connectors selected via indices i001 and i002 are added, the connector selected via index i003 is subtracted.
U120 to U122 [SW 1.8 and later]:
The connectors selected via indices i004 and i005 are added, the connector selected via index i006 is subtracted.
The result is limited to -200.00 to +199.99% and applied to the connector stated.
U120 Operands for 1st adder / subtractor (result = K9120) FB 20 All connector Ind: 6 P052 = 3
(2120) Operands for 13th adder / subtractor (result = K9132) FB 32 numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* (SW 1.8 and later) 1 Type: L2 off-line
S00
0 = Connector K0000
(B125) 1 = Connector K0001
etc.
U121 Operands for 2nd adder / subtractor (result = K9121) FB 21 All connector Ind: 6 P052 = 3
(2121) Operands for 14th adder / subtractor (result = K9133) FB 33 numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* [SW 1.8 and later] 1 Type: L2 off-line
S00
0 = Connector K0000
(B125) 1 = Connector K0001
etc.
U122 Operands for 3rd adder / subtractor (result = K9122) FB 22 All connector Ind: 6 P052 = 3
(2122) Operands for 14th adder / subtractor (result = K9134) FB 34 numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* [SW 1.8 and later] 1 Type: L2 off-line
S00
0 = Connector K0000
(B125) 1 = Connector K0001
etc.
th
U123 Operands for 4 adder / subtracter (result = K9123) FB 23 All connector Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2123) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = connector K0000 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = connector K0001
(B125) etc.
th
U124 Operands for 5 adder / subtracter (result = K9124) FB 24 All connector Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2124) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = connector K0000 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = connector K0001
(B125) etc.
th
U125 Operands for 6 adder / subtracter (result = K9125) FB 25 All connector Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2125) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = connector K0000 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = connector K0001
(B125) etc.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-107

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
th
U126 Operands for 7 adder / subtracter (result = K9126) FB 26 All connector Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2126) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = connector K0000 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = connector K0001
(B125) etc.
th
U127 Operands for 8 adder / subtracter (result = K9127) FB 27 All connector Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2127) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = connector K0000 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = connector K0001
(B125) etc.
th
U128 Operands for 9 adder / subtracter (result = K9128) FB 28 All connector Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2128) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = connector K0000 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = connector K0001
(B125) etc.
th
U129 Operands for 10 adder / subtracter (result = K9129) FB 29 All connector Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2129) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = connector K0000 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = connector K0001
(B125) etc.
th
U130 Operands for 11 adder / subtracter (result = K9130) FB 30 All connector Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2130) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = connector K0000 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = connector K0001
(B125) etc.
th
U131 Operands for 12 adder / subtracter (result = K9131) FB 31 All connector Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2131) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = connector K0000 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = connector K0001
(B125) etc.

Adders / subtracters for double word connectors

The 3 operands of a function block are selected in each case via the three indices of a parameter.
The result is switched to a double word connector and a connector.
The double word connector is limited to between -200.00 and +199.99%.
The connector is limited to between –0.003052 and +0.003052% (= value range of LOW word of a double word connector
= ±200% / 65536)
st
U132 Operands for 1 adder / subtracter FB 48 All connector Ind: 6 P052 = 3
nd
(2132) Operands for 2 adder / subtracter FB 49 numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* [SW 1.9 and later] 1 Type: L2 off-line
st
S00 1 adder / subtracter: result = KK9490 and K9491
nd
2 adder / subtracter: result = KK9492 and K9493
(B151)
st
i001: Addition value for 1 adder/subtracter
st
i002: Addition value for 1 adder/subtracter
st
i003: Subtraction value for 1 adder/subtracter
nd
i004: Addition value for 2 adder/subtracter
nd
i005: Addition value for 2 adder/subtracter
nd
i006: Subtraction value for 2 adder/subtracter
Settings:
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

Sign inverters
The contents of the connector selected in the parameter are negated (two's complement). The result is applied to the specified connector.
st
U135 Source for 1 sign inverter (result = K9135) FB 35 All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
(2135) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = connector K0000 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = connector K0001
(B125) etc.
nd
U136 Source for 2 sign inverter (result = K9136) FB 36 All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
(2136) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = connector K0000 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = connector K0001
(B125) etc.
rd
U137 Source for 3 sign inverter (result = K9137) FB 37 All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
(2137) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = connector K0000 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = connector K0001
(B125) etc.

11-108 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
th
U138 Source for 4 sign inverter (result = K9138) FB 38 All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
(2138) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = connector K0000 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = connector K0001
(B125) etc.

Switchable sign inverters

The contents of the connector entered in the parameter for selection of a source is switched through, depending on the state of the
binector entered in the parameter for control bit selection, as an unchanged value (when control bit = 0) or as a negated value (two's
complement, when control bit = 1). The result is applied to the specified connector.
st
U140 Source for 1 switchable sign inverter FB 40 All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
(2140) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* Result = K9140 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 0 = connector K0000
(B125) 1 = connector K0001
etc.
st
U141 Control bit for 1 switchable sign inverter FB 40 All binector numbers Ind: None P052 = 3
(2141) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = binector B0000 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = binector B0001
(B125) etc.
nd
U142 Source for 2 switchable sign inverter FB 41 All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
(2142) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* Result = K9141 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 0 = connector K0000
(B125) 1 = connector K0001
etc.
nd
U143 Control bit for 2 switchable sign inverter FB 41 All binector numbers Ind: None P052 = 3
(2143) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = binector B0000 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = binector B0001
(B125) etc.

Divider
The two operands (x1, x2) for each divider are selected via 2 indices each of the parameter:
Index i001 = x1, index i002 = x2
Index i003 = x1, index i004 = x2 [SW 1.8 and later]
x1 ∗100%
Formula: y = For division by 0 (x2=0) the following applies:
x2
for x1 > 0: y = +199.99%
for x1 = 0: y = 0.00%
for x1 < 0: y = -200.00%
y is limited to -200.00 to +199.99% and applied to the connector stated.
U145 Operands for 1st divider (result = K9145) FB 45 All connector Ind: 4 P052 = 3
(2145) Operands for 4th divider (result = K9142) FB 42 numbers FS=1 P051 = 40
* 1 Type: L2 off-line
S00 0 = Connector K0000
(B131) 1 = Connector K0001
etc.
U146 Operands for 2nd divider (result = K9146) FB 46 All connector Ind: 4 P052 = 3
(2146) Operands for 5th divider (result = K9143) FB 43 numbers FS=1 P051 = 40
* 1 Type: L2 off-line
S00 0 = Connector K0000
(B131) 1 = Connector K0001
etc.
U147 Operands for 3rd divider (result = K9147) FB 47 All connector Ind: 4 P052 = 3
(2147) Operands for 6th divider (result = K9144) FB 44 numbers FS=1 P051 = 40
* 1 Type: L2 off-line
S00 0 = Connector K0000
(B131) 1 = Connector K0001
etc.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-109

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
Multiplier
The two operands (x1, x2) for each multiplier are selected via 2 indices of the parameter each:
Index i001 = x1, Index i002 = x2
Index i003 = x1, Index i004 = x2 [SW 1.8 and later]
Index i005 = x1, Index i006 = x2 [SW 1.8 and later]
x1 ∗ x 2
Formula: y =
100%
y is limited to -200.00 to +199.99% and applied to the connector stated.
U150 Operands for 1st multiplier (result = K9150) FB 50 All connector Ind: 6 P052 = 3
(2150) Operands for 5th multiplier (result = K9430) FB 290 numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* Operands for 9th multiplier (result = K9431) FB 291 1 Type: L2 off-line
S00
0 = Connector K0000
(B130) 1 = Connector K0001
etc.
U151 Operands for 2nd multiplier (result = K9151) FB 51 All connector Ind: 6 P052 = 3
(2151) Operands for 6th multiplier (result = K9432) FB 292 numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* Operands for 10th multiplier (result = K9433) FB 293 1 Type: L2 off-line
S00
0 = Connector K0000
(B130) 1 = Connector K0001
etc.
U152 Operands for 3rd multiplier (result = K9152) FB 52 All connector Ind: 6 P052 = 3
(2152) Operands for 7thmultiplier (result = K9434) FB 294 numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* Operands for 11th multiplier (result = K9435) FB 295 1 Type: L2 off-line
S00
0 = Connector K0000
(B130) 1 = Connector K0001
etc.
U153 Operands for 4th multiplier (result = K9153) FB 53 All connector Ind: 6 P052 = 3
(2153) Operands for 8the multiplier (result = K9436) FB 296 numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* Operands for 12th multiplier (result = K9437) FB 297 1 Type: L2 off-line
S00
0 = Connector K0000
(B130) 1 = Connector K0001
etc.

High-resolution multipliers/dividers
The three operands are selected via the three indices of the parameter, i.e. index i001 = x1, index i002 = x2, index i003 = x3
x 4 x1 ∗ x 2
Equations: x 4( 32 bit ) = x1 ∗ x 2 , y = = Applicable for division by 0 (x2=0):
x3 x3
When x1 > 0: y = +199.99%
When x1 = 0: y = 0.00%
When x1 < 0: y = -200.00%
y is limited to -200.00 to +199.99% and applied to the specified connector.
st
U155 Operands for 1 multiplier/divider (result = K9155) FB 55 All connector Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2155) numbers FS=1 P051 = 40
* 0 = connector K0000 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = connector K0001
(B131) etc.
nd
U156 Operands for 2 multiplier/divider (result = K9156) FB 56 All connector Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2156) numbers FS=1 P051 = 40
* 0 = connector K0000 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = connector K0001
(B131) etc.
rd
U157 Operands for 3 multiplier/divider (result = K9157) FB 57 All connector Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2157) numbers FS=1 P051 = 40
* 0 = connector K0000 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = connector K0001
(B131) etc.

Absolute-value generators with filtering

st
U160 Source for input quantity for 1 abs.-value generator with filter FB 60 All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
(2160) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = connector K0000 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = connector K0001
(B135) etc.

11-110 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
st
U161 Signal injection mode for 1 abs.-value generator with filter FB 60 0 to 3 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2161) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 Injection of signal with correct sign Type: O2 Offline
S00 1 Injection of absolute value of signal
(B135) 2 Injection of signal with sign, inverted
3 Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted
st
U162 Filter time for 1 abs.-value generator with filter FB 60 0 to 10000 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2162) [ms] FS=0 P051 = 40
S00 1 Type: O2 Offline
(B135)
nd
U163 Source for input quantity for 2 abs.-value generator with filter FB 61 All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
(2163) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = connector K0000 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = connector K0001
(B135) etc.
nd
U164 Signal injection mode for 2 abs.-value generator with filter FB 61 0 to 3 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2164) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 Injection of signal with correct sign Type: O2 Offline
S00 1 Injection of absolute value of signal
(B135) 2 Injection of signal with sign, inverted
3 Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted
nd
U165 Filter time for 2 abs.-value generator with filter FB 61 0 to 10000 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2165) [ms] FS=0 P051 = 40
S00 1 Type: O2 Offline
(B135)
rd
U166 Source for input quantity for 3 abs.-value generator with filter FB 62 All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
(2166) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = connector K0000 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = connector K0001
(B135) etc.
rd
U167 Signal injection mode for 3 abs.-value generator with filter FB 62 0 to 3 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2167) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 Injection of signal with correct sign Type: O2 Offline
S00 1 Injection of absolute value of signal
(B135) 2 Injection of signal with sign, inverted
3 Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted
rd
U168 Filter time for 3 abs.-value generator with filter FB 62 0 to 10000 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2168) [ms] FS=0 P051 = 40
S00 1 Type: O2 Offline
(B135)
th
U169 Source for input quantity for 4 abs.-value generator with filter FB 63 All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
(2169) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = connector K0000 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = connector K0001
(B135) etc.
th
U170 Signal injection mode for 4 abs.-value generator with filter FB 63 0 to 3 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2170) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 Injection of signal with correct sign Type: O2 Offline
S00 1 Injection of absolute value of signal
(B135) 2 Injection of signal with sign, inverted
3 Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted
th
U171 Filter time for 4 abs.-value generator with filter FB 63 0 to 10000 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2171) [ms] FS=0 P051 = 40
S00 1 Type: O2 Offline
(B135)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-111

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)

11.61 Processing of connectors

Only active with optional technology software S00
Averager [SW 1.8 and later]
U172 Source for input signal [SW 1.8 and later] All connector Ind: 4 P052 = 3
(2172) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* 1 Type: L2 off-line
S00 i001: 1st averager (FB 16)
i002: 2nd averager (FB 17)
(B139) i003: 3rd averager (FB 18)
i004: 4. averager (FB 19)
Settings:
0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
etc.
U173 Number of sampling cycles [SW 1.8 and later] 1 to 100 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
(2173) 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
Type: O2 on-line
S00 i001: 1st averager (FB 16)
(B139) i002: 2nd averager (FB 17)
i003: 3rd averager (FB 18)
i004: 4. averager (FB 19)

11.62 Limiters, limit-value monitors

Only active with optional technology software S00
Limiters
st
The input variable selected with index i001 or i004 of the 1 parameter is limited to the limit values selected with indices i002 and i003 or
i005 and i006 and applied to the specified connector. Violation of the limit values is signaled by means of two binectors.
U175 Source for input signal and limits for limiter 1 FB 65 All connector Ind: 6 P052 = 3
(2175) numbers FS= P051 = 40
* Output = connector K9167 1 i001: 0 Offline
S00 i001: Input signal i002: 9165
(B134) i002: Upper limiting value (L+) i003: 9166
(B135) i003: Lower limiting value (L-) i004: 0
i005: 9174
Source for input signal and limits for limiter 4 FB 212 i006: 9175
[SW2.0 and later] Type: L2
Output = connector K9176
i004: Input signal
i005: Upper limiting value (L+)
i006: Lower limiting value (L-)

Settings:
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
U176 Limit value for limiter FB 65, FB212 -199.99 to 199.99 Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2176) [%] FS=100.00 P051 = 40
i001: Applied to connector K9165 (FB 65) 0.01% Type: I2 Offline
S00 i002: Applied to connector K9174 (FB 212) [SW2.0 and later]
(B134)
(B135)

11-112 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
U177 Source for input signal and limits for limiter 2 FB 66 All connector Ind: 6 P052 = 3
(2177) numbers FS= P051 = 40
* Output = connector K9170 1 i001: 0 Offline
S00 i001: Input signal i002: 9168
(B134) i002: Upper limiting value (L+) i003: 9169
(B135) i003: Lower limiting value (L-) i004: 0
i005: 9177
Source for input signal and limits for limiter 5 FB 213 i006: 9178
[SW2.0 and later] Type: L2
Output = connector K9179
i004: Input signal
i005: Upper limiting value (L+)
i006: Lower limiting value (L-)
Settings:
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
U178 Limit value for limiter FB 66, FB213 -199.99 to 199.99 Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2178) [%] FS=100.00 P051 = 40
i001: Applied to connector K9168 (FB 66) 0.01% Type: I2 Offline
S00 i002: Applied to connector K9177 (FB 213) [SW2.0 and later]
(B134)
(B135)

U179 Source for input signal and limits for limiter 3 FB 67 All connector Ind: 6 P052 = 3
(2179) numbers FS= P051 = 40
* Output = connector K9173 1 i001: 0 Offline
S00 i001: Input signal i002: 9171
(B134) i002: Upper limiting value (L+) i003: 9172
(B135) i003: Lower limiting value (L-) i004: 0
i005: 9260
Source for input signal and limits for limiter 6 FB 214 i006: 9261
[SW2.0 and later] Type: L2
Output = connector K9262
i004: Input signal
i005: Upper limiting value (L+)
i006: Lower limiting value (L-)
Settings:
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
U180 Limit value for limiter FB 67, FB214 -199.99 to 199.99 Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2180) [%] FS=100.00 P051 = 40
i001: Applied to connector K9171 (FB 67) 0.01% Type: I2 Offline
S00 i002: Applied to connector K9260 (FB 214) [SW2.0 and later]
(B134)
(B135)

Limit-value monitors for double word connectors

U181 Source for input signal (A) and operating threshold (B) All connector Ind: 4 P052 = 3
st
(2181) for 1 limit-value monitor for double word connectors FB 68 numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
nd
* for 2 limit-value monitor for double word connectors FB 69 1 Type: L2 off-line
S00 [SW 1.9 and later]
st
(B151) i001: Input signal for 1 limit-value monitor
st
i002: Operating threshold for 1 limit-value monitor
nd
i003: Input signal for 2 limit-value monitor
nd
i004: Operating threshold for 2 limit-value monitor
Settings:
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
st
U182 Hysteresis for 1 limit-value monitor for double word connectors FB 68 0.00 to 100.00 Ind: 2 P052 = 3
nd
(2182) Hysteresis for 2 limit-value monitor for double word connectors FB69 [%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
[SW 1.9 and later] 0.01% Type: O2 off-line
S00
st
(B151) i001: Hysteresis for 1 limit-value monitor
nd
i002: Hysteresis for 2 limit-value monitor
The hysteresis relates to the HIGH word of the double word connector

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-113

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
Limit-value monitors with filtering
U185 Source for input signal (A) and operating point (B) for FB 70 All connector Ind: 2 P052 = 3
st
(2185) 1 limit-value monitor with filtering numbers FS= P051 = 40
* 1 i001: 0 Offline
S00 i001: Input signal i002: 9181
(B136) i002: Operating point Type: L2
Settings:
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
U186 Settable operating point for limit-value monitor FB 70 -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2186) [%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
Applied to connector K9181 0.01% Type: I2 Offline
S00
(B136)
st
U187 Filter time for 1 limit-value monitor with filtering FB 70 0 to 10000 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2187) [ms] FS=0 P051 = 40
S00 1 Type: O2 Offline
(B136)
st
U188 Hysteresis for 1 limit-value monitor with filtering FB 70 0.00 to 100.00 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2188) [%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
S00 0.01% Type: O2 Offline
(B136)

U189 Source for input signal (A) and operating point (B) for FB 71 All connector Ind: 2 P052 = 3
nd
(2189) 2 limit-value monitor with filtering numbers FS= P051 = 40
* 1 i001: 0 Offline
S00 i001: Input signal i002: 9183
(B136) i002: Operating point Type: L2
Settings:
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
U190 Settable operating point for limit-value monitor FB 71 -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2190) [%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
Applied to connector K9183 0.01% Type: I2 Offline
S00
(B136)
nd
U191 Filter time for 2 limit-value monitor with filtering FB 71 0 to 10000 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2191) [ms] FS=0 P051 = 40
S00 1 Type: O2 Offline
(B136)
nd
U192 Hysteresis for 2 limit-value monitor with filtering FB 71 0.00 to 100.00 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2192) [%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
S00 0.01% Type: O2 Offline
(B136)

U193 Source for input signal (A) and operating point (B) for FB 72 All connector Ind: 2 P052 = 3
rd
(2193) 3 limit-value monitor with filtering numbers FS= P051 = 40
* 1 i001: 0 Offline
S00 i001: Input signal i002: 9185
(B136) i002: Operating point Type: L2
Settings:
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
U194 Settable operating point for limit-value monitor FB 72 -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2194) [%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
Applied to connector K9185 0.01% Type: I2 Offline
S00
(B136)
rd
U195 Filter time for 3 limit-value monitor with filtering FB 72 0 to 10000 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2195) [ms] FS=0 P051 = 40
S00 1 Type: O2 Offline
(B136)
rd
U196 Hysteresis for 3 limit-value monitor with filtering FB 72 0.00 to 100.00 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2196) [%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
S00 0.01% Type: O2 Offline
(B136)

11-114 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
Limit-value monitors without filtering
U197 Source for input signal (A) and operating point (B) for FB 73 All connector Ind: 2 P052 = 3
st
(2197) 1 limit-value monitor without filtering numbers FS= P051 = 40
* 1 i001: 0 Offline
S00 i001: Input signal i002: 9186
(B137) i002: Operating point Type: L2
Settings:
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
U198 Settable operating point for limit-value monitor FB 73 -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2198) [%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
Applied to connector K9186 0.01% Type: I2 Offline
S00
(B137)
st
U199 Hysteresis for 1 limit-value monitor without filtering FB 73 0.00 to 100.00 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2199) [%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
S00 0.01% Type: O2 Offline
(B137)

U200 Source for input signal (A) and operating point (B) for FB 74 All connector Ind: 2 P052 = 3
nd
(2200) 2 limit-value monitor without filtering numbers FS= P051 = 40
* 1 i001: 0 Offline
S00 i001: Input signal i002: 9187
(B137) i002: Operating point Type: L2
Settings:
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
U201 Settable operating point for limit-value monitor FB 74 -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2201) [%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
Applied to connector K9187 0.01% Type: I2 Offline
S00
(B137)
nd
U202 Hysteresis for 2 limit-value monitor without filtering FB 74 0.00 to 100.00 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2202) [%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
S00 0.01% Type: O2 Offline
(B137)

U203 Source for input signal (A) and operating point (B) for FB 75 All connector Ind: 2 P052 = 3
rd
(2203) 3 limit-value monitor without filtering numbers FS= P051 = 40
* 1 i001: 0 Offline
S00 i001: Input signal i002: 9188
(B137) i002: Operating point Type: L2
Settings:
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
U204 Settable operating point for limit-value monitor FB 75 -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2204) [%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
Applied to connector K9188 0.01% Type: I2 Offline
S00
(B137)
rd
U205 Hysteresis for 3 limit-value monitor without filtering FB 75 0.00 to 100.00 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2205) [%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
S00 0.01% Type: O2 Offline
(B137)

U206 Source for input signal (A) and operating point (B) for FB 76 All connector Ind: 2 P052 = 3
th
(2206) 4 limit-value monitor without filtering numbers FS= P051 = 40
* 1 i001: 0 Offline
S00 i001: Input signal i002: 9189
(B137) i002: Operating point Type: L2
Settings:
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
U207 Settable operating point for limit-value monitor FB 76 -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2207) [%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
S00 Applied to connector K9189 0.01% Type: I2 Offline
(B137)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-115

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
th
U208 Hysteresis for 4 limit-value monitor without filtering FB 76 0.00 to 100.00 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2208) [%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
S00 0.01% Type: O2 Offline
(B137)

U210 Source for input signal (A) and operating point (B) for FB 77 All connector Ind: 2 P052 = 3
th
(2210) 5 limit-value monitor without filtering numbers FS= P051 = 40
* 1 i001: 0 Offline
S00 i001: Input signal i002: 9190
(B138) i002: Operating point Type: L2
Settings:
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
U211 Settable operating point for limit-value monitor FB 77 -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2211) [%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
Applied to connector K9190 0.01% Type: I2 Offline
S00
(B138)
th
U212 Hysteresis for 5 limit-value monitor without filtering FB 77 0.00 to 100.00 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2212) [%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
S00 0.01% Type: O2 Offline
(B138)

U213 Source for input signal (A) and operating point (B) for FB 78 All connector Ind: 2 P052 = 3
th
(2213) 6 limit-value monitor without filtering numbers FS= P051 = 40
* 1 i001: 0 Offline
S00 i001: Input signal i002: 9191
(B138) i002: Operating point Type: L2
Settings:
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
U214 Settable operating point for limit-value monitor FB 78 -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2214) [%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
Applied to connector K9191 0.01% Type: I2 Offline
S00
(B138)
th
U215 Hysteresis for 6 limit-value monitor without filtering FB 78 0.00 to 100.00 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2215) [%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
S00 0.01% Type: O2 Offline
(B138)

U216 Source for input signal (A) and operating point (B) for FB 79 All connector Ind: 2 P052 = 3
th
(2216) 7 limit-value monitor without filtering numbers FS= P051 = 40
* 1 i001: 0 Offline
S00 i001: Input signal i002: 9192
(B138) i002: Operating point Type: L2
Settings:
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
U217 Settable operating point for limit-value monitor FB 79 -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2217) [%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
Applied to connector K9192 0.01% Type: I2 Offline
S00
(B138)
th
U218 Hysteresis for 7 limit-value monitor without filtering FB 79 0.00 to 100.00 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2218) [%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
S00 0.01% Type: O2 Offline
(B138)

11-116 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)

11.63 Processing of connectors

Only active with optional technology software S00
Maximum selection FB 80, FB 174, FB 175, FB 176
The largest of the input values selected by 3 indices each of the parameter (x1, x2, x3) is applied to the output.
U220 Source for maximum selection All connector Ind: 12 P052 = 3
(2220) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = Connector K0000 1 Type: L2 off-line
S00 1 = Connector K0001
etc.
(B140)
i001: x1 Maximum selection 1 (FB 80, Output = K9193)
i002: x2 Maximum selection 1
i003: x3 Maximum selection 1
SW 1.8 and later:
i004: x1 Maximum selection 2 (FB 174, Output = K9460)
i005: x2 Maximum selection 2
i006: x3 Maximum selection 2
i007: x1 Maximum selection 3 (FB 175, Output = K9461)
i008: x2 Maximum selection 3
i009: x3 Maximum selection 3
i010: x1 Maximum selection 4 (FB 176, Output = K9462)
i011: x2 Maximum selection 4
i012: x3 Maximum selection 4

Minimum selection FB 81, FB 177, FB 178, FB 179

The smallest of the input values selected by 3 indices each of the parameter (x1, x2, x3) is applied to the output.
U221 Source for minimum selection All connector Ind: 12 P052 = 3
(2221) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = Connector K0000 1 Type: L2 off-line
S00 1 = Connector K0001
etc.
(B140)
i001: x1 Minimum selection 1 (FB 81, Output = K9194)
i002: x2 Minimum selection 1
i003: x3 Minimum selection 1
SW 1.8 and later:
i004: x1 Minimum selection 2 (FB 177, Output = K9463)
i005: x2 Minimum selection 2
i006: x3 Minimum selection 2
i007: x1 Minimum selection 3 (FB 178, Output = K9464)
i008: x2 Minimum selection 3
i009: x3 Minimum selection 3
i010: x1 Minimum selection 4 (FB 179, Output = K9465)
i011: x2 Minimum selection 4
i012: x3 Minimum selection 4

Tracking/storage elements
The tracking/storage elements are storage elements for the parameterized input quantity. The outputs are linked to connectors.
Transfer of the input quantity is controlled via the RESET, TRACK and STORE functions:
RESET: When the controlling binector reaches log. "1", the output is set to 0.00% (y=0)
TRACK: When the controlling binector reaches log. "1", the output is set to the input value and then tracks it continuously (y=x). If the
TRACK signal switches from "1" to "0", the last value applied to the y output is "frozen"
STORE: With a "0" to "1" transition of the controlling binector signal, the output is permanently set to the current input value (y=x). This
value then remains stored
Priority 1. RESET, 2. TRACK, 3. STORE
Tracking/storage element 1
U222 Source for input quantity (x) FB 82 All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
(2222) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = connector K0000 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = connector K0001
(B145) etc.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-117

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
U223 Source for control signals RESET, TRACK and STORE FB 82 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2223) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* i001: TRACK Type: L2 Offline
S00 i002: STORE
i003: RESET
(B145) Settings:
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
U224 Control word for Power On Mode FB 82 0 to 1 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2224) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 Volatile storage: Type: O2 Offline
S00 Zero appears at output when voltage recovers
1 Non-volatile storage:
(B145) When the voltage is disconnected or fails, the current output
value is stored and then output when the voltage recovers/is
reconnected

Tracking/storage element 2
U225 Source for input quantity (x) FB 83 All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
(2225) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = connector K0000 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = connector K0001
(B145) etc.
U226 Source for control signals RESET, TRACK and STORE FB 83 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2226) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* i001: TRACK Type: L2 Offline
S00 i002: STORE
i003: RESET
(B145) Settings:
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
U227 Control word for Power On Mode FB 83 0 to 1 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2227) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 Volatile storage: Type: O2 Offline
S00 Zero appears at output when voltage recovers
1 Non-volatile storage:
(B145) When the voltage is disconnected or fails, the current output
value is stored and then output when the voltage recovers/is
reconnected

Connector memories
The connector memories are memory elements for the input quantities selected via the parameters. The outputs are linked to connectors.
While the SET input is in the log. "1" state, output quantity y tracks input quantity x continuously. If the SET input changes state from log.
"1" to log. "0", the current value of x is stored and output continuously at y.
Output (y) = 0 is set on POWER ON.
Connector memory 1
U228 Source for input quantity (x) FB 84 All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
(2228) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = connector K0000 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = connector K0001
(B145) etc.
U229 Source for control signal SET FB 84 All binector numbers Ind: None P052 = 3
(2229) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = binector B0000 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = binector B0001
(B145) etc.

Connector memory 2
U230 Source for input quantity (x) FB 85 All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
(2230) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = connector K0000 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = connector K0001
(B145) etc.
U231 Source for control signal SET FB 85 All binector numbers Ind: None P052 = 3
(2231) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = binector B0000 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = binector B0001
(B145) etc.

11-118 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)

Connector changeover switches

Depending on the state of the control signal, one of the two input quantities is applied to the output (connector):
Control signal = 0:The input quantity selected in index i001 is applied to the output
Control signal = 1: The input quantity selected in index i002 is applied to the output
Connector changeover switch 1 (output = K9210)
U240 Source for input quantities FB 90 All connector Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2240) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = connector K0000 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = connector K0001
(B150) etc.

U241 Source for control signal FB 90 All binector numbers Ind: None P052 = 3
(2241) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = binector B0000 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = binector B0001
(B150) etc.

Connector changeover switch 2 (output = K9211)

U242 Source for input quantities FB 91 All connector Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2242) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = connector K0000 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = connector K0001
(B150) etc.

U243 Source for control signal FB 91 All binector numbers Ind: None P052 = 3
(2243) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = binector B0000 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = binector B0001
(B150) etc.

Connector changeover switch 3 (output = K9212)

U244 Source for input quantities FB 92 All connector Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2244) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = connector K0000 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = connector K0001
(B150) etc.

U245 Source for control signal FB 92 All binector numbers Ind: None P052 = 3
(2245) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = binector B0000 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = binector B0001
(B150) etc.

Connector changeover switch 4 (output = K9213)

U246 Source for input quantities FB 93 All connector Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2246) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = connector K0000 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = connector K0001
(B150) etc.
U247 Source for control signal FB 93 All binector numbers Ind: None P052 = 3
(2247) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = binector B0000 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = binector B0001
(B150) etc.

Connector changeover switch 5 (output = K9214)

U248 Source for input quantities FB 94 All connector Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2248) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = connector K0000 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = connector K0001
(B150) etc.
U249 Source for control signal FB 94 All binector numbers Ind: None P052 = 3
(2249) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = binector B0000 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = binector B0001
(B150) etc.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-119

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
Connector changeover switches 6 and 11
U250 Source for input quantities FB 95 and FB 196 All connector Ind: 4 P052 = 3
(2250) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* Output 6 = Connector K9215 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 i001: 1st input signal
(B150) i002: 2nd input signal
Output 11 = Connector K9265 [SW2.0 and later]
i003: 1st input signal
i004: 2nd input signal
Settings:
0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
etc.
U251 Source for control signal FB 95 and FB 196 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2251) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* i001: Switchover for output 6 Type: L2 Offline
S00 i002: Switchover for output 11 [SW2.0 and later]
(B150) Settings:
0 = Binector B0000
1 = Binector B0001
etc.

Connector changeover switches 7 and 12

U252 Source for input quantities FB 96 and FB 197 All connector Ind: 4 P052 = 3
(2252) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* Output 7 = Connector K9216 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 i001: 1st input signal
(B150) i002: 2nd input signal
Output 12 = Connector K9266 [SW2.0 and later]
i003: 1st input signal
i004: 2nd input signal
Settings:
0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
etc.
U253 Source for control signal FB 96 and FB 197 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2253) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* i001: Switchover for output 7 Type: L2 Offline
S00 i002: Switchover for output 12 [SW2.0 and later]
(B150) Settings:
0 = Binector B0000
1 = Binector B0001
etc.

Connector changeover switches 8 and 13

U254 Source for input quantities FB 97 and FB 198 All connector Ind: 4 P052 = 3
(2254) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* Output 8 = Connector K9217 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 i001: 1st input signal
(B150) i002: 2nd input signal
Output 13 = Connector K9267 [SW2.0 and later]
i003: 1st input signal
i004: 2nd input signal
Settings:
0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
etc.
U255 Source for control signal FB 97 and FB 198 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2255) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* i001: Switchover for output 8 Type: L2 Offline
S00 i002: Switchover for output 13 [SW2.0 and later]
(B150) Settings:
0 = Binector B0000
1 = Binector B0001
etc.

11-120 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
Connector changeover switches 9 and 14
U256 Source for input quantities FB 98 and FB 199 All connector Ind: 4 P052 = 3
(2256) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* Output 9 = Connector K9218 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 i001: 1st input signal
(B150) i002: 2nd input signal
Output 14 = Connector K9268 [SW2.0 and later]
i003: 1st input signal
i004: 2nd input signal
Settings:
0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
etc.
U257 Source for control signal FB 98 and FB 199 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2257) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* i001: Switchover for output 9 Type: L2 Offline
S00 i002: Switchover for output 14 [SW2.0 and later]
(B150) Settings:
0 = Binector B0000
1 = Binector B0001
etc.

Connector changeover switches 10 and 15

U258 Source for input quantities FB 99 and FB 229 All connector Ind: 4 P052 = 3
(2258) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* Output 10 = Connector K9219 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 i001: 1st input signal
(B150) i002: 2nd input signal
Output 15 = Connector K9269 [SW2.0 and later]
i003: 1st input signal
i004: 2nd input signal
Settings:
0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
etc.
U259 Source for control signal FB 99 and FB 229 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2259) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* i001: Switchover for output 10 Type: L2 Offline
S00 i002: Switchover for output 15 [SW2.0 and later]
(B150) Settings:
0 = Binector B0000
1 = Binector B0001
etc.

11.64 Integrators, DT1 elements, characteristics, dead zones, setpoint branching

Only active with optional technology software S00

Integrator 1 (output = K9220)

U260 Source for input quantity FB 100 All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
(2260) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = connector K0000 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = connector K0001
(B155) etc.
U261 Integral-action time FB 100 10 to 65000 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2261) [ms] FS=10 P051 = 40
S00 1 Type: O2 Online
(B155)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-121

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
U262 Source for control signals FB 100 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2262) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* i001 Source for "Stop integrator" signal Type: L2 Offline
S00 (integrator is stopped when binector reaches log. "1" state)
i002 Source for "Set integrator" signal
(B155) (when binector reaches log. "1" state, the integrator is set to the
value entered in parameter U263)
Settings:
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
U263 Source for setting value FB 100 All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
(2263) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = connector K0000 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = connector K0001
(B155) etc.

Integrator 2 (output = K9221)

U264 Source for input quantity FB 101 All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
(2264) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = connector K0000 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = connector K0001
(B155) etc.
U265 Integral-action time FB 101 10 to 65000 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2265) [ms] FS=10 P051 = 40
S00 1 Type: O2 Online
(B155)
U266 Source for control signals FB 101 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2266) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* i001 Source for "Stop integrator" signal Type: L2 Offline
S00 (integrator is stopped when binector reaches log. "1" state)
i002 Source for "Set integrator" signal
(B155) (when binector reaches log. "1" state, the integrator is set to the
value entered in parameter U267)
Settings:
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
U267 Source for setting value FB 101 All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
(2267) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = connector K0000 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = connector K0001
(B155) etc.

Integrator 3 (output = K9222)

U268 Source for input quantity FB 102 All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
(2268) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = connector K0000 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = connector K0001
(B155) etc.
U269 Integral-action time FB 102 10 to 65000 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2269) [ms] FS=10 P051 = 40
S00 1 Type: O2 Online
(B155)
U270 Source for control signals FB 102 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2270) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* i001 Source for "Stop integrator" signal Type: L2 Offline
S00 (integrator is stopped when binector reaches log. "1" state)
i002 Source for "Set integrator" signal
(B155) (when binector reaches log. "1" state, the integrator is set to the
value entered in parameter U271)
Settings:
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

11-122 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
U271 Source for setting value FB 102 All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
(2271) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = connector K0000 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = connector K0001
(B155) etc.

DT1 element 1 (output = K9223, inverted: K9224)

U272 Source for input quantity FB 103 All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
(2272) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = connector K0000 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = connector K0001
(B155) etc.
U273 Derivative-action time FB 103 0 to 1000 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2273) [ms] FS=0 P051 = 40
S00 1 Type: O2 Online
(B155)
U274 Filter time FB 103 0 to 1000 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2274) [ms] FS=0 P051 = 40
S00 1 Type: O2 Online
(B155)

DT1 element 2 (output = K9225, inverted: K9226)

U275 Source for input quantity FB 104 All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
(2275) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = connector K0000 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = connector K0001
(B155) etc.
U276 Derivative-action time FB 104 0 to 1000 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2276) [ms] FS=0 P051 = 40
S00 1 Type: O2 Online
(B155)
U277 Filter time FB 104 0 to 1000 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2277) [ms] FS=0 P051 = 40
S00 1 Type: O2 Online
(B155)

DT1 element 3 (output = K9227, inverted: K9228)

U278 Source for input quantity FB 105 All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
(2278) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = connector K0000 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = connector K0001
(B155) etc.
U279 Derivative-action time FB 105 0 to 1000 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2279) [ms] FS=0 P051 = 40
S00 1 Type: O2 Online
(B155)
U280 Filter time FB 105 0 to 1000 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2280) [ms] FS=0 P051 = 40
S00 1 Type: O2 Online
(B155)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-123

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
Characteristic blocks
The curve of the characteristics can be defined by 10 points each:
Index i001 to i010 of the parameters for the x values (U282, U285, U288): x values for FB 106, FB 107, FB 108
Index i001 to i010 of the parameters for the y values (U283, U286, U289): associated y values
SW1.8 and later:
Index i011 to i020 of the parameters for the x values (U282, U285, U288): x values for FB 280, FB 282, FB 284
Index i011 to i020 of the parameters for the y values (U283, U286, U289): associated y values
Index i021 to i030 of the parameters for the x values (U282, U285, U288): x values for FB 281, FB 283, FB 285
Index i021 to i030 of the parameters for the y values (U283, U286, U289): associated y values
for x = -200.00% up to x value acc. to index i001 (or i011 or i021) of the parameter for the x values gilt:
y = value acc. to index i001 (or i011 or i021) of the parameter for the y values
for x = x value acc. to index i010 (or i020 or i030) of the parameter for the x values to x = 200.00% gilt:
y = value acc. to index i010 (or i020 or i030) of the parameter for the y values
The distance between two adjacent x or y values must not be more than 199.99% otherwise deviations from the required shape of the
characteristic can
Characteristic block 1 (output = K9229) FB 106
Characteristic block 4 (output = K9410) [SW1.8 and later] FB 280
Characteristic block 5 (output = K9411) [SW1.8 and later] FB 281
U281 Source for input quantity All connector Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2281) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = Connector K0000 1 Type: L2 off-line
S00 1 = Connector K0001
etc.
(B160) Up to SW 1.7:
Selected connector = input quantity for FB106

SW 1.8 and later:

i001 Input quantity for FB106
i002 Input quantity for FB280
i003 Input quantity for FB281
U282 x values -200.00 to 199.99 Ind:30 P052 = 3
(2282) [%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
i001 1st characteristic point for FB106 0.01 Type: I2 on-line
S00 i002 2nd characteristic point for FB106
...
(B160) i010 10th characteristic point for FB106
SW 1.8 and later:
i011 1st characteristic point for FB280
i012 2nd characteristic point for FB280
...
i020 10th characteristic point for FB280

i021 1st characteristic point for FB281

i022 2nd characteristic point for FB281
...
i030 10th characteristic point for FB281
U283 y values -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: 30 P052 = 3
(2283) [%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
i001 1st characteristic point for FB106 0.01 Type: I2 on-line
S00 i002 2nd characteristic point for FB106
...
(B160) i010 10th characteristic point for FB106
SW 1.8 and later:
i011 1st characteristic point for FB280
i012 2nd characteristic point for FB280
...
i020 10th characteristic point for FB280

i021 1st characteristic point for FB281

i022 2nd characteristic point for FB281
...
i030 10th characteristic point for FB281

11-124 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
Characteristic block 2 (output = K9230) FB 107
Characteristic block 6 (output = K9412) [SW1.8 and later] FB 282
Characteristic block 7 (output = K9413) [SW1.8 and later] FB 283
U284 Source for input quantity All connector Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2284) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = Connector K0000 1 Type: L2 off-line
S00 1 = Connector K0001
etc.
(B160) up to SW 1.7:
Selected connector = input quantity for FB107

SW 1.8 and later:

i001 input quantity for FB107
i002 input quantity for FB282
i003 input quantity for FB283
U285 x values -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: 30 P052 = 3
(2285) [%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
i001 1st characteristic point for FB107 0.01 Type: I2 on-line
S00 i002 2nd characteristic point for FB107
...
(B160) i010 10th characteristic point for FB107
SW 1.8 and later:
i011 1st characteristic point for FB282
i012 2nd characteristic point for FB282
...
i020 10th characteristic point for FB282

i021 1st characteristic point for FB283

i022 2nd characteristic point for FB283
...
i030 10th characteristic point for FB283
U286 y values -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: 30 P052 = 3
(2286) [%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
i001 1st characteristic point for FB107 0.01 Type: I2 on-line
S00 i002 2nd characteristic point for FB107
...
(B160) i010 10th characteristic point for FB107
SW 1.8 and later:
i011 1st characteristic point for FB282
i012 2nd characteristic point for FB282
...
i020 10th characteristic point for FB282

i021 1st characteristic point for FB283

i022 2nd characteristic point for FB283
...
i030 10th characteristic point for FB283

Characteristic block 3 (Output = K9231) FB 108

Characteristic block 8 (Output = K9414) [SW1.8 and later] FB 284
Characteristic block 9 (Output = K9415) [SW1.8 and later] FB 285
U287 Source for input quantity All connector Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2287) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = Connector K0000 1 Type: L2 off-line
S00 1 = Connector K0001
etc.
(B160) up to SW 1.7:
Selected connector = input quantity for FB108

SW 1.8 and later:

i001 Input quantity for FB108
i002 Input quantity for FB284
i003 Input quantity for FB285

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-125

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
U288 x values -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: 30 P052 = 3
(2288) [%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
i001 1st characteristic point for FB108 0.01 Type: I2 on-line
S00 i002 2nd characteristic point for FB108
...
(B160) i010 10th characteristic point for FB108
SW 1.8 and later:
i011 1st characteristic point for FB284
i012 2nd characteristic point for FB284
...
i020 10th characteristic point for FB284

i021 1st characteristic point for FB285

i022 2nd characteristic point for FB285
...
i030 10th characteristic point for FB285
U289 y values -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: 30 P052 = 3
(2289) [%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
i001 1st characteristic point for FB108 0.01 Type: I2 on-line
S00 i002 2nd characteristic point for FB108
...
(B160) i010 10th characteristic point for FB108
SW 1.8 and later:
i011 1st characteristic point for FB284
i012 2nd characteristic point for FB284
...
i020 10th characteristic point for FB284

i021 1st characteristic point for FB285

i022 2nd characteristic point for FB285
...
i030 10th characteristic point for FB285

Dead zones
The component of the input quantity (x) whose absolute value exceeds the threshold for the dead zone is applied to the output (y).
Dead zone 1 (output = K9232)
U290 Source for input quantity FB 109 All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
(2290) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = connector K0000 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = connector K0001
(B161) etc.
U291 Dead zone FB 109 0.00 to 100.00 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2291) [%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
S00 0.01 Type: O2 Online
(B161)

Dead zone 2 (output = K9233)

U292 Source for input quantity FB 110 All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
(2292) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = connector K0000 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = connector K0001
(B161) etc.
U293 Dead zone FB 110 0.00 to 100.00 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2293) [%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
S00 0.01 Type: O2 Online
(B161)

Dead zone 3 (output = K9234)

U294 Source for input quantity FB 111 All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
(2294) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = connector K0000 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = connector K0001
(B161) etc.
U295 Dead zone FB 111 0.00 to 100.00 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2295) [%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
S00 0.01 Type: O2 Online
(B161)

11-126 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
Setpoint branching (output = K9234)
The input quantity is weighted with 2 parameters:
Parameter U297 determines the output value with an input = 0%
Parameter U298 determines the output value with an input = +100%
-U297 and -U298 apply in the case of negative input values.
The hysteresis set in parameter U299 is applied for transitions from negative to positive input values and vice versa
U296 Source for input quantity FB 112 All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
(2296) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = connector K0000 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = connector K0001
(B161) etc.
U297 Minimum speed FB 112 0.00 to 199.99 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2297) [%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
S00 0.01 Type: O2 Online
(B161)
U298 Maximum speed FB 112 0.00 to 199.99 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2298) [%] FS=100.00 P051 = 40
S00 0.01 Type: O2 Online
(B161)
U299 Hysteresis FB 112 0.00 to 100.00 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2299) [%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
S00 0.01 Type: O2 Online
(B161)

11.65 Simple ramp-function generator

Only active with optional technology software S00
Please note: The output (y) = 0 is set in response to "Set simple ramp-function generator to zero" and POWER ON
The output (y) is frozen at the current value in response to "Stop simple ramp-function generator"
The ramp-up and ramp-down times are set to zero in response to "Bypass simple ramp-function generator"

Ramp-up integrator:
The simple ramp-function generator contains a flip-flop whose output is set to log. "0" (ramp generator initial run) after POWER
ON or when the ramp-function generator has been enabled. When the ramp-function generator output reaches a value
corresponding to the input quantity (y=x) for the first time, the flip-flop output switches to log. "1" and remains in this state until
the next enabling command. This output is linked to binector B9191. By parameterizing U301, index i001=919, it is possible to
apply this binector to the "Bypass simple ramp-function generator" function and thus to implement a ramp-up integrator
function.
U300 Source for input quantity FB 113 All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
(2300) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = connector K0000 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = connector K0001
(B165) etc.
U301 Source for control signals FB 113 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2301) 1 FS= P051 = 40
* i001 Source for "Bypass simple ramp-function generator" signal i001: 0 Offline
S00 i002 Source for "Stop simple ramp-function generator" signal i002: 0
(B165) i003 Source for "Reset / enable simple ramp-function generator" i003: 1
signal Type: L2
(0 = reset to zero, 1 = enable)
Settings:
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
U302 Ramp-up time FB 113 0.00 to 300.00 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2302) [s] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
S00 0.01 Type: O2 Online
(B165)
U303 Ramp-down time FB 113 0.00 to 300.00 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2303) [s] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
S00 0.01 Type: O2 Online
(B165)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-127

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)

11.66 Multiplexer
Only active with optional technology software S00
FB86 = 1st multiplexer (output = K9450)
FB87 = 2nd multiplexer (output = K9451)
FB88 = 3rd multiplexer (output = K9452)

Function:
An input quantity is connected through to the output depending on the control bits:
B3 B2 B1 Output y
0 0 0 X0
0 0 1 X1
0 1 0 X2
0 1 1 X3
1 0 0 X4
1 0 1 X5
1 1 0 X6
1 1 1 X7
U310 Source for control bits for the multiplexer [SW 1.8 and later] All binector numbers Ind: 9 P052 = 3
(2310) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = Binector B0000 Type: L2 off-line
S00 1 = Binector B0001
etc.
(B195) i001: Control bit B1 for 1st multiplexer
i002: Control bit B2
i003: Control bit B3
i004: Control bit B1 for 2nd multiplexer
i005: Control bit B2
i006: Control bit B3
i007: Control bit B1 for 3rd multiplexer
i008: Control bit B2
i009: Control bit B3
U311 Source for input quantities for 1st multiplexer [SW 1.8 and later] All connector Ind: 8 P052 = 3
(2311) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = Connector K0000 1 Type: L2 off-line
S00 1 = Connector K0001
etc.
(B195) i001 Input quantity X0
i002 Input quantity X1
i003 Input quantity X2
i004 Input quantity X3
i005 Input quantity X4
i006 Input quantity X5
i007 Input quantity X6
i008 Input quantity X7
U312 Source for input quantities for 2nd multiplexer [SW 1.8 and later] All connector Ind: 8 P052 = 3
(2312) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = Connector K0000 1 Type: L2 off-line
S00 1 = Connector K0001
etc.
(B195) i001 Input quantity X0
i002 Input quantity X1
i003 Input quantity X2
i004 Input quantity X3
i005 Input quantity X4
i006 Input quantity X5
i007 Input quantity X6
i008 Input quantity X7

11-128 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
U313 Source for input quantities for 3rd multiplexer [SW 1.8 and later] All connector Ind: 8 P052 = 3
(2313) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = Connector K0000 1 Type: L2 off-line
S00 1 = Connector K0001
etc.
(B195) i001 Input quantity X0
i002 Input quantity X1
i003 Input quantity X2
i004 Input quantity X3
i005 Input quantity X4
i006 Input quantity X5
i007 Input quantity X6
i008 Input quantity X7

11.67 Counters
Only active with optional technology software S00

Software counter FB 89
n314 Display of output of software counter FB 89 0 to 65535 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2314) [SW 1.9 and later] Type: O2
S00
(B196)
U315 Fixed values for setting/limiting inputs of software counter FB 89 0 to 65535 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
(2315) [SW 1.9 and later] 1 FS= P051 = 40
* i001: 0 off-line
S00 i001: Minimum value i002: 65535
i002: Maximum value i003: 0
(B196) i003: Setting value i004: 0
i004: Start value Type: O2
U316 Source for setting/limiting inputs of software counter FB 89 All connector Ind: 4 P052 = 3
(2316) [SW 1.9 and later] numbers FS= P051 = 40
* 1 i001: 9441 off-line
S00 i001: Minimum value i002: 9442
i002: Maximum value i003: 9443
(B196) i003: Setting value i004: 9444
i004: Start value Type: L2
Settings:
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
U317 Source for control signals of software counter FB 89 All binector numbers Ind: 5 P052 = 3
(2317) [SW 1.9 and later] 1 FS= P051 = 40
* i001: 0 off-line
S00 i001: Positive edge: Count up i002: 0
i002: Positive edge: Count down i003: 0
(B196) i003: Stop counter i004: 0
i004: Set counter i005: 1
i005: Enable counter Type: L2
Settings:
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-129

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)

11.68 Logic functions

Only active with optional technology software S00

Decoders/demultiplexers, binary to 1 of 8
U318 Source for input signals for decoder/demultiplexer 1 FB 118 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2318) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* i001 Source for input signal, bit 0 Type: L2 Offline
S00 i002 Source for input signal, bit 1
i003 Source for input signal, bit 2
(B200) Settings:
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
U319 Source for input signals for decoder/demultiplexer 2 FB 119 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2319) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* i001 Source for input signal, bit 0 Type: L2 Offline
S00 i002 Source for input signal, bit 1
i003 Source for input signal, bit 2
(B200) Settings:
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

AND elements with 3 inputs each

The input signals selected via the 3 indices of the parameter are ANDed and the result of the logic operation applied to the specified
binector.
U320 Source for input signals, AND element 1 (output = B9350) FB 120 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2320) 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
* i001 Source for input 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 i002 Source for input 2
(B205) i003 Source for input 3
Settings:
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
U321 Source for input signals, AND element 2 (output = B9351) FB 121 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2321) 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
* As for U320 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B205)
U322 Source for input signals, AND element 3 (output = B9352) FB 122 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2322) 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
* As for U320 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B205)
U323 Source for input signals, AND element 4 (output = B9353) FB 123 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2323) 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
* As for U320 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B205)
U324 Source for input signals, AND element 5 (output = B9354) FB 124 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2324) 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
* As for U320 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B205)
U325 Source for input signals, AND element 6 (output = B9355) FB 125 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2325) 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
* As for U320 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B205)
U326 Source for input signals, AND element 7 (output = B9356) FB 126 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2326) 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
* As for U320 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B205)

11-130 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
U327 Source for input signals, AND element 8 (output = B9357) FB 127 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2327) 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
* As for U320 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B205)
U328 Source for input signals, AND element 9 (output = B9358) FB 128 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2328) 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
* As for U320 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B205)
U329 Source for input signals, AND element 10 (output = B9359) FB 129 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2329) 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
* As for U320 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B205)
U330 Source for input signals, AND element 11 (output = B9360) FB 130 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2330) 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
* As for U320 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B205)
U331 Source for input signals, AND element 12 (output = B9361) FB 131 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2331) 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
* As for U320 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B205)
U332 Source for input signals, AND element 13 (output = B9362) FB 132 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2332) 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
* As for U320 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B205)
U333 Source for input signals, AND element 14 (output = B9363) FB 133 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2333) 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
* As for U320 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B205)
U334 Source for input signals, AND element 15 (output = B9364) FB 134 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2334) 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
* As for U320 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B205)
U335 Source for input signals, AND element 16 (output = B9365) FB 135 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2335) 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
* As for U320 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B205)
U336 Source for input signals, AND element 17 (output = B9366) FB 136 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2336) 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
* As for U320 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B205)
U337 Source for input signals, AND element 18 (output = B9367) FB 137 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2337) 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
* As for U320 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B205)
U338 Source for input signals, AND element 19 (output = B9368) FB 138 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2338) 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
* As for U320 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B205)
U339 Source for input signals, AND element 20 (output = B9369) FB 139 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2339) 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
* As for U320 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B205)
U340 Source for input signals, AND element 21 (output = B9370) FB 140 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2340) 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
* As for U320 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B205)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-131

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
U341 Source for input signals, AND element 22 (output = B9371) FB 141 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2341) 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
* As for U320 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B205)
U342 Source for input signals, AND element 23 (output = B9372) FB 142 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2342) 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
* As for U320 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B205)
U343 Source for input signals, AND element 24 (output = B9373) FB 143 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2343) 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
* As for U320 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B205)
U344 Source for input signals, AND element 25 (output = B9374) FB 144 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2344) 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
* As for U320 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B205)
U345 Source for input signals, AND element 26 (output = B9375) FB 145 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2345) 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
* As for U320 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B205)
U346 Source for input signals, AND element 27 (output = B9376) FB 146 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2346) 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
* As for U320 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B205)
U347 Source for input signals, AND element 28 (output = B9377) FB 147 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2347) 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
* As for U320 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B205)

OR elements with 3 inputs each

The input signals selected via the 3 indices of the parameter are ORed and the result of the logic operation applied to the specified
binector.
U350 Source for input signals, OR element 1 (output = B9380) FB 150 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2350) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* i001 Source for input 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 i002 Source for input 2
(B206) i003 Source for input 3
Settings:
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
U351 Source for input signals, OR element 2 (output = B9381) FB 151 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2351) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* As for U350 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B206)
U352 Source for input signals, OR element 3 (output = B9382) FB 152 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2352) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* As for U350 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B206)
U353 Source for input signals, OR element 4 (output = B9383) FB 153 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2353) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* As for U350 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B206)
U354 Source for input signals, OR element 5 (output = B9384) FB 154 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2354) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* As for U350 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B206)

11-132 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
U355 Source for input signals, OR element 6 (output = B9385) FB 155 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2355) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* As for U350 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B206)
U356 Source for input signals, OR element 7 (output = B9386) FB 156 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2356) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* As for U350 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B206)
U357 Source for input signals, OR element 8 (output = B9387) FB 157 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2357) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* As for U350 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B206)
U358 Source for input signals, OR element 9 (output = B9388) FB 158 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2358) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* As for U350 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B206)
U359 Source for input signals, OR element 10 (output = B9389) FB 159 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2359) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* As for U350 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B206)
U360 Source for input signals, OR element 11 (output = B9390) FB 160 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2360) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* As for U350 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B206)
U361 Source for input signals, OR element 12 (output = B9391) FB 161 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2361) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* As for U350 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B206)
U362 Source for input signals, OR element 13 (output = B9392) FB 162 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2362) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* As for U350 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B206)
U363 Source for input signals, OR element 14 (output = B9393) FB 163 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2363) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* As for U350 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B206)
U364 Source for input signals, OR element 15 (output = B9394) FB 164 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2364) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* As for U350 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B206)
U365 Source for input signals, OR element 16 (output = B9395) FB 165 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2365) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* As for U350 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B206)
U366 Source for input signals, OR element 17 (output = B9396) FB 166 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2366) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* As for U350 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B206)
U367 Source for input signals, OR element 18 (output = B9397) FB 167 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2367) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* As for U350 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B206)
U368 Source for input signals, OR element 19 (output = B9398) FB 168 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2368) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* As for U350 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B206)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-133

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
U369 Source for input signals, OR element 20 (output = B9399) FB 169 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2369) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* As for U350 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B206)

EXCLUSIVE OR elements with 2 inputs each

The input signals selected via the 2 indices of the parameter are combined in an EXCLUSIVE OR (XOR) operation and the result applied
to the specified binector..
U370 Source for input signals, XOR element 1 (output = B9195) FB 170 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2370) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* i001 Source for input 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 i002 Source for input 2
(B206) Settings:
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
U371 Source for input signals, XOR element 2 (output = B9196) FB 171 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2371) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* As for U370 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B206)
U372 Source for input signals, XOR element 3 (output = B9197) FB 172 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2372) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* As for U370 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B206)
U373 Source for input signals, XOR element 4 (output = B9198) FB 173 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2373) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* As for U370 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B206)

Inverters
The input signal is inverted and the result applied to the specified binector.
U380 Source for input signal, inverter 1 (output = B9450) FB 180 All binector numbers Ind: None P052 = 3
(2380) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = binector B0000 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = binector B0001
(B207) etc.
U381 Source for input signal, inverter 2 (output = B9451) FB 181 All binector numbers Ind: None P052 = 3
(2381) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* As for U380 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B207)
U382 Source for input signal, inverter 3 (output = B9452) FB 182 All binector numbers Ind: None P052 = 3
(2382) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* As for U380 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B207)
U383 Source for input signal, inverter 4 (output = B9453) FB 183 All binector numbers Ind: None P052 = 3
(2383) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* As for U380 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B207)
U384 Source for input signal, inverter 5 (output = B9454) FB 184 All binector numbers Ind: None P052 = 3
(2384) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* As for U380 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B207)
U385 Source for input signal, inverter 6 (output = B9455) FB 185 All binector numbers Ind: None P052 = 3
(2385) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* As for U380 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B207)
U386 Source for input signal, inverter 7 (output = B9456) FB 186 All binector numbers Ind: None P052 = 3
(2386) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* As for U380 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B207)

11-134 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
U387 Source for input signal, inverter 8 (output = B9457) FB 187 All binector numbers Ind: None P052 = 3
(2387) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* As for U380 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B207)
U388 Source for input signal, inverter 9 (output = B9458) FB 188 All binector numbers Ind: None P052 = 3
(2388) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* As for U380 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B207)
U389 Source for input signal, inverter 10 (output = B9459) FB 189 All binector numbers Ind: None P052 = 3
(2389) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* As for U380 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B207)
U390 Source for input signal, inverter 11 (output = B9460) FB 190 All binector numbers Ind: None P052 = 3
(2390) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* As for U380 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B207)
U391 Source for input signal, inverter 12 (output = B9461) FB 191 All binector numbers Ind: None P052 = 3
(2391) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* As for U380 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B207)
U392 Source for input signal, inverter 13 (output = B9462) FB 192 All binector numbers Ind: None P052 = 3
(2392) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* As for U380 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B207)
U393 Source for input signal, inverter 14 (output = B9463) FB 193 All binector numbers Ind: None P052 = 3
(2393) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* As for U380 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B207)
U394 Source for input signal, inverter 15 (output = B9464) FB 194 All binector numbers Ind: None P052 = 3
(2394) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* As for U380 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B207)
U395 Source for input signal, inverter 16 (output = B9465) FB 195 All binector numbers Ind: None P052 = 3
(2395) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* As for U380 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B207)

NAND elements with 3 inputs each

The input signals selected via the 3 indices of the parameter are combined in an NAND operation and the result applied to the specified
binector.
U400 Source for input signals, NAND element 1 (output = B9470) FB 200 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2400) 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
* i001 Source for input 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 i002 Source for input 2
(B207) i003 Source for input 3
Settings:
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
U401 Source for input signals, NAND element 2 (output = B9471) FB 201 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2401) 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
* As for U400 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B207)
U402 Source for input signals, NAND element 3 (output = B9472) FB 202 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2402) 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
* As for U400 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B207)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-135

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
U403 Source for input signals, NAND element 4 (output = B9473) FB 203 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2403) 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
* As for U400 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B207)
U404 Source for input signals, NAND element 5 (output = B9474) FB 204 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2404) 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
* As for U400 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B207)
U405 Source for input signals, NAND element 6 (output = B9475) FB 205 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2405) 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
* As for U400 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B207)
U406 Source for input signals, NAND element 7 (output = B9476) FB 206 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2406) 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
* As for U400 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B207)
U407 Source for input signals, NAND element 8 (output = B9477) FB 207 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2407) 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
* As for U400 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B207)
U408 Source for input signals, NAND element 9 (output = B9478) FB 208 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2408) 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
* As for U400 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B207)
U409 Source for input signals, NAND element 10 (output = B9479) FB 209 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2409) 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
* As for U400 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B207)
U410 Source for input signals, NAND element 11 (output = B9480) FB 210 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2410) 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
* As for U400 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B207)
U411 Source for input signals, NAND element 12 (output = B9481) FB 211 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2411) 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
* As for U400 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B207)

11.69 Storage elements, timers and binary signal selector switches

Only active with optional technology software S00
RS flipflops
st nd
RS flipflops with SET (Q=1) and RESET (Q=0) (priority: 1 RESET, 2 SET). RESET setting is enabled on POWER ON.
U415 Source for SET and RESET for RS flipflop 1 FB 215 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2415) (Outputs: Q = B9550, /Q = B9551) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* Type: L2 Offline
S00 i001 Source for SET
(B210) i002 Source for RESET
Settings:
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
U416 Source for SET and RESET for RS flipflop 2 FB 216 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2416) (outputs: Q = B9552, /Q = B9553) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* Type: L2 Offline
S00 As for U415
(B210)
U417 Source for SET and RESET for RS flipflop 3 FB 217 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2417) (outputs: Q = B9554, /Q = B9555) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* Type: L2 Offline
S00 As for U415
(B210)

11-136 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
U418 Source for SET and RESET for RS flipflop 4 FB 218 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2418) (outputs: Q = B9556, /Q = B9557) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* Type: L2 Offline
S00 As for U415
(B210)
U419 Source for SET and RESET for RS flipflop 5 FB 219 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2419) (outputs: Q = B9558, /Q = B9559) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* Type: L2 Offline
S00 As for U415
(B210)
U420 Source for SET and RESET for RS flipflop 6 FB 220 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2420) (outputs: Q = B9560, /Q = B9561) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* Type: L2 Offline
S00 As for U415
(B210)
U421 Source for SET and RESET for RS flipflop 7 FB 221 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2421) (outputs: Q = B9562, /Q = B9563) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* Type: L2 Offline
S00 As for U415
(B210)
U422 Source for SET and RESET for RS flipflop 8 FB 222 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2422) (outputs: Q = B9564, /Q = B9565) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* Type: L2 Offline
S00 As for U415
(B210)
U423 Source for SET and RESET for RS flipflop 9 FB 223 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2423) (outputs: Q = B9566, /Q = B9567) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* Type: L2 Offline
S00 As for U415
(B210)
U424 Source for SET and RESET for RS flipflop 10 FB 224 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2424) (outputs: Q = B9568, /Q = B9569) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* Type: L2 Offline
S00 As for U415
(B210)
U425 Source for SET and RESET for RS flipflop 11 FB 225 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2425) (outputs: Q = B9570, /Q = B9571) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* Type: L2 Offline
S00 As for U415
(B210)
U426 Source for SET and RESET for RS flipflop 12 FB 226 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2426) (outputs: Q = B9572, /Q = B9573) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* Type: L2 Offline
S00 As for U415
(B210)
U427 Source for SET and RESET for RS flipflop 13 FB 227 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2427) (outputs: Q = B9574, /Q = B9575) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* Type: L2 Offline
S00 As for U415
(B210)
U428 Source for SET and RESET for RS flipflop 14 FB 228 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2428) (outputs: Q = B9576, /Q = B9577) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* Type: L2 Offline
S00 As for U415
(B210)

D flipflops
st nd rd
D flipflops with RESET (Q=0), SET (Q=1) and STORE (Q=D on transition from 0 to 1) (priority: 1 RESET, 2 SET, 3 STORE).
RESET setting is enabled on POWER ON.
U430 Source for SET, D, STORE and RESET for D flipflop 1 FB 230 All binector numbers Ind: 4 P052 = 3
(2430) (outputs: Q = B9490, /Q = B9491) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* Type: L2 Offline
S00 i001 Source for SET
i002 Source for D
(B211) i003 Source for STORE
i004 Source for RESET
Settings:
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-137

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
U431 Source for SET, D, STORE and RESET for D flipflop 2 FB 231 All binector numbers Ind: 4 P052 = 3
(2431) (outputs: Q = B9492, /Q = B9493) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* Type: L2 Offline
S00 As for U430
(B211)
U432 Source for SET, D, STORE and RESET for D flipflop 3 FB 232 All binector numbers Ind: 4 P052 = 3
(2432) (outputs: Q = B9494, /Q = B9495) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* Type: L2 Offline
S00 As for U430
(B211)
U433 Source for SET, D, STORE and RESET for D flipflop 4 FB 233 All binector numbers Ind: 4 P052 = 3
(2433) (outputs: Q = B9496, /Q = B9497) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* Type: L2 Offline
S00 As for U430
(B211)

Timer 1 (0.000 to 60.000s) (output = B9580, inverted: B9581)

U440 Source for input signal and reset signal for timer element 1 FB 240 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2440) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* i001 Source for input signal Type: L2 off-line
S00 i002 Source for reset signal for the pulse generator (if U442=3)
(B215) (in state "1", the pulse generator is set to "0")
Settings:
0 = Binector B0000
1 = Binector B0001
etc.
U441 Time for timer 1 FB 240 0.000 to 60.000 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2441) [s] FS=0.000 P051 = 40
0.001 Type: O2 Offline
S00
(B215)
U442 Mode for timer 1 FB 240 0 to 3 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2442) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 ON delay Type: O2 Offline
S00 1 OFF delay
(B215) 2 ON / OFF delay
3 Pulse generator with positive edge triggering

Timer 2 (0.000 to 60.000s) (output = B9582, inverted: B9583)

U443 Source for input signal and reset signal for timer element 2 FB 241 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2443) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* As for U440 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B215)
U444 Time for timer 2 FB 241 0.000 to 60.000 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2444) [s] FS=0.000 P051 = 40
0.001 Type: O2 Offline
S00
(B215)
U445 Mode for timer 2 FB 241 0 to 3 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2445) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* As for U442 Type: O2 Offline
S00
(B215)

Timer 3 (0.000 to 60.000s) (output = B9584, inverted: B9585)

U446 Source for input signal and reset signal for timer element 3 FB 242 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2446) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* As for U440 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B215)
U447 Time for timer 3 FB 242 0.000 to 60.000 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2447) [s] FS=0.000 P051 = 40
0.001 Type: O2 Offline
S00
(B215)
U448 Mode for timer 3 FB 242 0 to 3 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2448) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* As for U442 Type: O2 Offline
S00
(B215)

11-138 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
Timer 4 (0.000 to 60.000s) (output = B9586, inverted: B9587)
U449 Source for input signal and reset signal for timer element 4 FB 243 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2449) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* As for U440 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B215)
U450 Time for timer 4 FB 243 0.000 to 60.000 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2450) [s] FS=0.000 P051 = 40
0.001 Type: O2 Offline
S00
(B215)
U451 Mode for timer 4 FB 243 0 to 3 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2451) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* As for U442 Type: O2 Offline
S00
(B215)

Timer 5 (0.000 to 60.000s) (output = B9588, inverted: B9589)

U452 Source for input signal and reset signal for timer element 5 FB 244 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2452) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* As for U440 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B215)
U453 Time for timer 5 FB 244 0.000 to 60.000 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2453) [s] FS=0.000 P051 = 40
0.001 Type: O2 Offline
S00
(B215)
U454 Mode for timer 5 FB 244 0 to 3 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2454) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* As for U442 Type: O2 Offline
S00
(B215)

Timer 6 (0.000 to 60.000s) (output = B9590, inverted: B9591)

U455 Source for input signal and reset signal for timer element 6 FB 245 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2455) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* As for U440 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B215)
U456 Time for timer 6 FB 245 0.000 to 60.000 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2456) [s] FS=0.000 P051 = 40
0.001 Type: O2 Offline
S00
(B215)
U457 Mode for timer 6 FB 245 0 to 3 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2457) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* As for U442 Type: O2 Offline
S00
(B215)

Timer 7 (0.00 to 600.00s) (output = B9592, inverted: B9593)

U458 Source for input signal and reset signal for timer element 7 FB 246 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2458) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* As for U440 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B216)
U459 Time for timer 7 FB 246 0.00 to 600.00 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2459) [s] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
0.01 Type: O2 Offline
S00
(B216)
U460 Mode for timer 7 FB 246 0 to 3 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2460) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* As for U442 Type: O2 Offline
S00
(B216)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-139

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
Timer 8 (0.00 to 600.00s) (output = B9594, inverted: B9595)
U461 Source for input signal and reset signal for timer element 8 FB 247 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2461) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* As for U440 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B216)
U462 Time for timer 8 FB 247 0.00 to 600.00 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2462) [s] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
0.01 Type: O2 Offline
S00
(B216)
U463 Mode for timer 8 FB 247 0 to 3 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2463) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* As for U442 Type: O2 Offline
S00
(B216)

Timer 9 (0.00 to 600.00s) (output = B9596, inverted: B9597)

U464 Source for input signal and reset signal for timer element 9 FB 248 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2464) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* As for U440 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B216)
U465 Time for timer 9 FB 248 0.00 to 600.00 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2465) [s] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
0.01 Type: O2 Offline
S00
(B216)
U466 Mode for timer 9 FB 248 0 to 3 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2466) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* As for U442 Type: O2 Offline
S00
(B216)

Timer 10 (0.00 to 600.00s) (output = B9598, inverted: B9599)

U467 Source for input signal and reset signal for timer element 10 FB 249 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2467) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* As for U440 Type: L2 Offline
S00
(B216)
U468 Time for timer 10 FB 249 0.00 to 600.00 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2468) [s] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
0.01 Type: O2 Offline
S00
(B216)
U469 Mode for timer 10 FB 249 0 to 3 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2469) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* As for U442 Type: O2 Offline
S00
(B216)

Binary signal selector switches

The control signal (binector) is selected via index i001 of the parameter.
Control signal = 0: Binector as set in index i002 is applied to the output
Control signal = 1: Binector as set in index i003 is applied to the output
U470 Source for input signals for binary signal selector switch 1 FB 250 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2470) (output = B9482) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* Type: L2 Offline
S00 i001 Source for control signal
(B216) i002 Source for output signal when control signal = 0
i003 Source for output signal when control signal = 1
Settings:
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
U471 Source for input signals for binary signal selector switch 2 FB 251 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2471) (output = B9483) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* Type: L2 Offline
S00 As for U470
(B216)

11-140 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
U472 Source for input signals for binary signal selector switch 3 FB 252 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2472) (output = B9484) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* Type: L2 Offline
S00 As for U470
(B216)
U473 Source for input signals for binary signal selector switch 4 FB 253 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2473) (output = B9485) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* Type: L2 Offline
S00 As for U470
(B216)
U474 Source for input signals for binary signal selector switch 5 FB 254 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3
(2474) (output = B9486) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* Type: L2 Offline
S00 As for U470
(B216)

11.70 Technology controller

Only active with optional technology software S00
Technology controller: Actual value
U480 Source for actual value FB 114 All connector Ind: 4 P052 = 3
(2480) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* Selection of connectors to be added as the actual value 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
(B170) etc.
U481 Filter time for actual value FB 114 0.00 to 600.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
(2481) [s] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
S00 0.01 Type: O2 Online
FDS
(B170)
U482 Derivative-action time for actual value (D component) FB 114 0.000 to 30.000 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
(2482) [s] FS=0.000 P051 = 40
0.000 = D component deactivated 0.001 Type: O2 Online
S00 See also U483
FDS
(B170)
U483 Factor for derivative-action time FB 114 0 to 1 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
(2483) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 Derivative-action time = U482 * 1 Type: O2 Offline
S00 1 Derivative-action time = U482 * 1000
FDS
(B170)

Technology controller: Setpoint

U484 Source for setpoint FB 114 All connector Ind: 4 P052 = 3
(2484) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* Selection of connectors to be added as the setpoint 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 0 = connector K0000
(B170) 1 = connector K0001
etc.
U485 Injectable additional setpoint FB 114 -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
(2485) [%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
This parameter setting is added to the setpoint when the binector selected 0.01 Type: I2 Online
S00 in U486 changes to the log. "1" state
FDS
(B170)
U486 Source for control bit for injection of additional setpoint FB 114 All binector numbers Ind: None P052 = 3
(2486) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = binector B0000 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = binector B0001
(B170) etc.

U487 Filter time for setpoint FB 114 0.00 to 600.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
(2487) [s] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
S00 0.01 Type: O2 Online
FDS
(B170)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-141

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
Technology controller: Controller parameters
U488 P gain FB 114 0.10 to 200.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
(2488) 0.01 FS=3.00 P051 = 40
S00 Type: O2 Online
FDS
(B170)
U489 Source for input quantity (x) for Kp adaptation FB 114 All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
(2489) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = connector K0000 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = connector K0001
(B170) etc.
U490 Characteristic for Kp adaptation: Threshold 1 (x1) FB 114 0.00 to 200.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
(2490) [%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
S00 0.01 Type: O2 Online
FDS
(B170)
U491 Characteristic for Kp adaptation: Threshold 2 (x2) FB 114 0.00 to 200.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
(2491) [%] FS=100.00 P051 = 40
S00 0.01 Type: O2 Online
FDS
(B170)
U492 Characteristic for Kp adaptation: Minimum value (y1) FB 114 0.10 to 30.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
(2492) 0.01 FS=1.00 P051 = 40
Minimum value of Kp factor (y) when x ≤ x1 Type: O2 Online
S00
FDS
(B170)
U493 Characteristic for Kp adaptation: Maximum value (y2) FB 114 0.10 to 30.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
(2493) 0.01 FS=1.00 P051 = 40
Maximum value of Kp factor (y) when x ≥ x2 Type: O2 Online
S00
FDS
(B170)
U494 Reset time FB 114 0.010 to 60.000 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
(2494) [s] FS=3.000 P051 = 40
See also U495 0.001 Type: O2 Online
S00
FDS
(B170)
U495 Factor for reset time FB 114 0 to 1 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
(2495) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 Reset time = U494 * 1 Type: O2 Offline
S00 1 Reset time = U494 * 1000
FDS
(B170)

Technology controller: Speed droop

A parameterizable feedback loop can be connected in parallel to the I and P components of the technology controller (acts on summation
point of setpoint and actual value). This loop can be activated and deactivated by settings in parameter U496 (loop can also be
deactivated by setting U497 = 0).
U496 Source for control bit for speed droop injection FB 114 All binector numbers Ind: None P052 = 3
(2496) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = binector B0000 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = binector B0001
(B170) etc.
U497 Speed droop FB 114 0.0 to 60.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
(2497) [%] FS=0.0 P051 = 40
Example: 0.1 Type: O2 Online
S00 A 10% speed droop setting causes a 10% reduction in the setpoint at a
FDS 100% controller output ("softening" of closed-loop control).
(B170)
U498 Positive limit for speed droop FB 114 0.00 to 199.99 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
(2498) [%] FS=100.00 P051 = 40
S00 0.01 Type: O2 Online
FDS
(B170)
U499 Negative limit for speed droop FB 114 -200.00 to 0.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
(2499) [%] FS=-100.00 P051 = 40
S00 0.01 Type: I2 Online
FDS
(B170)

11-142 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
Technology controller: Control bits
U500 Source for technology controller enabling command FB 114 All binector numbers Ind: None P052 = 3
(2500) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = binector B0000 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = binector B0001
(B170) etc.
U502 PI/PID controller switchover FB 114 0 to 1 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
(2502) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 PI controller (D component is applied only in actual-value Type: O2 Offline
S00 channel)
FDS 1 PID controller (D component is applied for control deviation)
(B170)
U503 Set P component to zero FB 114 0 to 1 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
(2503) 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
* 0 Set controller P component to zero (i.e. to obtain pure I Type: O2 Offline
S00 controller)
FDS 1 Controller P component is active
(B170)
U504 Set I component to zero FB 114 0 to 1 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
(2504) 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
* 0 Set controller I component to zero (i.e. to obtain pure P Type: O2 Offline
S00 controller)
FDS 1 Controller I component is active
(B170)

Technology controller: Set I component

When the state of the binector selected in U506 switches from log. "0" to "1", the I component of the technology controller is set to the
value parameterized in U505.
With this function it is possible, for example, to use the same signal (binector) to control controller enabling commands and setting of the I
component.
U505 Source for setting value for I component FB 114 All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
(2505) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = connector K0000 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = connector K0001
(B170) etc.
U506 Source for control bit "Set I component" FB 114 All binector numbers Ind: None P052 = 3
(2506) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = binector B0000 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = binector B0001
(B170) etc.

Technology controller: Output, limitation

U507 Source for variable positive limit FB 114 All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
(2507) numbers FS=1 P051 = 40
* After multiplication with U508, the contents of the selected connector act as 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 a positive limit for the technology controller output.
0 = connector K0000
(B170) 1 = connector K0001
etc.
Note:
If the selected connector contains a negative value, a negative maximum
value is applied to the output of this limiter stage.
U508 Positive limit for output of technology controller FB 114 0.0 to 199.9 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
(2508) [%] FS=100.0 P051 = 40
See also U507 0.1 Type: O2 Online
S00
FDS
(B170)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-143

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
U509 Source for variable negative limit FB 114 All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
(2509) numbers FS=9252 P051 = 40
* After multiplication with U510, the contents of the selected connector act as 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 a negative limit for the technology controller output.
0 = connector K0000
(B170) 1 = connector K0001
etc.
Note:
If the selected connector contains a positive value, a positive minimum
value is applied to the output of this limiter stage.

Note:
Connector K9252 contains the positive limiting value with inverted sign
generated by U507 and U508. By setting U509=9252 and U510=100.00,
therefore, it is possible to set the negative and positive limits symmetrically.

U510 Negative limit for output of technology controller FB 114 0.0 to 199.9 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
(2510) [%] FS=100.0 P051 = 40
See also U509 0.1 Type: O2 Online
S00
FDS
(B170)
U511 Source for variable weighting factor for output FB 114 All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
(2511) numbers FS=1 P051 = 40
* After multiplication with U512, the contents of the selected connector act as 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 a weighting factor for the technology controller output.
(B170) 0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
U512 Weighting factor for output FB 114 -100.0 to 100.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
(2512) [%] FS=100.0 P051 = 40
See also U511 0.1 Type: I2 Online
S00
FDS
(B170)

11.71 Velocity/speed calculators

Only active with optional technology software S00
Speed/velocity calculator

D ∗ π ∗ n _ rated n _ act
Function: v _ act = ∗
i 100%

v_act Actual velocity (n021, U521, K9256)

D Diameter (U517, U518)
n_rated Rated speed (U520)
i Gear ratio (U519)
n_act Actual speed (U515)
U515 Source for actual speed FB 115 All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
(2515) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = connector K0000 1 Type: L2 Offline
S00 1 = connector K0001
(B190) etc.

11-144 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
Velocity/speed calculator

v _ set ∗ i
Function: n _ set = ∗ 100%
D ∗ π ∗ n _ rated

n_set Setpoint speed (n023, K9257)

D Diameter (U517, U518, U523)
n_rated Rated speed (U520)
i Gear ratio (U519)
v_set Setpoint velocity (U516)
U516 Source for set velocity FB 115 All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
(2516) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* A value of 16384 in the selected connector is equivalent to the set velocity 1 Type: L2 off-line
S00 set in U522
0 = Connector K0000
(B190) 1 = Connector K0001
etc.
U517 Source for diameter FB 115 All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
(2517) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* A value of 16384 in the selected connector is equivalent to the diameter set 1 Type: L2 off-line
S00 in U523
0 = Connector K0000
(B190) 1 = Connector K0001
etc.
U518 Minimum diameter FB 115 10.0 to 6553,5 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
(2518) [mm] FS=6500.0 P051 = 40
Lower limit for diameter set in U517 0.1 Type: O2 Online
S00
FDS
(B190)
U519 Gear ratio (i) FB 115 1.00 to 300.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
(2519) 0.01 FS=1.00 P051 = 40
S00 Type: O2 Online
FDS
(B190)
U520 Rated speed (n_rated) FB 115 100 to 4000 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
(2520) [rev/m] FS=1450 P051 = 40
S00 1 Type: O2 Online
FDS
(B190)
U521 Normalization for actual velocity [SW 1.8 and later] 0.01 to 327,67 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2521) [m/s] FS=16,38 P051 = 40
16384 in K9256 correspond to the actual velocity set here 0.01 Type: O2 on-line
S00
(B190)
U522 Normalization for set velocity [SW 1.8 and later] 0.01 to 327,67 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2522) [m/s] FS=16,38 P051 = 40
See parameter U516 0.01 Type: O2 on-line
S00
(B190)
U523 Normalization for diameter [SW 1.8 and later] 10 to 60000 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2523) [mm] FS=1638 P051 = 40
S00 1 Type: O2 on-line
See parameter U517
(B190)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-145

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)

11.72 Variable moment of inertia

Only active with optional technology software S00
Calculation of the variable moment of inertia FB 115

D 4 − D Hülse4 ∗ K
Function: JV = 4
D max

JV Variable moment of inertia

D Diameter
DHülse Diameter of the sleeve
Dmax Maximum diameter
K Constant
U525 Source for input quantities [SW 1.8 and later] All connector Ind: 4 P052 = 3
(2525) numbers FS=1 P051 = 40
* 0 = Connector K0000 1 Type: L2 off-line
S00 1 = Connector K0001
etc.
(B191) i001 Diameter
(16384 are equivalent to set diameter U526)
i002 Diameter of the sleeve
(16384 are equivalent to set diameter U527 )
i003 Maximum diameter
(16384 are equivalent to set diameter U528 )
i004 Constant
(16384 are equivalent to set factor U529 )
U526 Normalization for diameter [SW 1.8 and later] 10 to 60000 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2526) [mm] FS=10000 P051 = 40
See parameter U525 1 Type: O2 on-line
S00
(B191)
U527 Normalization for diameter of the sleeve [SW 1.8 and later] 10 to 60000 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2527) [mm] FS=10000 P051 = 40
See parameter U525 1 Type: O2 on-line
S00
(B191)
U528 Normalization for maximum diameter [SW 1.8 and later] 10 to 60000 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2528) [mm] FS=10000 P051 = 40
See parameter U525 1 Type: O2 on-line
S00
(B191)
U529 Normalization for constant K [SW 1.8 and later] 0.01 to 100.00 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2529) 0.01 FS=1.00 P051 = 40
See parameter U525 Type: O2 on-line
S00
(B191)

11.73 PI controller
Only active with optional technology software S00
PI controller 1 = FB260
PI controller 2 = FB261
PI controller 3 = FB262
PI controller 4 = FB263
PI controller 5 = FB264
PI controller 6 = FB265
PI controller 7 = FB266
PI controller 8 = FB267
PI controller 9 = FB268
PI controller 10 = FB269
U530 Source for input quantity [SW 1.8 and later] All connector Ind: 10 P052 = 3
(2530) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = Connector K0000 1 Type: L2 off-line
S00 1 = Connector K0001
etc.
(B180...
B189) i001: input quantity PI controller 1
i002: input quantity PI controller 2
...
i010: input quantity PI controller 10

11-146 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
Enable and setting of the PI controllers
U531 Source for control signals (enable PI controller) [SW 1.8 and later] All binector numbers Ind: 50 P052 = 3
(2531) 1 WE=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = Binector B0000 Typ: L2 off-line
S00 1 = Binector B0001
etc.
(B180...
B189)
i001: 0 = Disable controller PI controller 1
i002: 0 = Disable controller PI controller 2
...
i010: 0 = Disable controller PI controller 10
i011: 1 = Freeze I component PI controller 1
i012: 1 = Freeze I component PI controller 2
...
i020: 1 = Freeze I component PI controller 10
i021: 1 = Freeze output PI controller 1
i022: 1 = Freeze output PI controller 2
...
i030: 1 = Freeze output PI controller 10
i031: 1 = Freeze I component in pos.direction PI controller 1
i032: 1 = Freeze I component in pos.direction PI controller 2
...
i040: 1 = Freeze I component in pos.direction PI controller 10
i041: 1 = Freeze I component in neg.direction PI controller 1
i042: 1 = Freeze I component in neg.direction PI controller 2
...
i050: 1 = Stop I component in neg.direction PI controller 10
U532 Source for control signals (set PI controller) [SW 1.8 and later] All binector numbers Ind: 20 P052 = 3
(2532) 1 WE=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = Binector B0000 Typ: L2 off-line
S00 1 = Binector B0001
etc.
(B180...
B189)
i001: 0 = Set I component PI controller 1
i002: 0 = Set I component PI controller 2
...
i010: 0 = Set I component PI controller 10
i011: 0 = Set output PI controller 1
i012: 0 = Set output PI controller 2
...
i020: 0 = Set output PI controller 10
U533 Source for Setting values [SW 1.8 and later] All connector Ind: 20 P052 = 3
(2533) numbers WE=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = Connector K0000 1 Typ: L2 off-line
S00 1 = Connector K0001
etc.
(B180...
B189)
i001: Setting value for I component PI controller 1
i002: Setting value for I component PI controller 2
...
i010: Setting value for I component PI controller 10
i011: Setting value for Output PI controller 1
i012: Setting value for Output PI controller 2
...
i020: Setting value for Output PI controller 10

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-147

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
Filtering of the input signals
U534 Source for variable filtering time for the input signal [SW 1.8 and later] All connector Ind: 10 P052 = 3
(2534) numbers FS=1 P051 = 40
* 1 Type: L2 off-line
S00 The content of the selected connector acts as filtering time for the PI
controller after multiplication with U535.
(B180...
B189) 0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
etc.

i001: variable filtering time PI controller 1

i002: variable filtering time PI controller 2
...
i010: variable filtering time PI controller 10
U535 Filtering time for the input signal [SW 1.8 and later] 0 to 10000 Ind: 10 P052 = 3
(2535) [ms] FS=0 P051 = 40
i001: filtering time PI controller 1 1 Type: O2 on-line
S00 i002: filtering time PI controller 2
(B180... ...
B189) i010: filtering time PI controller 10

Controller parameters
U536 Source for variable P gain [SW 1.8 and later] All connector Ind: 10 P052 = 3
(2536) numbers FS=1 P051 = 40
* 1 Type: L2 off-line
S00 The content of the selected connector acts as the P gain for the PI controller
after multiplication with U537.
(B180...
B189) 0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
etc.

i001: variable P gain PI controller 1

i002: variable P gain PI controller 2
...
i010: variable P gain PI controller 10
U537 PI controller P gain [SW 1.8 and later] 0.10 to 200.00 Ind: 10 P052 = 3
(2537) 0.01 FS=3.00 P051 = 40
i001: P gain PI controller 1 Type: O2 on-line
S00 i002: P gain PI controller 2
(B180... ...
B189) i010: P gain PI controller 10
U538 Source for variable Integration time [SW 1.8 and later] All connector Ind: 10 P052 = 3
(2538) numbers FS=1 P051 = 40
* The content of the selected connector acts as the integration time for the PI 1 Type: L2 off-line
S00 controller after multiplication with U539.

(B180... 0 = Connector K0000

B189) 1 = Connector K0001
etc.

i001: variable Integration time PI controller 1

i002: variable Integration time PI controller 2
...
i010: variable Integration time PI controller 10
U539 PI controller integration time [SW 1.8 and later] 0.010 to 10.000 Ind: 10 P052 = 3
(2539) [s] FS=3.000 P051 = 40
i001: Integration time PI controller 1 0.001 Type: O2 on-line
S00 i002: Integration time PI controller 2
(B180... ...
B189) i010: Integration time PI controller 10

Control bits
U540 Freeze P component [SW 1.8 and later] 0 to 1 Ind: 10 P052 = 3
(2540) 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
* 0 Controller P component frozen (i.e. pure I controller) Type: O2 off-line
S00 1 Controller P component active

(B180... i001: PI controller 1

B189) i002: PI controller 2
...
i010: PI controller 10

11-148 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
U541 Freeze I component [SW 1.8 and later] 0 to 1 Ind: 10 P052 = 3
(2541) 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
* 0 Controller I component frozen (i.e. pure P controller) Type: O2 off-line
S00 1 Controller I component active

(B180... i001: PI controller 1

B189) i002: PI controller 2
...
i010: PI controller 10

Output, Limitation
U542 Source for variable positive limit [SW 1.8 and later] All connector Ind: 10 P052 = 3
(2542) numbers FS=1 P051 = 40
* The content of the selected connector acts as the positive limit for the 1 Type: L2 off-line
S00 output of the PI controller after multiplication with U543.
0 = Connector K0000
(B180... 1 = Connector K0001
B189) etc.
i001: PI controller 1
i002: PI controller 2
...
i010: PI controller 10

Note:
If the content of the selected connector has a negative value, this causes a
negative maximum value at the output of this limiter stage.
U543 Positive limit for the output of the PI controller [SW 1.8 and later] 0.0 to 199.9 Ind: 10 P052 = 3
(2543) [%] FS=100.0 P051 = 40
See also U542 0.1 Type: O2 on-line
S00
(B180...
B189)
U544 Source for variable negative Limit [SW 1.8 and later] All connector Ind: 10 P052 = 3
(2544) numbers FS= P051 = 40
* The content of the selected connector acts as the negative limit for the 1 i001: 9306 off-line
S00 output of the technology controller after multiplication with U510. i002: 9316
0 = Connector K0000 i003: 9326
(B180... 1 = Connector K0001 i004: 9336
B189) etc. i005: 9346
i006: 9356
i001: PI controller 1 i007: 9366
i002: PI controller 2 i008: 9376
... i009: 9386
i010: PI controller 10 i010: 9396
Note: Type: L2
If the content of the selected connector has a positive value, this causes a
positive minimum value at the output of this limiter stage.
Note:
Connectors K9306 to K9396 contain for PI controllers 1 to 10 the positive
limitation values formed by U542 and U543 with an inverted sign. In this
way it is possible to set the negative limitation symmetrically to the positive
limitation by setting U544= 9306 to 9396 and U545=100.0.
U545 Negative limit for the output of the PI controller [SW 1.8 and later] 0.0 to 199.9 Ind: 10 P052 = 3
(2545) [%] FS=100.0 P051 = 40
See also U544 0.1 Type: O2 on-line
S00
(B180...
B189)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-149

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)

11.74 Closed-loop control elements

Only active with optional technology software S00
Derivative / delay elements SW 1.8 and later FB 270 to FB 279
U550 Source for input quantity [SW 1.8 and later] All connector Ind: 10 P052 = 3
(2550) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* 1 Type: L2 off-line
S00 0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
(B156) etc.
(B157)
(B158) i001: Input quantity derivative/delay element 1 (FB 270)
i002: Input quantity derivative/delay element 2 (FB 271)
i003: Input quantity derivative/delay element 3 (FB 272)
i004: Input quantity derivative/delay element 4 (FB 273)
i005: Input quantity derivative/delay element 5 (FB 274)
i006: Input quantity derivative/delay element 6 (FB 275)
i007: Input quantity derivative/delay element 7 (FB 276)
i008: Input quantity derivative/delay element 8 (FB 277)
i009: Input quantity derivative/delay element 9 (FB 278)
i010: Input quantity derivative/delay element 10 (FB 279)
U551 Source for multiplier for derivative-action time [SW 1.8 and later] All connector Ind: 10 P052 = 3
(2551) numbers FS=1 P051 = 40
* 0 = Connector K0000 1 Type: L2 off-line
S00 1 = Connector K0001
etc.
(B156)
(B157) i001: Multiplier derivative/delay element 1 (FB 270)
(B158) i002: Multiplier derivative/delay element 2 (FB 271)
I003: Multiplier derivative/delay element 3 (FB 272)
i004: Multiplier derivative/delay element 4 (FB 273)
i005: Multiplier derivative/delay element 5 (FB 274)
i006: Multiplier derivative/delay element 6 (FB 275)
i007: Multiplier derivative/delay element 7 (FB 276)
i008: Multiplier derivative/delay element 8 (FB 277)
i009: Multiplier derivative/delay element 9 (FB 278)
i010: Multiplier derivative/delay element 10 (FB 279)
U552 Derivative-action time [SW 1.8 and later] 0 to 10000 Ind: 10 P052 = 3
(2552) [ms] FS=100 P051 = 40
i001: Der.-act.time deriv./delay element 1 (FB 270) 1 Type: O2 on-line
S00 i002: Der.-act.time deriv./delay element 2 (FB 271)
i003: Der.-act.time deriv./delay element 3 (FB 272)
(B156) i004: Der.-act.time deriv./delay element 4 (FB 273)
(B157) i005: Der.-act.time deriv./delay element 5 (FB 274)
(B158) i006: Der.-act.time deriv./delay element 7 (FB 276)
i008: Der.-act.time deriv./delay element 8 (FB 277)
i009: Der.-act.time deriv./delay element 9 (FB 278)
i010: Der.-act.time deriv./delay element 10 (FB 279)
U553 Source for multiplier for filtering time [SW 1.8 and later] All connector Ind: 10 P052 = 3
(2553) numbers FS=1 P051 = 40
* 0 = Connector K0000 1 Type: L2 off-line
S00 1 = Connector K0001
etc.
(B156)
(B157) i001: Multiplier derivative/delay element 1 (FB 270)
(B158) i002: Multiplier derivative/delay element 2 (FB 271)
i003: Multiplier derivative/delay element 3 (FB 272)
i004: Multiplier derivative/delay element 4 (FB 273)
i005: Multiplier derivative/delay element 5 (FB 274)
i006: Multiplier derivative/delay element 6 (FB 275)
i007: Multiplier derivative/delay element 7 (FB 276)
i008: Multiplier derivative/delay element 8 (FB 277)
i009: Multiplier derivative/delay element 9 (FB 278)
i010: Multiplier derivative/delay element 10 (FB 279)

11-150 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
U554 Filtering time [SW 1.8 and later] 0 to 10000 Ind: 10 P052 = 3
(2554) [ms] FS=100 P051 = 40
i001: Filtering time derivative/delay element 1 (FB 270) 1 Type: O2 on-line
S00 i002: Filtering time derivative/delay element 2 (FB 271)
i003: Filtering time derivative/delay element 3 (FB 272)
(B156) i004: Filtering time derivative/delay element 4 (FB 273)
(B157) i005: Filtering time derivative/delay element 5 (FB 274)
(B158) i006: Filtering time derivative/delay element 6 (FB 275)
i007: Filtering time derivative/delay element 7 (FB 276)
i008: Filtering time derivative/delay element 8 (FB 277)
i009: Filtering time derivative/delay element 9 (FB 278)
i010: Filtering time derivative/delay element 10 (FB 279)

11.75 Commutation monitoring

n560 Parameters for SIMOREG DC-MASTER Converter Commutation
n569 Protector (SIMOREG CCP)
n570
n571
n572
n574
n575
n576
U577
U578
U580 Control word for commutation monitoring [SW 2.1 and later] 0 to 7 Ind: none P052 = 3
(2580) 1 FS=7 P051 = 40
The commutation of the converter is constantly monitored. If a commutation Type: O2 online
failure is detected, fault message F030 is activated and the thyristor is
quenched by the SIMOREG CCP (if installed).
Detection of a commutation failure is based on three decision criteria. They
can be individually activated/deactivated with this parameter for test
purposes.

0: None of the three decision criteria are evaluated

1: Decision criterion 1 (sufficient voltage time area for
commutation) is evaluated
2: Decision criterion 2 (curvature of the current crest curve) is
evaluated
4: Decision criterion 3 (maximum current actual value) is evaluated
Setting instruction:
Each decision criterion has a numeric code.
If more than one decision criterion is to be evaluated, the sum of the
relevant digits must be entered.
If U806 is ≥ 2 (i.e. the basic unit is a slave connected in parallel), decision
criterion 1 is not evaluated irrespective of the setting of U580.
U581 Diagnostic memory for commutation monitoring [SW 2.1 and later] 0 to 65535 Ind: 68 P052 = 3
(2581) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
This memory is updated every time fault message F030 is activated. Type: O2 online
It provides the SIEMENS specialist with more detailed information about the
cause of the commutation failure.
U582 Reaction of commutation monitor [SW 2.1 and later] 1 to 2 Ind: none P052 = 3
(2582) 1 FS=2 P051 = 40
This parameter allows the reaction of the commutation monitor to be Type: O2 online
programmed.

1 Detection of a commutation failure or overcurrent results in

immediate pulse blocking and generation of warning A030. The
pulses are enabled again after approximately 20ms and warning
A030 is reset.
2 Detection of a commutation failure or overcurrent results in
immediate pulse blocking and generation of fault message
F030.
Important:
The setting U582 = 1 is not allowed when the SIMOREG CCP is selected
(P790 = 6)!
U583 Parameter for SIMOREG CCP
(2583)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-151

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)

11.76 Setpoint reduction

U607 Source for activation of the setpoint reduction [SW 1.6 and later] All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2607) 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
* 0 = Binector B0000 Type: L2 off-line
BDS 1 = Binector B0001
etc.
(G135) 0 Setpoint reduction active
The Setpoint (before the ramp-function generator) is multiplied
by the factor set in parameter U608
1 No setpoint reduction
U608 Multiplier for speed setpoint on activation of the setpoint reduction[SW 0.00 to 100.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
(2608) 1.6 and later] [%] FS=15.00 P051 = 40
FDS 0.01% Type: O2 on-line
(G135)

11.77 Definition of the function of inputs and outputs

U616 Control word for input "E stop" (term. 105 to 108) [SW 2.0 and later] 0 to 1 Ind: none P052 = 3
(2616) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
0 = E stop has same effect as OFF2 Type: O2 online
1 = E stop immediately cancels the firing pulse chain (without waiting for
(G117) I = 0 and without outputting αw)

11.78 Definition of the function of the relay output at terminals 109 / 110
U619 Source for the relay output "line contactor ON" (terminals 109 / 110) All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2619) [SW 1.7 and later] 1 FS=124 P051 = 40
* Type: L2 off-line
BDS 0 = Binector B0000
1 = Binector B0001
(G117) etc.
124 = Main contactor ON

11.79 Starting pulse – Speed controller

(See also Chapter 8 Function Diagram Sheet G150)
U651 Starting pulse (integrator setting value for the speed controller) -100.00 to 100.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
(2651) [SW 1.7 and later] [%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
FDS 0.01% Type: I2 on-line
(G150)
U652 Multiplier for starting pulse with neg. setpoint [SW 1.7 and later] 0.00 to 200.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
(2652) [%] FS=50.00 P051 = 40
FDS if the starting pulse acc. to U651 is also used for pos. setpoint 0.01% Type: O2 on-line
(G150)
U653 Starting pulse with neg. setpoint [SW 1.7 and later] -100.00 to 100.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
(2653) [%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
FDS 0.01% Type: I2 on-line
(G150)
U655 Source for Starting pulse [SW 1.7 and later] All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
(2655) numbers FS=451 P051 = 40
* 0 = Connector K0000 1 Type: L2 off-line
(G150) 1 = Connector K0001
etc.
U656 Source for starting pulse with neg. setpoint [SW 1.7 and later] All connector Ind: None P052 = 3
(2656) numbers FS=452 P051 = 40
* 0 = Connector K0000 1 Type: L2 off-line
(G150) 1 = Connector K0001
etc.
U657 Source for switchover starting pulse for pos./neg. setp. All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2657) [SW 1.7 and later] 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* Type: L2 off-line
BDS 0 = Binector B0000
(G150) 1 = Binector B0001
etc.

11-152 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)

11.80 Evaluation of a 4-step master switch for cranes

(See also Chapter 8 Function Diagram Sheet G125)
U660 Source for travel command 1 [SW 1.7 and later] All binector numbers Ind: None P052 = 3
(2660) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = Binector B0000 Type: L2 off-line
(G125) 1 = Binector B0001
etc.
U661 Source for travel command 2 [SW 1.7 and later] All binector numbers Ind: None P052 = 3
(2661) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = Binector B0000 Type: L2 off-line
(G125) 1 = Binector B0001
etc.
U662 Source for switchover to setpoint step S2 [SW 1.7 and later] All binector numbers Ind: None P052 = 3
(2662) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = Binector B0000 Type: L2 off-line
(G125) 1 = Binector B0001
etc.
U663 Source for switchover to setpoint step S3 [SW 1.7 and later] All binector numbers Ind: None P052 = 3
(2663) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = Binector B0000 Type: L2 off-line
(G125) 1 = Binector B0001
etc.
U664 Source for switchover to setpoint step S4 [SW 1.7 and later] All binector numbers Ind: None P052 = 3
(2664) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 = Binector B0000 Type: L2 off-line
(G125) 1 = Binector B0001
etc.
U665 Setpoint for setpoint step S1 [SW 1.7 and later] 0.00 to 110.00 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2665) [%] FS=10.00 P051 = 40
(G125) 0.01% Type: O2 on-line
U666 Setpoint for setpoint step S2 [SW 1.7 and later] 0.00 to 110.00 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2666) [%] FS=25.00 P051 = 40
(G125) 0.01% Type: O2 on-line
U667 Setpoint for setpoint step S3 [SW 1.7 and later] 0.00 to 110.00 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2667) [%] FS=40.00 P051 = 40
(G125) 0.01% Type: O2 on-line
U668 Setpoint for setpoint step S4 [SW 1.7 and later] 0.00 to 110.00 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2668) [%] FS=100.00 P051 = 40
(G125) 0.01% Type: O2 on-line

11.81 Position/positional deviation acquisition

Only active with optional technology software S00
U670 Source for actual position values FB 54 All connector Ind: 2 P052 = 2
(2670) [SW 2.0 and later] numbers FS= P051 = 40
* 1 i001: 46 offline
S00 Selection of connector whose values are to be used as actual position i002: 0
(B152) values. Type: L2
i001: Actual position value 1
i002: Actual position value 2
Settings:
0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
etc.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-153

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
U671 Source for setting/resetting signal for position acquisition FB 54 All binector numbers Ind: 6 P052 = 2
(2671) [SW 2.0 and later] 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* Type: L2 offline
S00 Selection of binector whose value is to be used as the setting or resetting
(B152) signals.
i001: Reset actual position value 1
i002: Set actual position value 1
i003: Reset actual position value 2
i004: Set actual position value 2
i005: Reset positional deviation
i006: Set positional deviation
Settings:
0 = Binector B0000
1 = Binector B0001
etc.
U672 Source for setting values FB 54 All connector Ind: 3 P052 = 2
(2672) [SW 2.0 and later] numbers FS= P051 = 40
* 1 i001: 9471 offline
S00 Selection of connectors whose values are to be used as setting values i002: 9472
(B152) i001: Setting value for position 1 i003: 9473
i002: Setting value for position 2 Type: L2
i003: Setting value for positional deviation
Settings:
0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
etc.
U673 Numerator of transformation ratio FB 54 -32766 to 32766 Ind: 4 P052 = 2
(2673) for actual position value 2 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 FS=10000 P051 = 40
* Type: I2 off-line
FDS U673 must be less than or equal to U674, otherwise F058 is output with
S00 fault value 14
(B152)
U674 Denominator of transformation ratio FB 54 1 to 32767 Ind: 4 P052 = 2
(2674) for actual position value 2 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 FS=10000 P051 = 40
* Type: O2 offline
FDS
S00
(B152)
U675 Source for connecting the positional deviation offset FB 54 All binector numbers Ind: none P052 = 2
(2675) [SW 2.0 and later] 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* Type: L2 offline
S00 Selection of the binector whose value connects the offset of the positional
(B152) deviation
Settings:
0 = Binector B0000
1 = Binector B0001
etc.
U676 Source for positional deviation offset FB 54 All connector Ind: none P052 = 2
(2676) [SW 2.0 and later] numbers FS=9474 P051 = 40
* 1 Type: L2 offline
S00 Selection of the connector whose value is to be used as the offset of the
(B152) positional deviation
Settings:
0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
etc.
U677 Fixed values for position acquisition FB 54 -32768 to 32767 Ind: 8 P052 = 2
(2677) [SW 2.0 and later] 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* Type: I2 offline
S00 i001: LOW word of double-word connector KK9471
(B152) i002: HIGH word of double-word connector KK9471
i003: LOW word of double-word connector KK9472
i004: HIGH word of double-word connector KK9472
i005: LOW word of double-word connector KK9473
i006: HIGH word of double-word connector KK9473
i007: LOW word of double-word connector KK9474
i008: HIGH word of double-word connector KK9474

11-154 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
U678 Memory for actual position values: Initial value at POWER ON FB 54 0 to 1 Ind: none P052 = 2
(2678) [SW 2.1 and later] 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* Type: O2 online
S00 0 Initial value = 0
(B152) 1 Initial value is set such that on POWER ON KK9481 or KK9482
assumes whatever its setting value was before the electronics
supply was disconnected.

11.82 Root extractor

Only active with optional technology software S00
U680 Source for the input of the root extractor FB 58 All connector Ind: none P052 = 2
(2680) [SW 2.0 and later] numbers FS=9483 P051 = 40
* 1 Type: L2 offline
S00 Selection of the connector whose value is to be used for the root extractor
(B153) input.
Settings:
0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
etc.
U681 Operating point for limit monitoring indicator of the root extractor 1 to 65535 Ind: none P052 = 2
(2681) FB 58 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
S00 [SW 2.0 and later] Type: O2 online
(B153) applied to connector KK9483
U682 Hysteresis for limit monitoring indicator of the root extractor FB 58 1 to 65535 Ind: none P052 = 2
(2682) [SW 2.0 and later] 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
S00 Type: O2 online
(B153)
U683 x value for root function and gradient FB 58 1 to 65535 Ind: 2 P052 = 2
(2683) [SW 2.0 and later] 1 FS=1000 P051 = 40
S00 Type: O2 online
Definition of input values
(B153)
i001: Distance between input value of root function and fictitious
passage through zero for y value U684.001
i002: x value of gradient for y value U684.002
U684 y value for root function and gradient FB 58 0.01 to 199.99 Ind: 2 P052 = 2
(2684) [SW 2.0 and later] [%] FS=100.00 P051 = 40
S00 0.01 Type: O2 online
Definition of output values
(B153)
i001: y value of root function for distance U683.001
i002: y value of gradient for x value U683.002

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-155

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)

11.83 Configuration of SCB1 with SCI

U690 Configuration of analog inputs of SCI1 [SW 1.9 and later] 0 to 2 Ind:6 P052 = 3
1 FS= 0 P051 =40
(2690) Definition of type of input signals Type O2 on-line
Parameter value Terminals Terminals
(Z150) X428/3, 6, 9 X428/5, 8, 11
(Z151)
0: -10 V ... + 10 V - 20 mA ... + 20 mA
1: 0 V ... + 10 V 0 mA ... + 20 mA
2: 4 mA ... + 20 mA

Notes:
- Only one signal can be processed per input. Voltage or current signals can
be evaluated.
- Voltage and current signals must be connected to different terminals.
- Only unipolar signals are permitted with settings 1 and 2, i.e. the internal
process quantities are also unipolar.
- When setting 2 is selected, an input current of< 2 mA causes shutdown on
faults (open-circuit monitoring)
- The offset compensation for the analog inputs is set in parameter U692.

i001: Slave 1, analog input 1

i002: Slave 1, analog input 2
i003: Slave 1, analog input 3
i004: Slave 2, analog input 1
i005: Slave 2, analog input 2
i006: Slave 2, analog input 3
U691 Smoothing time constant for analog inputs of SCI1 [SW 1.9 and later] 0 to 15 Ind:6 P052 = 3
1 FS= 2 P051 =40
(2691) Formula: T = 2ms * 2 to the power of U691 Type O2 on-line
i001: Slave 1, analog input 1
i002: Slave 1, analog input 2
(Z150) i003: Slave 1, analog input 3
(Z151) i004: Slave 2, analog input 1
i005: Slave 2, analog input 2
i006: Slave 2, analog input 3
U692 Offset compensation for analog inputs of SCI1 [SW 1.9 and later] -20.00 to 20.00 Ind:6 P052 = 3
[V] FS= 0 P051 =40
(2692) Setting instructions, see Operating Instructions for SCI1 0.01V Type I2 on-line
i001: Slave 1, analog input 1
i002: Slave 1, analog input 2
(Z150) i003: Slave 1, analog input 3
(Z151) i004: Slave 2, analog input 1
i005: Slave 2, analog input 2
i006: Slave 2, analog input 3
U693 Actual value output via analog outputs of SCI1 [SW 1.9 and later] All connector Ind:6 P052 = 3
numbers FS= 0 P051 =40
(2693) Selection of connectors whose values are to be output (for details, see 1 Type L2 on-line
Operating Instructions for SCI1)
i001: Slave 1, analog output 1
(Z155) i002: Slave 1, analog output 2
(Z156) i003: Slave 1, analog output 3
i004: Slave 2, analog output 1
i005: Slave 2, analog output 2
i006: Slave 2, analog output 3
U694 Gain for analog outputs of SCI1 [SW 1.9 and later] -320.00 to 320.00 Ind:6 P052 = 3
[V] FS= 10.00 P051 =40
(2694) Setting instructions, see Operating Instructions for SCI1 0.01V Type I2 on-line
i001: Slave 1, analog output 1
i002: Slave 1, analog output 2
(Z155) i003: Slave 1, analog output 3
(Z156) i004: Slave 2, analog output 1
i005: Slave 2, analog output 2
i006: Slave 2, analog output 3

11-156 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
U695 Offset compensation for analog outputs of SCI1 [SW 1.9 and later] -100.00 to 100.00 Ind:6 P052 = 3
[V] FS= 0 P051 =40
(2695) Setting instructions, see Operating Instructions for SCI1 0.01V Type I2 on-line
i001: Slave 1, analog output 1
i002: Slave 1, analog output 2
(Z155) i003: Slave 1, analog output 3
(Z156) i004: Slave 2, analog output 1
i005: Slave 2, analog output 2
i006: Slave 2, analog output 3
U696 Telegram failure time for SCB1 [SW 1.9 and later] 0 to 65000 Ind: None P052 = 3
[ms] FS=0 P051 =40
(2696) Fault message F079 is displayed if no process data are exchanged with the 1ms Type: O2 Online
supplementary board within this delay period. The monitoring function is
implemented within a 20 ms cycle. For this reason, only setting values
which constitute a multiple of 20 ms are meaningful.

Settings:
0 No time monitoring
1...65000 Permissible time interval between two process data
exchange operations before a fault message is output.

Note:
The telegram monitoring function is active
• from the receipt of the first error-free telegram after connection of the
electronics power supply
• from the receipt of the first error-free telegram after the telegram monitor
has responded (i.e. monitoring timeout).
n697 Diagnostic information of SCB1 [SW 1.9 and later] Ind:24 P052 = 3
Type O2 P051 =40
(2697) Visualization parameter for displaying diagnostic info relating to SCB1. on-line
The displayed values overflow at "255“ (e.g. the number of telegrams begins
at "0" again after "255").
i001: Number of error-free telegrams
i002: Number of errored telegrams
i003: Number of voltage failures on slaves
i004: Number of interruptions in fiber-optic connection
i005: Number of missing response telegrams
i006: Number of search telegrams for slave location
i007: ETX error
i008: Number of configuration telegrams
i009: Highest terminal numbers needed according to PZD
connection (parameterization of connectors or binectors)
i010: Analog inputs/outputs required according to PZD connection of
setpoint channel and actual value output via SCI
(parameterization of appropriate connectors)
i011: Reserved
i012: Reserved
i013: SCB1 alarm word
i014: Setting defining whether slave no. 1 is needed and type if
applicable
0: No slave required
1: SCI1
2: SCI2
i015: Setting defining whether slave no. 2 is needed and type if
applicable
0: No slave required
1: SCI1
2: SCI2
i016: SCI board: Initialization error
i017: SCB1 generation: Year
i018: SCB1 generation: Day and month
i019: SCI slave1: Software version
i020: SCI slave1: Year of generation
i021: SCI slave1: Day and month of generation
i022: SCI slave2: Software version
i023: SCI slave2: Year of generation
i024: SCI slave2: Day and month of generation

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-157

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
U698 Binector selection for binary outputs of SCI [SW 1.9 and later] All binector numbers Ind:24 P052 = 3
1 FS= 0 P051 =40
(2698) Selection of binectors whose states are output via the binary outputs of the Type L2 on-line
SCIs
i001: Binector selection for SCI slave1, binary output 1
(Z135) i002: Binector selection for SCI slave1, binary output 2
(Z136) i003: Binector selection for SCI slave1, binary output 3
(Z145) i004: Binector selection for SCI slave1, binary output 4
(Z146) i005: Binector selection for SCI slave1, binary output 5
i006: Binector selection for SCI slave1, binary output 6
i007: Binector selection for SCI slave1, binary output 7
i008: Binector selection for SCI slave1, binary output 8
i009: Binector selection for SCI slave1, binary output 9
i010: Binector selection for SCI slave1, binary output 10
i011: Binector selection for SCI slave1, binary output 11
i012: Binector selection for SCI slave1, binary output12
i013: Binector selection for SCI slave2, binary output 1
i014: Binector selection for SCI slave2, binary output 2
i015: Binector selection for SCI slave2, binary output 3
i016: Binector selection for SCI slave2, binary output 4
i017: Binector selection for SCI slave2, binary output 5
i018: Binector selection for SCI slave2, binary output 6
i019: Binector selection for SCI slave2, binary output 7
i020: Binector selection for SCI slave2, binary output 8
i021: Binector selection for SCI slave2, binary output 9
i022: Binector selection for SCI slave2, binary output 10
i023: Binector selection for SCI slave2, binary output 11
i024: Binector selection for SCI slave2, binary output12
n699 Display of SCB1/SCI process data [SW 1.9 and later] Ind:16 P052 = 3
Type L2 P051 =40
(2699) All values in hexadecimal representation on-line
i001: SCI slave1, binary inputs
(Z130) i002: SCI slave1, analog input1
(Z131) i003: SCI slave1, analog input2
(Z135) i004: SCI slave1, analog input3
(Z136) i005: SCI slave2, binary inputs
(Z140) i006: SCI slave2, analog input1
(Z141) i007: SCI slave2, analog input2
(Z145) i008: SCI slave2, analog input3
(Z146) i009: SCI slave1, binary outputs
(Z150) i010: SCI slave1, analog output1
(Z151) i011: SCI slave1, analog output2
(Z155) i012: SCI slave1, analog output3
(Z156) i013: SCI slave2, binary outputs
i014: SCI slave2, binary outputs
i015: SCI slave2, analog output2
i016: SCI slave2, analog output3

11.84 Configuration of supplementary boards in board locations 2 and 3

U710 Initialize link to supplementary boards 0 to 1 Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2710) st 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
* i001 Initialization of 1 communications board (in slot with lower ID Type: O2 Offline
letter)
(Z110) i002
nd
Initialization of 2 communications board (in slot with higher ID
(Z111) letter

Settings:
0 The link to supplementary boards is re-initialized. After the
configuration parameters for supplementary boards have been
changed, U710 must be set to 0 so that the new settings can
take effect.
The parameter is then set automatically to 1.
Note: Data transmission is interrupted while initialization is in
progress.
1 Deactivated

11-158 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
U711 Communications board parameter 1 (CB parameter 1) 0 to 65535 Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2711) 1 FS=0 Online
* See documentation for installed COM BOARD. Type: O2
(Z110)
(Z111) This parameter is relevant only if a communications board is installed. The
validity of the setting is monitored by the CB. If the CB rejects the setting,
fault message F080 is displayed with fault value 5
st
Index 1 is used to parameterize the 1 CB (including CB behind TB) and
nd
index 2 to parameterize the 2 CB.
U712 Communications board parameter 2 (CB parameter 2) 0 to 65535 Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2712) 1 FS=0 Online
* See U711 Type: O2
(Z110)
(Z111)
U713 Communications board parameter 3 (CB parameter 3) 0 to 65535 Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2713) 1 FS=0 Online
* See U711 Type: O2
(Z110)
(Z111)
U714 Communications board parameter 4 (CB parameter 4) 0 to 65535 Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2714) 1 FS=0 Online
* See U711 Type: O2
(Z110)
(Z111)
U715 Communications board parameter 5 (CB parameter 5) 0 to 65535 Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2715) 1 FS=0 Online
* See U711 Type: O2
(Z110)
(Z111)
U716 Communications board parameter 6 (CB parameter 6) 0 to 65535 Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2716) 1 FS=0 Online
* See U711 Type: O2
(Z110)
(Z111)
U717 Communications board parameter 7 (CB parameter 7) 0 to 65535 Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2717) 1 FS=0 Online
* See U711 Type: O2
(Z110)
(Z111)
U718 Communication Board Parameter 8 (CB-Parameter 8) 0 to 65535 Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2718) 1 FS=0 Online
* See U711 Type: O2
(Z110)
(Z111)
U719 Communications board parameter 9 (CB parameter 9) 0 to 65535 Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2719) 1 FS=0 Online
* See U711 Type: O2
(Z110)
(Z111)
U720 Communications board parameter 10 (CB parameter 10) 0 to 65535 Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2720) 1 FS=0 Online
* See U711 Type: O2
(Z110)
(Z111)
U721 Communications board parameter 11 (CB parameter 11) 0 to 65535 Ind: 10 P052 = 3
(2721) 1 FS=0 Online
* See U711 Type: O2
(Z110)
(Z111)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-159

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
U722 Telegram failure time for CB and TB 0 to 65000 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
(2722) [ms] FS=0 Online
* i001: Telegram failure time for board location 2 1ms Type: O2
i002: Telegram failure time for board location 3
st
i003: Fault delay time for 1 CB or TB
nd
(Z110) i004: Fault delay time for 2 CB
(Z111)
Settings for telegram failure time:
0 No time monitoring; must be parameterized for sporadic
(acyclic) telegrams
1...65500 Maximum permissible time interval between 2 data
exchanges before fault message F082 can be output

Settings for fault delay time:

0 Instantaneous activation of F082
1...65499 Fault delay time before F082 is activated.
65500 F082 is never activated

If no process data are exchanged with the supplementary board for a period
in excess of the telegram failure time, fault message F082 is activated as a
function of the fault delay time.
Monitoring takes place in a 20 ms cycle. For this reason, it is only
meaningful to set values that are multiples of 20 ms.

U722.001 U722.003
or or
U722.002 U722.004

t [ms]

last B3035 = 1 F082 and

receive or B3030 = 1
telegram B8035 = 1 B3031 = 1
or
B8030 = 1
B8031 = 1

Note:
The telegram monitoring function is active
• from the receipt of the first error-free telegram after connection of the
electronics power supply
• from the receipt of the first error-free telegram after the telegram monitor
has responded (i.e. monitoring timeout).
U723 Timeout period for technology boards [SW 2.1 and later] 20 to 60 Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2723) [s] FS= 20 P051 = 40
* i001: Timeout period until F080 fault value 1 (no heartbeat) 1s Type: O2 on-line
i002: Timeout period until F080 fault value 6 (delay until initialization
is complete).
Additional permissible period after expiry of time set in index
001 for completion of initialization.
Example
U732.001 = 30, U732.002 = 20:
When the electronics supply is switched on, F080 fault value 1 is delayed by
30 s and F080 fault value 6 by 30s + 20s = 50s.

st
U728 Source for binector/connector converter for 1 CB/TB All binector numbers Ind: 16 P052 = 3
(2728) [SW 1.9 and later] 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* Type: L2 off-line
Binectors to be converted to connector K3020
st
(Z110) i001: 1 binector (bit 0)
nd
i002: 2 binector (bit 1)
...
th
i016: 16 binector (bit 15)
Settings:
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

11-160 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
nd
U729 Source for binector/connector converter for 2 CB [SW 1.9 and later] All binector numbers Ind: 16 P052 = 3
(2729) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* Binectors to be converted to connector K8020 Type: L2 off-line
i001: 1st binector (bit 0)
nd
(Z111) i002: 2 binector (bit 1)
...
th
i016: 16 binector (bit 15)
Settings:
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
n732 CB/TB diagnostics Ind: 68 P052 = 3
(2732) Type: O2
Diagnostic information about an installed communications board (CB) or
technology board (TB).
(Z110)
(Z111) i001 - i032: 1. CB/TB (lower slot ID letter)
i033 - i064: 2. CB (higher slot ID letter)
i065, i066: 1. CB/TB (internal diagnostic data)
i067, i068: 2. CB (internal diagnostic data)

For detailed information, please refer to operating instructions of relevant

CB or TB.
n733 CB/TB receive data Ind: 32 P052 = 3
(2733) Type: L2
Display of control words and setpoints (process data) that are transferred to
the basic converter from a communications board (CB) or technology board
(Z110) (TB).
(Z111) st st
i001: 1 process data word from 1 CB/TB
...
th st
i016 16 process data word from 1 CB/TB
st nd
i017: 1 process data word from 2 CB
...
th nd
i032: 16 process data word from 2 CB
U734 Transmit data for first CB/TB (lower slot ID letter) All connector Ind: 16 P052 = 3
(2734) numbers FS= Online
* Selection of connectors whose contents must be injected as transmit data to 1 i001: 32
the first communications board (CB) or technology board (TB). i002: 167
i003: 0
(Z110) 0 = connector K0000 i004: 33
1 = connector K0001 i005: 0
etc. to
This parameter not only defines the transmit data, but also their position in i016: 0
the transmit telegram. Type: L2

i001: Word 1 in PZD section of telegram

i002: Word 2 in PZD section of telegram
...
i016: Word 16 in PZD section of telegram
Status word 1 (K0032) should be linked to word 1.
n735 Display of transmit data to CB/TB Ind: 32 P052 = 3
(2735) st st Type: L2
i001: 1 process data word to 1 CB or TB
...
th st
(Z110) i016 16 process data word to 1 CB or TB
st nd
(Z111) i017: 1 process data word to 2 CB
...
th nd
i032: 16 process data word to 2 CB

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-161

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
U736 Transmit data for second CB (higher slot letter) All connector Ind: 16 P052 = 3
(2736) numbers FS=0 Online
* Selection of connectors whose contents must be injected as transmit data to 1 Type: L2
a communications board (CB) with a higher slot ID letter.

(Z111) 0 = connector K0000

1 = connector K0001
etc.

This parameter not only defines the transmit data, but also their position in
the transmit telegram.

i001: Word 1 in PZD section of telegram

i002: Word 2 in PZD section of telegram
...
i016: Word 16 in PZD section of telegram

Status word 1 (K0032) should be linked to word 1.

n738 Display of PKW job from supplementary boards Ind: 12 P052 = 3
(2738) st st Type: L2
i001: 1 word of PKW job from 1 CB
...
th st
(Z110) i004 4 word of PKW job from 1 CB
st nd
(Z111) i005: 1 word of PKW job from location 2 CB
...
th nd
i008 4 word of PKW job from 2 CB
st
i009: 1 word of PKW job from TB
...
th
i012: 4 word of PKW job from TB

Details refer to “Function diagrams”, Section 8 Sheets Z110 and Z111

n739 Display of PKW response to supplementary boards Ind: 12 P052 = 3
(2739) st st Type: L2
i001: 1 word of PKW job from 1 CB
...
th st
(Z110) i004 4 word of PKW job from 1 CB
st nd
(Z111) i005: 1 word of PKW job from location 2 CB
...
th nd
i008 4 word of PKW job from 2 CB
st
i009: 1 word of PKW job from TB
...
th
i012: 4 word of PKW job from TB

Details refer to “Function diagrams”, Section 8 Sheets Z110 and Z111

11.85 Configuring the SIMOLINK board

U740 SLB Node address [SW 1.5 and later] 0 to 200 Ind: 2 P052 = 3
1 FS=0 P051 =40
(2740) Node address of the SIMOLINK board (SLB) on the bus. The node address Type: O2 Offline
defines the telegrams to which the relevant board has write access. The
* node address also defines whether a node is to perform the additional
function of dispatcher.
(Z121)
0= Dispatcher (generates telegram circulation)
Not 0 = Transceiver

Only one node in a SIMOLINK ring may perform the function of dispatcher.
Node address 0 may not be assigned to any node if a higher-level PLC is
performing the dispatcher function as the SIMOLINK master. When an SLB
is selected to operate as dispatcher, all nodes must be assigned
consecutive addresses, starting with address 0 for the dispatcher.

i001: For first SLB in unit

i002: Reserved

11-162 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
U741 SLB Telegram failure time [SW 1.5 and later] 0 to 6500 Ind: 2 P052 = 3
[ms] FS=0 P051 =40
(2741) The telegram failure time defines the period within which a valid 1 Type: O2 Online
synchronizing telegram (SYNC telegram) must be received. Failure of any
* SYNC telegram to arrive within the set period indicates a communications
error. The unit activates fault message F015 (see also U753) as a function
(Z121) of U741.

0 = No telegram failure monitoring

i001: For first SLB in unit

i002: Reserved
U742 SLB Transmitter power [SW 1.5 and later] 1 to 3 Ind: 2 P052 = 3
1 FS=3 P051 =40
(2742) Setting of power of fiber optic transmitter Type: O2 Online
* 1 = 0m to 15m (length of plastic fiber optic cable)
2 = 15m to 25m (length of plastic fiber optic cable)
(Z121) 3 = 25m to 40m (length of plastic fiber optic cable)

Operation at a lower transmitter power increases the service life of the

transmitter and receiver modules. Reducing the transmitter power also
allows hidden fault sources on the transmission path (e.g. poor contacts on
fiber optics) to be detected.

i001: For first SLB in unit

i002: Reserved
U744 SLB Selection of active SLB board [SW 1.5 and later] All binector numbers Ind: None P052 = 3
FS=0 P051 =40
(2744) Selection of the active SIMOLINK board (SLB) when two SLBs are installed Type: L2 Online
in one unit.
*
0 = Binector B0000
1 = Binector B0001 etc.
A binector value of 0 means "SLB in low slot is active“.
A binector value of 1 is reserved for "SLB in high slot is active".
U745 SLB No. of channels [SW 1.5 and later] 1 to 8 Ind: 2 P052 = 3
1 FS=3 P051 =40
(2745) Number of channels which dispatcher provides for each transceiver. Type: O2 Offline
Together with U746, the number of channels determines the number of
* addressable nodes.
This parameter is relevant only for the dispatcher.
(Z121)
i001: For first SLB in unit
i002: Reserved
U746 SLB Cycle time [SW 1.5 and later] 0.20 to 6.50 Ind:2 P052 = 3
[ms] FS=1.20 P051 =40
(2746) The cycle time is the period required for all telegrams to be passed around 0.01 Type: O2 Offline
the SIMOLINK ring. Together with U745, the cycle time determines the
* number of addressable nodes.
This parameter is relevant only for the dispatcher.
(Z121)
i001: For first SLB in unit
i002: Reserved
Caution:
Settings 0.20 ms to 0.99 ms are permissible only if option S00 is not
activated. Otherwise F059 with fault value 3 is output.
If option S00 (free function blocks) is not activated and if an SLB cycle time
of < 1.00 ms is set in parameter U746, connectors K7001 to K7008 are
updated immediately every time a telegram is received. The other
connectors (K7009 to K7016) and binectors B7100 to B7915 are updated
only once in each computation cycle (= 1/6 line period). In addition, the
connectors selected in U751.001 to U751.008 are read with every transmit
telegram and the relevant up-to-date value transmitted. The connectors
selected in parameters U751.009 to U751.016 are read only once in each
computation cycle and written to the transmit buffer of the SLB.
[A cycle time of < 1.00 ms can be set in SW 1.9 and later]

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-163

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
n748 SLB Diagnosis [SW 1.5 and later] Ind: 16 P052 = 3
Type: O2
(2748) Visualization parameter which displays diagnostic information for an
installed SIMOLINK board (SLB)
(Z121) i001: Number of error-free synchronizing telegrams
i002: Number of CRC errors
i003: Number of timeout errors
i004: Last accessible bus address
i005: Address of node sending the special telegram "Timeout“
i006: Implemented bus cycle time
i007: Number of new configurations
i008: Reserved
...
i016: Reserved
U749 SLB Read address [SW 1.5 and later] 0.0 to 200.7 Ind: 8 P052 = 3
0.1 FS=0.0 P051 =40
(2749) Definition of node addresses and channels from which the SLB must read Type: O2 Offline
data (a total of 8 channels can be read according to the index entries). The
* digits before the decimal point in the input value define the node address
and those after the point the channel number (see also Section 7 "Starting
(Z122) up SIMOLINK boards" and Section 8, Sheet Z122).

Example:
2.0 = address 2 channel 0
n750 SLB Receive data [SW 1.5 and later] Ind: 16 P052 = 3
Type: L2
(2750) Visualization parameter for data received via the SIMOLINK board (see also
Section 7 "Starting up SIMOLINK boards" and Section 8 , Sheet Z122)
(Z122) i001: Word 1 in PZD section of telegram
...
i016: Word 16 in PZD section of telegram
U751 SLB Transmit data selection [SW 1.5 and later] All connector Ind: 16 P052 = 3
numbers FS=0 P051 =40
(2751) Selection of connectors whose contents must be transferred as transmit Type: L2 Offline
data by the SLB (see also Section 7 "Starting up SIMOLINK boards" and
* Section 8 , Sheet Z122).

(Z122) 0 = connector K0000

1 = connector K0001
etc.

In addition to the transmit data itself, its place in the transmit telegram is
also defined.

i001: Channel0, low word

i002: Channel0, high word
...
i015: Channel7, low word
i016: Channel7, high word
n752 SLB Display of transmit data [SW 1.5 and later] Ind: 16 P052 = 3
Type: L2
(2752) Process data transmitted by SLB via SIMOLINK in hexadecimal notation
(see also Section 7 "Starting up SIMOLINK boards" and Section 8 , Sheet
(Z122) Z122)
U753 SLB Fault delay [SW 1.5 and later] 0.0 to 100.0 Ind: None P052 = 3
[s] FS=0.0 P051 =40
(2753) Delay in activation of fault message F015 (see also U741) 0.1 Type: O2 Offline
* 0 = fault message is activated immediately the telegram failure monitor
(Z121) responds

11-164 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)

11.86 Configuring the EB1 expansion board

U755 Signal type of analog inputs on EB1 [SW 1.5 and later] 0 to 1 Ind: 2 P052 = 3
1 WE=0 P051 = 40
(2755) 0 = Voltage input 0 to ± 10 V Typ: O2 on-line
1 = Current input 0 to ± 20 mA
*
(Z112)
i001: AI1 of the first EB1
(Z115)
i002: AI1 of the second EB1
U756 Normalization of analog inputs on EB1 [SW 1.5 and later] -1000.0 to 1000.0 Ind: 6 P052 = 3
[%] WE=100,0 P051 = 40
(2756) This parameter specifies the percentage value which is generated for an 0.1% Typ: I2 on-line
input voltage of 10V (or an input current of 20mA) at the analog input.
(Z112) The following general rule applies:
(Z115)
With a voltage input:
Y X .. input voltage in volts
U 756 [%] = 10 V ∗
X
Y .. % value which is generated for input
voltage X
With a current input:
Y X .. input current in mA
U 756 [%] = 20 mA ∗
X
Y .. % value which is generated for input
current X

i001: AI1 of the first EB1

i002: AI2 of the first EB1
i003: AI3 of the first EB1
i004: AI1 of the second EB1
i005: AI2 of the second EB1
i006: AI3 of the second EB1
U757 Offset for analog inputs on EB1 [SW 1.5 and later] -100.00 to 100.00 Ind: 6 P052 = 3
[%] WE=0,00 P051 = 40
(2757) i001: AI1 of the first EB1 0.01% Typ: I2 on-line
i002: AI2 of the first EB1
i003: AI3 of the first EB1
(Z112) i004: AI1 of the second EB1
(Z115) i005: AI2 of the second EB1
i006: AI3 of the second EB1
U758 Mode of signal injection at analog inputs on EB1 [SW 1.5 and later] 0 to 3 Ind: 6 P052 = 3
1 WE=0 P051 = 40
(2758) 0= Injection of signal with sign Typ: O2 off-line
1= Injection of absolute value of signal
* 2= Injection of signal with sign, inverted
3= Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted
(Z112)
(Z115) i001: AI1 of the first EB1
i002: AI2 of the first EB1
i003: AI3 of the first EB1
i004: AI1 of the second EB1
i005: AI2 of the second EB1
i006: AI3 of the second EB1
U759 Source for selection of sign reversal at [SW 1.5 and later] All binector numbers Ind: 6 P052 = 3
analog inputs on EB1 1 WE=0 P051 = 40
(2759) Typ: L2 off-line
Selection of binector to control sign reversal at the analog input ("1" state
* = reverse sign)
0 = binector B0000
(Z112) 1 = binector B0001
(Z115) etc.
i001: AI1 of the first EB1
i002: AI2 of the first EB1
i003: AI3 of the first EB1
i004: AI1 of the second EB1
i005: AI2 of the second EB1
i006: AI3 of the second EB1

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-165

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
U760 Filtering time for analog inputs on EB1 [SW 1.5 and later] 0 to 10000 Ind: 6 P052 = 3
[ms] WE=0 P051 = 40
(2760) Note: Hardware filtering of approximately 0.2 ms is applied as standard 1ms Typ: O2 on-line
*
i001: AI1 of the first EB1
i002: AI2 of the first EB1
(Z112) i003: AI3 of the first EB1
(Z115) i004: AI1 of the second EB1
i005: AI2 of the second EB1
i006: AI3 of the second EB1
U761 Source for enabling of analog inputs on EB1 [SW 1.5 and later] All binector numbers Ind: 6 P052 = 3
1 WE=1 P051 = 40
(2761) Selection of binector to control enabling of the analog input ("1" state = Typ: L2 off-line
enabled)
*
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
(Z112) etc.
(Z115)
i001: AI1 of the first EB1
i002: AI2 of the first EB1
i003: AI3 of the first EB1
i004: AI1 of the second EB1
i005: AI2 of the second EB1
i006: AI3 of the second EB1
n762 Display of analog inputs on EB1 [SW 1.5 and later] -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: 6 P052 = 3
[%] Typ: I2
(2762) i001: AI1 of the first EB1 0.01%
i002: AI2 of the first EB1
i003: AI3 of the first EB1
(Z112) i004: AI1 of the second EB1
(Z115) i005: AI2 of the second EB1
i006: AI3 of the second EB1
U763 Source for output value at analog outputs on EB1 [SW 1.5 and later] All connector Ind: 4 P052 = 3
numbers WE=0 P051 = 40
(2763) Selection of connector whose value must be output at the analog output 1 Typ: L2 on-line
* 0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
(Z113) etc.
(Z116)
i001: AO1 of the first EB1
i002: AO2 of the first EB1
i003: AO1 of the second EB1
i004: AO2 of the second EB1
U764 Mode of signal injection at analog outputs on EB1 [SW 1.5 and later] 0 to 3 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
1 WE=0 P051 = 40
(2764) 0= Injection of signal with sign Typ: O2 on-line
1= Injection of absolute value of signal
* 2= Injection of signal with sign, inverted
3= Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted
(Z113)
(Z116) i001: AO1 of the first EB1
i002: AO2 of the first EB1
i003: AO1 of the second EB1
i004: AO2 of the second EB1
U765 Filtering time for analog outputs on EB1 [SW 1.5 and later] 0 to 10000 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[ms] WE=0 P051 = 40
(2765) i001: AO1 of the first EB1 1ms Typ: O2 on-line
* i002: AO2 of the first EB1
(Z113) i003: AO1 of the second EB1
(Z116) i004: AO2 of the second EB1

11-166 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
U766 Normalization of analog outputs on EB1 [SW 1.5 and later] -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[V] WE=10,00 P051 = 40
(2766) U766 0.01V Typ: I2 on-line
y [V ] = x ∗
100%

(Z113) x = normalization input (corresponds to filtering output)

(Z116) y = normalization output (corresponds to output voltage at analog output
with an offset of 0)

i001: AO1 of the first EB1

i002: AO2 of the first EB1
i003: AO1 of the second EB1
i004: AO2 of the second EB1
U767 Offset for analog outputs on EB1 [SW 1.5 and later] -10.00 to 10.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[V] WE=0,00 P051 = 40
(2767) i001: AO1 of the first EB1 0.01V Typ: I2 on-line
i002: AO2 of the first EB1
(Z113) i003: AO1 of the second EB1
(Z116) i004: AO2 of the second EB1
n768 Display of analog outputs on EB1 [SW 1.5 and later] -200.0 to 199.99 Ind: 4 P052 = 3
[%] Typ: I2
(2768) i001: AO1 of the first EB1 0.01%
i002: AO2 of the first EB1
(Z113) i003: AO1 of the second EB1
(Z116) i004: AO2 of the second EB1
U769 Source for output values at binary outputs on EB1 [SW 1.5 and later] All binector numbers Ind: 8 P052 = 3
1 WE=0 P051 = 40
(2769) Selection of binectors to be applied to binary outputs at terminals 43 - 46. Typ: L2 off-line
* 0 = Binector B0000
1 = Binector B0001
etc.
(Z114)
(Z117)
i001: BO1 of the first EB1
i002: BO2 of the first EB1
i003: BO3 of the first EB1
i004: BO4 of the first EB1
i005: BO1 of the second EB1
i006: BO2 of the second EB1
i007: BO3 of the second EB1
i008: BO4 of the second EB1
n770 Display of status of binary inputs and outputs on EB1 Ind: 2 P052 = 3
[SW 1.5 and later] Typ: V2
(2770)
Representation on operator panel (PMU):
(Z114)
(Z117)
6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Segment ON: Corresponding terminal is activated

(HIGH level is applied)
Segment OFF: Corresponding terminal is not activated
(LOW level is applied)

Segment or bit
0 ....... Terminal 40
1 ....... Terminal 41
2 ....... Terminal 42
3 ....... Terminal 43
4 ....... Terminal 44
5 ....... Terminal 45
6 ....... Terminal 46

i001: Terminal states of first EB1

i002: Terminal states of second EB1

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-167

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)

11.87 Configuring the EB2 expansion board

n773 Display of status of binary inputs and outputs on EB2 Ind: 2 P052 = 3
[SW 1.5 and later] Type: V2
(2773)
Representation on operator panel (PMU):
(Z118)
(Z119)
5 4 3 2 1 0

Segment ON: Corresponding terminal is activated

(HIGH level is applied)
Segment OFF: Corresponding terminal is not activated
(LOW level is applied)

Segment or bit
0 ........ Terminal 53
1 ........ Terminal 54
2 ........ Terminal 39
3 ........ Terminal 41
4 ........ Terminal 43
5 ........ Terminal 45

i001: Terminal states of first EB2

i002: Terminal states of second EB2
U774 Source for output values at binary outputs on EB2 [SW 1.5 and later] All binector numbers Ind: 8 P052 = 3
1 FS=0 P051 = 40
(2774) Selection of binectors to be applied to binary outputs at terminals 39 - 46. Type: L2 Online
* 0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
(Z118)
(Z119) i001: BO1 of the first EB2
i002: BO2 of the first EB2
i003: BO3 of the first EB2
i004: BO4 of the first EB2
i005: BO1 of the second EB2
i006: BO2 of the second EB2
i007: BO3 of the second EB2
i008: BO4 of the second EB2
U775 Signal type of analog input on EB2 [SW 1.5 and later] 0 to 1 Ind: 2 P052 = 3
1 FS=0 P051 = 40
(2775) 0 = voltage input 0 to ± 10 V Type: O2 Online
1 = current input 0 to ± 20 mA
*
(Z118)
i001: AI1 of the first EB2
(Z119)
i002: AI1 of the second EB2
U776 Normalization of analog input on EB2 [SW 1.5 and later] -1000.0 to 1000.0 Ind: 2 P052 = 3
[%] FS=100.0 P051 = 40
(2776) This parameter specifies the percentage value which is generated for an 0.1% Type: I2 Online
input voltage of 10V (or an input current of 20mA) at the analog input.
(Z118) The following general rule applies:
(Z119) With a voltage input:
Y X .. input voltage in volts
U 776 [%] = 10 V ∗
X
Y .. % value which is generated for input
voltage X
With a current input:
Y X .. input current in mA
U 776 [%] = 20 mA ∗
X
Y .. % value which is generated for input
current X

i001: AI of the first EB2

i002: AI of the second EB2

11-168 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
U777 Offset for analog input on EB2 [SW 1.5 and later] -100.00 to 100.00 Ind: 2 P052 = 3
[%] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
(2777) i001: AI of the first EB2 0.01% Type: I2 Online
(Z118) i002: AI of the second EB2
(Z119)
U778 Mode of signal injection at analog input on EB2 [SW 1.5 and later] 0 to 3 Ind: 2 P052 = 3
1 FS=0 P051 = 40
(2778) 0= Injection of signal with sign Type: O2 Offline
1= Injection of absolute value of signal
* 2= Injection of signal with sign, inverted
3= Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted
(Z118)
(Z119) i001: AI of the first EB2
i002: AI of the second EB2
U779 Source for selection of sign reversal at [SW 1.5 and later] All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
analog input on EB2 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
(2779) Type: L2 Offline
Selection of binector to control sign reversal at the analog input ("1" state
* = reverse sign)

(Z118)
(Z119) 0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

i001: AI of the first EB2

i002: AI of the second EB2
U780 Filtering time for analog input on EB2 [SW 1.5 and later] 0 to 10000 Ind: 2 P052 = 3
[ms] FS=0 P051 = 40
(2780) Note: Hardware filtering of approximately 0.2 ms is applied as standard 1ms Type: O2 Online
(Z118) i001: AI of the first EB2
(Z119) i002: AI of the second EB2
U781 Source for enabling of analog inputs on EB2 [SW 1.5 and later] All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3
1 FS=1 P051 = 40
(2781) Selection of binector to control enabling of the analog input ("1" state = Type: L2 Offline
enabled)
*
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
(Z118) etc.
(Z119)
i001: AI of the first EB2
i002: AI of the second EB2
n782 Display of analog input on EB2 [SW 1.5 and later] -200.0 to 199.99 Ind: 2 P052 = 3
[%] Type: I2
(2782) i001: AI of the first EB2 0.01%
(Z118) i002: AI of the second EB2
(Z119)
U783 Source for output value at analog output on EB2 [SW 1.5 and later] All connector Ind: 2 P052 = 3
numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
(2783) Selection of connector whose value must be output at the analog output 1 Type: L2 Online
* 0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
(Z118)
(Z119)
i001: AO of the first EB2
i002: AO of the second EB2
U784 Mode of signal injection at analog output on EB2 [SW 1.5 and later] 0 to 3 Ind: 2 P052 = 3
1 FS=0 P051 = 40
(2784) 0= Injection of signal with sign Type: O2 Online
1= Injection of absolute value of signal
* 2= Injection of signal with sign, inverted
3= Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted
(Z118)
(Z119) i001: AO of the first EB2
i002: AO of the second EB2

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-169

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
U785 Filtering time for analog outputs on EB2 [SW 1.5 and later] 0 to 10000 Ind: 2 P052 = 3
[ms] FS=0 P051 = 40
(2785) i001: AO of the first EB2 1ms Type: O2 Online
(Z118) i002: AO of the second EB2
(Z119)
U786 Normalization of analog outputs on EB2 [SW 1.5 and later] -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: 2 P052 = 3
[V] FS=10.00 P051 = 40
(2786) U786 0.01V Type: I2 Online
y [V ] = x ∗
100%

(Z118) x = normalization input (corresponds to filtering output)

(Z119) y = normalization output (corresponds to output voltage at analog output
with an offset of 0)

i001: AO of the first EB2

i002: AO of the second EB2
U787 Offset for analog output on EB2 [SW 1.5 and later] -10.00 to 10.00 Ind: 2 P052 = 3
[V] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
(2787) i001: AO of the first EB2 0.01V Type: I2 Online
(Z118) i002: AO of the second EB2
(Z119)
n788 Display of analog outputs on EB2 [SW 1.5 and later] -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: 2 P052 = 3
[%] Type: I2
(2788) i001: AO of the first EB2 0.01%
(Z118) i002: AO of the second EB2
(Z119)

11.88 Configuring the SBP pulse encoder board

U790 Configuration of input level of A/B and CRTL tracks and Zero pulse 0 to 3 Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2790) [SW 1.5 and later] 1 FS=1 P051 = 40
* Type: O2 Offline
i001: A/B and CRTL track
(Z120) i002: Zero pulse

0: HTL unipolar
1: TTL unipolar
2: HTL differential input
3: TTL/RS422 differential input
U791 Configuration of encoder supply voltage [SW 1.5 and later] 0 to 1 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2791) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
The supply is subject to a current limit of 250mA Type: O2 Offline
* Caution: Setting the parameter incorrectly can damage the encoder (i.e. 15
V voltage for an encoder which requires a 5 V supply).
(Z120)
0: 5V voltage supply
1: 15V voltage supply
U792 Number of pulses per revolution [SW 1.5 and later] 100 to 20000 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2792) 1 FS=1024 P051 = 40
Number of lines on one track around circumference of disk Type: O2 Offline
*
(Z120)
U793 Encoder type [SW 1.5 and later] 0 to 1 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2793) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
0: Encoder with A/B track (two tracks displaced by 90 degrees) Type: O2 Offline
* 1: Encoder with separate forward and reverse tracks
(Z120)
U794 Reference speed [SW 1.5 and later] 50.0 to 6500.0 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2794) [rev/min] FS=500.0 P051 = 40
When actual speed = reference speed a value of 100% is output in the 0.1 Type: O2 Online
(Z120) appropriate diagnostic parameter (n795) and connector
n795 Display of actual speed in % of reference speed [SW 1.5 and later] -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2795) [%] Type: I2
(Z120)
U796 Resetting the position counter [SW 2.0 and later] 0 to 2 Ind: none P052 = 2
(2796) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* Setting the type of resetting for position acquisition Type: O2 online
S00 0 = free-running (no reset)
(Z120) 1 = see function diagram Z120
2 = see function diagram Z120

11-170 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)

11.89 Configuration of paralleling interface

Notes about parameterization of the paralleling interface see Chapter 6.3.2
U800 Control word for paralleling interface 0 to 2 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2800) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0: Paralleling interface not active Type: O2 Offline
1: Paralleling interface active
The gating pulses are generated by this SIMOREG converter
(G195) 2: Paralleling interface active
The gating pulses of the master are used
Must also be set if a SIMOREG CCP is used
U803 Operating mode for the parallel connection [SW 1.7 and later] 0 to 1 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2803) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 Standard mode Type: O2 off-line
All parallel-connected SIMOREG devices must be in continuous
operation. Failure (fault message, fuse blown) of one of the
(G195) parallel-connected SIMOREG devices causes immediate pulse
disabling for all SIMOREG devices.
1 "N+1 mode" (redundancy mode)
On failure (fault message, fuse blown) of one of the parallel-
connected SIMOREG devices, operation is maintained with the
remaining SIMOREG devices.
U804 Transmit data on paralleling interface All connector Ind: 10 P052 = 3
(2804) numbers FS=0 P051 = 40
* Selection of connectors whose contents must be injected as transmit data 1 Type: L2 Online
(master to slaves or slave to master) for the paralleling interface.

(G195) 0 = connector K0000

1 = connector K0001
etc.

This parameter not only defines the transmit data, but also their position in
the transmit telegram.
i001: Word 1 of telegram
...
i005: Word 5 of telegram
i006: word 1 of the telegram, if "standby master" [SW 1.7 and later]
...
i010: word 5 of the telegram, if "standby master" [SW 1.7 and later]
Indices .06 to .10 of U804 are activated on the master and the standby
master when the “master” function is transferred to the standby master
U805 Control word for bus terminator of paralleling interface 0 to 1 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2805) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
0: No bus terminator Type: O2 Online
(G195) 1: Bus terminator active
U806 Address for the parallel connection of SIMOREG devices see column on left Ind: 2 P052 = 3
(2806) FS=2 P051 = 40
* i001: Address of the masters or of the slaves Type: O2 off-line
i002: Address of the "standby master" or slaves [SW 1.7 and later]

(G195) 2: Slave device with address 2

3: Slave device with address 3
4: Slave device with address 4
5: Slave device with address 5
6: Slave device with address 6
12: Master device for 1 slave device with address 2
13: Master device for 2 slave devices with addresses 2 and 3
14: Master device for 3 slave devices with addresses 2, 3 and 4
15: Master device for 4 slave devices with addresses 2, 3, 4 and 5
16: Master device for 5 slave devices with addresses 2, 3, 4, 5 and
6
In "Standard" mode (U803 = 0), i001 and i002 must be set to the same
value.
In "N+1 mode" (U803 = 1), a SIMOREG device has the "master" function, a
SIMOREG device has the "standby Master" function and all other devices
are slaves. In the slaves, i001 and i002 must be set to the same value.
On the master, a value of 12 to 16 must be set in i001, in i002 a value of 2
to 6.
In the "standby master", a value of 2 to 6 must be set in i001, in i002 a value
of 12 to 16.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-171

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
U807 Telegram failure time on paralleling interface 0.000 to 65.000 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2807) [s] FS=0.100 P051 = 40
0 No time monitoring 0.001s Type: O2 Online
0.001...65.000 Permissible time interval between two data exchange
(G195) operations before a fault message is output.

Fault message F014 is displayed if no data are exchanged with the parallel-
connected converter within this delay period.
The monitoring function is implemented within a 20 ms cycle. For this
reason, only setting values which constitute a multiple of 20 ms are
meaningful.

Note:
The telegram monitoring function is active
• from the receipt of the first error-free telegram after connection of the
electronics power supply
• from the receipt of the first error-free telegram after the telegram monitor
has responded (i.e. monitoring timeout).
U808 Source for triggering of message F014 6040, 6041 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2808) FS=6040 P051 = 40
* Selection of binector which must trigger message F014 when it switches to Type: L2 Offline
log. "1"
(G195) 6040 = binector B6040
6041 = binector B6041
n809 Diagnostic information for paralleling interface 0 to 65535 Ind: 9 P052 ≥ 0
(2809) Type: O2
i001 to i009 = Free-running counter, overflow at 65535

(G195) i001: Number of error-free telegrams

i002: Number of errored telegrams
i003: Transmit Error Counter
i004: Receive Error Counter
i005: Phase Error Counter
i006: Baud rate Error Counter
i007: Bad BCC Counter
i008: Timeout Counter
i009: Number of telegrams with unknown identifier

11-172 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
n810 Diagnostic information for the paralleling interface Ind: None P052 = 3
(2810) Type: V2

(G195) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Unit with active “master” function

Segment
0 .......
1 .......
2 ....... ON: Slave with address 2 responding
3 ....... ON: Slave with address 3 responding
4 ....... ON: Slave with address 4 responding
5 ....... ON: Slave with address 5 responding
6 ....... ON: Slave with address 6 responding
7 .......
8 ....... OFF
9 ....... OFF
10 .......
11 .......
12 .......
13 .......
14 .......
15 ....... ON: Master function active

Unit with “slave” function

Segment
0 .......
1 .......
2 ....... ON: Data for slave with address 2 are ok
3 ....... ON: Data for slave with address 3 are ok
4 ....... ON: Data for slave with address 4 are ok
5 ....... ON: Data for slave with address 5 are ok
6 ....... ON: Data for slave with address 6 are ok
7 .......
8 ....... ON: Slave function active
9 ....... ON: Firing pulses of master are used
10 .......
11 .......
12 .......
13 .......
14 .......
15 ....... OFF

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-173

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
n812 Receive data on paralleling interface 0000 to FFFFH Ind: 25 P052 ≥ 0
(2812) 1 Type: L2
When U806=1 (master) is selected
i001 Receive data from slave with address 2, word 1
(G195) ...
i005 Receive data from slave with address 2, word 5
i006 Receive data from slave with address 3, word 1
...
i010 Receive data from slave with address 3, word 5
i011 Receive data from slave with address 4, word 1
...
i015 Receive data from slave with address 4, word 5
i016 Receive data from slave with address 5, word 1
...
i020 Receive data from slave with address 5, word 5
i021 Receive data from slave with address 6, word 1
...
i025 Receive data from slave with address 6, word 5

When U806=2 to 6 (slave) is selected:

i001 Receive data from master, word 1
...
i005 Receive data from master, word 5
i006 Not in use
...
i025 Not in use
n813 Transmit data on paralleling interface 0 to FFFFH Ind: 5 P052 ≥ 0
(2813) Type: L2
When U806=1 (master) is selected
i001 Transmit data to slaves, word 1
(G195) ...
i005 Transmit data to slaves, word 5

When U806=2 to 6 (slave) is selected:

i001 Transmit data to master, word 1
...
i005 Transmit data to master, word 5

11.90 Parameters for SIMOREG DC-MASTER Control Module (SIMOREG CM)

U819 These parameters have no meaning for SIMOREG DC-MASTER!
to The SIMOREG CM (Control Module, control section for converting or
U835 upgrading systems) requires these parameters.
(2819 to (for details see operating instructions for SIMOREG CM, order No.
2835) 6RX1700-0BD76)

11.91 Rated DC current of external field device

U838 Rated DC current of external field device [SW 1.9 and later] 0.00 to 600.00 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2838) [A] FS=0.00 P051 = 40
* 0.00 Parameter not yet set 0.01A Type: O2 on-line

Note:
This parameter is operative only if P082 >= 21.

11-174 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)

11.92 Simulation operation

Simulation operation
Simulation operation is used to test the power section (measurement of the firing pulses with a current probe). Firing pulses are output to
a single thyristor (pulse distance = 20 ms, pulse duration = approx. 1 ms, firing pulse chopping as in normal operation). The thyristor is
selected with parameter U840. The line voltage does not have to be applied during simulation operation.
Simulation operation is activated by setting a value > 0 in Parameter U840.
Simulation operation is then actually started when the SIMOREG DC-MASTER is in an operating state ≥ o7.
As soon as the SIMOREG DC-MASTER is in simulation operation, it goes into operating state o8.1 (simulation operation).
Simulation operation is exited by resetting parameter U840 to zero.
U840 Control parameters for simulation operation [SW 1.7 and later] 0, Ind: None P052 = 3
(2840) 11 to 16, FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 No simulation operation 21 to 26 Type: O2 off-line
11 Firing cable 11 1
...
16 Firing cable 16
21 Firing cable 21
...
26 Firing cable 26

11.93 Parameter for DriveMonitor

U845 These parameters are used by DriveMonitor
to
n909
(2845 to
2909)

11.94 Slot deactivation

U910 Slot deactivation parameter [SW 1.9 and later] 0 and 1 Ind: 5 P052 = 3
(2910) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* Parameter for deactivating supplementary boards, e.g. during start-up or Type: O2 off-line
troubleshooting (for details of slot identification codes, see diagram under
(G101) parameter r063)

i001: -
i002: Slot D
i003: Slot E
i004: Slot F
i005: Slot G

0 Board in slot active

1 Board in slot not active

The deactivated slot is ignored during the search for installed

supplementary boards when the supply voltage is next switched on.
Likewise, activation of a slot does not take effect until the supply voltage
has been switched off and on again.
Note:
Slot E can simply be deactivated to conceal a technology board (large
format).
If a communications board is installed in addition to the technology board,
and the technology board is concealed, then the communications board will
not be processed either.

11.95 Parameter for DriveMonitor

U911 These parameters are used by DriveMonitor
to
n949
(2911 to
2949)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-175

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)

11.96 Technology software in the basic converter, Option S00: Sampling times
Only active with optional technology software S00
Sampling times
For each function block of the technology software S00, it is necessary to define in which "time slice" (i.e. with which sampling time) it is
processed.
5 time slices are available:

Time slice Sampling time .

1 1 * T0 (firing-pulse-synchronous time slice) T0 = Mean distance between 2 firing pulses
2 2 * T0 (firing-pulse-synchronous time slice) T0 = 3.33 ms at 50 Hz line frequency
4 4 * T0 (firing-pulse-synchronous time slice) T0 = 2.78 ms at 60 Hz line frequency
10 20 ms (not firing-pulse-synchronous )
20 Block is not calculated
U950 Selection of time slices for function blocks FB1 to FB100 1, 2, 4, 10, 20 Ind: 100 P052 = 3
(2950) FS= P051 = 40
* Time Time see column off-line
Function Function
S00 Index slice Index slice on left
block block
(FS) (FS) Type: O2
i001 FB1 20 i051 FB51 1
i002 FB2 20 i052 FB52 1
i003 FB3 1 i053 FB53 1
i004 FB4 1 i054 FB54 10
i005 FB5 1 i055 FB55 1
i006 FB6 1 i056 FB56 1
i007 FB7 1 i057 FB57 1
i008 FB8 1 i058 FB58 10
i009 FB9 1 i059 FB59 20
i010 FB10 1 i060 FB60 1
i011 FB11 1 i061 FB61 1
i012 FB12 1 i062 FB62 1
i013 FB13 1 i063 FB63 1
i014 FB14 1 i064 FB64 20
i015 FB15 1 i065 FB65 1
i016 FB16 10 i066 FB66 1
i017 FB17 10 i067 FB67 1
i018 FB18 10 i068 FB68 20
i019 FB19 10 i069 FB69 20
i020 FB20 1 i070 FB70 1
i021 FB21 1 i071 FB71 1
i022 FB22 1 i072 FB72 1
i023 FB23 1 i073 FB73 1
i024 FB24 1 i074 FB74 1
i025 FB25 1 i075 FB75 1
i026 FB26 1 i076 FB76 1
i027 FB27 1 i077 FB77 1
i028 FB28 1 i078 FB78 1
i029 FB29 1 i079 FB79 1
i030 FB30 1 i080 FB80 1
i031 FB31 1 i081 FB81 1
i032 FB32 2 i082 FB82 1
i033 FB33 2 i083 FB83 1
i034 FB34 2 i084 FB84 1
i035 FB35 1 i085 FB85 1
i036 FB36 1 i086 FB86 1
i037 FB37 1 i087 FB87 1
i038 FB38 1 i088 FB88 1
i039 FB39 20 i089 FB89 20
i040 FB40 1 i090 FB90 1
i041 FB41 1 i091 FB91 1
i042 FB42 2 i092 FB92 1
i043 FB43 2 i093 FB93 1
i044 FB44 2 i094 FB94 1
i045 FB45 1 i095 FB95 1
i046 FB46 1 i096 FB96 1
i047 FB47 1 i097 FB97 1
i048 FB48 20 i098 FB98 1
i049 FB49 20 i099 FB99 1
i050 FB50 1 i100 FB100 1

11-176 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
U951 Selection of time slices for function blocks FB101 to FB200 1, 2, 4, 10, 20 Ind: 100 P052 = 3
(2951) FS= P051 = 40
* Time Time see column off-line
Function Function
S00 Index slice Index slice on left
block block
(FS) (FS) Type: O2
i001 FB101 1 i051 FB151 1
i002 FB102 1 i052 FB152 1
i003 FB103 1 i053 FB153 1
i004 FB104 1 i054 FB154 1
i005 FB105 1 i055 FB155 1
i006 FB106 1 i056 FB156 1
i007 FB107 1 i057 FB157 1
i008 FB108 1 i058 FB158 1
i009 FB109 1 i059 FB159 1
i010 FB110 1 i060 FB160 1
i011 FB111 1 i061 FB161 1
i012 FB112 1 i062 FB162 1
i013 FB113 1 i063 FB163 1
i014 FB114 1 i064 FB164 1
i015 FB115 1 i065 FB165 1
i016 FB116 2 i066 FB166 1
i017 FB117 20 i067 FB167 1
i018 FB118 1 i068 FB168 1
i019 FB119 1 i069 FB169 1
i020 FB120 1 i070 FB170 1
i021 FB121 1 i071 FB171 1
i022 FB122 1 i072 FB172 1
i023 FB123 1 i073 FB173 1
i024 FB124 1 i074 FB174 1
i025 FB125 1 i075 FB175 1
i026 FB126 1 i076 FB176 1
i027 FB127 1 i077 FB177 1
i028 FB128 1 i078 FB178 1
i029 FB129 1 i079 FB179 1
i030 FB130 1 i080 FB180 1
i031 FB131 1 i081 FB181 1
i032 FB132 1 i082 FB182 1
i033 FB133 1 i083 FB183 1
i034 FB134 1 i084 FB184 1
i035 FB135 1 i085 FB185 1
i036 FB136 1 i086 FB186 1
i037 FB137 1 i087 FB187 1
i038 FB138 1 i088 FB188 1
i039 FB139 1 i089 FB189 1
i040 FB140 1 i090 FB190 1
i041 FB141 1 i091 FB191 1
i042 FB142 1 i092 FB192 1
i043 FB143 1 i093 FB193 1
i044 FB144 1 i094 FB194 1
i045 FB145 1 i095 FB195 1
i046 FB146 1 i096 FB196 10
i047 FB147 1 i097 FB197 10
i048 FB148 20 i098 FB198 10
i049 FB149 20 i099 FB199 10
i050 FB150 1 i100 FB200 1

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-177

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
U952 Selection of time slices for function blocks FB201 to FB300 1, 2, 4, 10, 20 Ind: 100 P052 = 3
(2952) FS= P051 = 40
* Time Time see column off-line
Function Function
S00 Index slice Index slice on left
block block
(FS) (FS) Type: O2
i001 FB201 1 i051 FB251 1
i002 FB202 1 i052 FB252 1
i003 FB203 1 i053 FB253 1
i004 FB204 1 i054 FB254 1
i005 FB205 1 i055 FB255 20
i006 FB206 1 i056 FB256 1
i007 FB207 1 i057 FB257 1
i008 FB208 1 i058 FB258 1
i009 FB209 1 i059 FB259 1
i010 FB210 1 i060 FB260 10
i011 FB211 1 i061 FB261 10
i012 FB212 10 i062 FB262 10
i013 FB213 10 i063 FB263 10
i014 FB214 10 i064 FB264 10
i015 FB215 1 i065 FB265 10
i016 FB216 1 i066 FB266 10
i017 FB217 1 i067 FB267 10
i018 FB218 1 i068 FB268 10
i019 FB219 1 i069 FB269 10
i020 FB220 1 i070 FB270 10
i021 FB221 1 i071 FB271 10
i022 FB222 1 i072 FB272 10
i023 FB223 1 i073 FB273 10
i024 FB224 1 i074 FB274 10
i025 FB225 1 i075 FB275 10
i026 FB226 1 i076 FB276 10
i027 FB227 1 i077 FB277 10
i028 FB228 1 i078 FB278 10
i029 FB229 10 i079 FB279 10
i030 FB230 1 i080 FB280 10
i031 FB231 1 i081 FB281 10
i032 FB232 1 i082 FB282 10
i033 FB233 1 i083 FB283 10
i034 FB234 20 i084 FB284 10
i035 FB235 20 i085 FB285 10
i036 FB236 20 i086 FB286 10
i037 FB237 20 i087 FB287 10
i038 FB238 20 i088 FB288 10
i039 FB239 20 i089 FB289 10
i040 FB240 1 i090 FB290 10
i041 FB241 1 i091 FB291 10
i042 FB242 1 i092 FB292 10
i043 FB243 1 i093 FB293 10
i044 FB244 1 i094 FB294 10
i045 FB245 1 i095 FB295 10
i046 FB246 10 i096 FB296 10
i047 FB247 10 i097 FB297 10
i048 FB248 10 i098 FB298 10
i049 FB249 10 i099 FB299 20
i050 FB250 1 i100 FB300 20

11.97 Parameter for DriveMonitor

n953 These parameters are used by DriveMonitor
to
n959
(2953 to
2959)

11-178 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)

11.98 Technology software in basic unit, S00 option:

Altering the processing sequence of function blocks
Only active with optional technology software S00
Processing sequence of function blocks
The function blocks of the S00 technology software are processed within the computational cycle in the sequence defined in parameters
U960 to U962:
1. Function block with number set in U960 index.001
...
100. Function block with number set in U960 index.100
101. Function block with number set in U961 index.001
...
200. Function block with number set in U961 index.100
201. Function block with number set in U962 index.001
etc.
The numbers are parameterized in ascending sequence (1, 2, 3, …) in the factory setting (standard sequence).

Altering the processing sequence:

If a new function block number is entered (i.e. moved from another location) in a certain index of parameter U960, U961 or U962, then the
new processing sequence is defined such that the function block previously entered in this index will be processed after the newly entered
block. The gap which may be left at the old location of the moved (newly entered) function block is closed by shifting the function block
numbers behind the space forward by one position.

Example 1:
Starting with the standard sequence setting, the processing sequence must be altered such that function block 90 (analog signal selector
switch) will be processed immediately after function block 83 (tracking/storage element):
Function block no. 90 must be entered in the index in which the number of the function block previously processed after block 83 (84 in
U960.9065) is currently stored. Function block numbers (84 and 85) in the following indices of U960 will be shifted up to the next index
automatically.

Function Processing Function Processing

block sequence block sequence

91 U960.Index 068 91 U960.Index 068

90 U960.Index 067 85 U960.Index 067
85 U960.Index 066 84 U960.Index 066
84 U960.Index 065 90 U960.Index 065
83 U960.Index 064 83 U960.Index 064
82 U960.Index 063 82 U960.Index 063
81 U960.Index 062 81 U960.Index 062

Example 2:
Starting with the standard sequence setting, the processing sequence must be altered such that function block 38 (sign inverter) will be
processed immediately after function block 45 (divider):
Function block number 38 must be entered in the index in which the number of the function block previously processed after function block
45 (46 in U960.i035) is currently stored. The function block numbers stored in the indices immediately above this position shift up by one
index, then all numbers immediately above the gap left shift down automatically by one index.

Function Processing Function Processing Function Processing

block sequence block sequence block sequence
47
47 U960.Index 036 46 U960.Index 036 47 U960.Index 036
46 U960.Index 035 38 U960.Index 035 46 U960.Index 035
45 U960.Index 034 45 U960.Index 034 38 U960.Index 034
41 U960.Index 033 41 U960.Index 033 45 U960.Index 033
40 U960.Index 032 40 U960.Index 032 41 U960.Index 032
38 U960.Index 031 U960.Index 031 40 U960.Index 031
37 U960.Index 030 37 U960.Index 030 37 U960.Index 030

U960 Processing sequence of function blocks of S00 technology Numbers of all Ind: 100 P052 = 3
(2960) software (1) function blocks FS= P051 = 40
* st Standard Offline
S00 i001: Number of function block for 1 place in processing sequence
sequence Type: O2
nd
i002: Number of function block for 2 place in processing
sequence
etc.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-179

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
U961 Processing sequence of function blocks of S00 technology Numbers of all Ind: 100 P052 = 3
(2961) software (2) function blocks FS= P051 = 40
* st Standard Offline
S00 i001: Number of function block for 101 place in processing sequence sequence
nd
i002: Number of function block for 102 place in processing Type: O2
sequence
etc.
U962 Processing sequence of function blocks of S00 technology Numbers of all Ind: 100 P052 = 3
(2962) software (3) function blocks FS= P051 = 40
* st Standard Offline
S00 i001: Number of function block for 201 place in processing sequence sequence
nd
i002: Number of function block for 202 place in processing Type: O2
sequence
etc.
U969 Automatic setting and activation of the execution sequence 0 to 4 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2969) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* 0 Return Type: O2 off-line
S00 1 Set standard sequence:
The numbers of the function blocks are entered in ascending
order in Parameters U960, U961 and U962. The parameter is
then automatically set to value 0.
2 Set optimum sequence:
U960, U961, and U962 are set in such a way that as few
deadtimes as possible occur. After that, the parameter is
automatically set to value 0 again.
3 Set standard setting of the sampling times.
U950, U951, and U952 are set to the factory setting.
4 Automatic activation / deactivation:
U950, U951 and U952 are set in such a way that the unwired
function blocks are deselected and the wired function blocks are
selected (activated), if they are not yet selected.
The time slice 10 (sampling time 20 ms) is set for all function
blocks not previously activated, the time slice is left unchanged
for all previously activated function blocks.
In order to ensure that this function also functions correctly for
function blocks FB261 to FB269 (PI controllers 2 to 10), the
value 0 is to be set for PI controllers 2 to 10 which are not used
and this must be done at the corresponding indices U544.i002
to i010 before this function is used.

11-180 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)

11.99 Enabling of technology software in basic unit, S00 option

("freely assignable function blocks")

The S00 technology option can only be utilized on SIMOREG DC-MASTER converters on which this option has been enabled by a proper
PIN number. The software remains enabled after software updates, i.e. it need not be enabled again after new software has been
installed.
Permanent enabling of S00 technology option (subject to charge):
Please proceed as follows if you wish to enable the S00 technology option:
1. Find out the serial number of your SIMOREG DC-MASTER unit (e.g. "Q6K31253320005"):
• The serial number is specified on the delivery note
• The serial number is printed on the rating plate of the SIMOREG DC-MASTER
• The serial number can be displayed in parameter r069 on the OP1S
2. Find out the PIN number (a number between 2001 and 65535) which matches the converter serial number:
• If you have ordered the SIMOREG DC-MASTER with S00 option, you will find the PIN number printed on a sticker on the unit
and specified on the delivery note.
• If not, please contact your local Siemens sales office to obtain the correct PIN number.
3. Enter the PIN number in parameter U977 and complete your entry by pressing button <P>. This parameter is automatically reset to
0 after the entry is made. Enter the PIN number with care as you only have five attempts.
4. Technology option S00 is now enabled, which can be verified in n978 = 2000.

Technology option S00 can be disabled by entering U997 = PIN - 1 (e.g. for test purposes). Parameter n978 then displays 500. The option
is enabled again by entering U977 = PIN.

Temporary enabling of S00 technology option (free of charge):

The S00 technology option can be enabled once, free of charge, on all converters for 500 hours of use by means of a special PIN
number. This 500-hour period can be used for test purposes or for the operation of replacement units which have been ordered without
the S00 option (i.e. to cover the period until a PIN number for permanent enabling is obtained).
The 500 hours are counted by the hours run counter (r048) , i.e. only the time that the drive is actually switched on is counted. When the
500-hour period has expired, the S00 option is disabled automatically if the PIN number for permanent enabling has not been entered in
the meantime.
The special PIN number is: U977 = 1500 (identical number for all units)
Temporary enabling of the option can be interrupted with PIN U977 = 500. The remaining time credit remains valid for the next period of
use with the temporarily enabling PIN number.
Alarm A059 is output if the time credit is less than 50 hours and the S00 technology option is temporarily enabled.
Fault message F059 is displayed if the time credit of 500 hours has run out and the S00 option is still temporarily enabled.

System response when S00 technology option is not enabled:

The connectors and binectors associated with freely assignable function blocks are not updated (they are set to 0 when the electronics
voltage is connected; when the time credit for temporary enabling has run out, they remain frozen at the last recorded values until the
electronics voltage is disconnected again).
U977 PIN number for S00 option 0 to 65535 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2977) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* This parameter is automatically reset to "0" after entry of the PIN number. Type: O2 Offline
S00 Take care to enter the PIN number correctly. You are only allowed up to 5
attempts!
n978 "S00 enabled" display see column on left Ind: None P052 = 3
(2978) Type: O2
0 The optional S00 technology software is disabled
S00 The time credit for temporary enabling has run out
xxx The optional S00 technology software is not enabled.
xxx = number of credit hours which are still available for use
under temporary enabling PIN number
1xxx The optional SOO technology software is temporarily enabled.
xxx = number of credit hours still available
2000 The optional S00 technology software is permanently enabled.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-181

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)

11.100 Parameter access for experts

U979 Parameter access for experts [SW 1.9 and later] 0 to 2000 Ind: None P052 = 3
(2979) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40
* 999 Parameter access for experts is activated. Type: O2 on-line
This means that even offline parameters can be modified in
operation.
Notes:
The value of this parameter is lost when the electronics power supply is
switched off.
Parameters can be modified only if both P051 and P052 as well as P927
are set to the correct values.

11.101 List of existing and modified U and n parameters

n980 List of existing parameter numbers, continuation Ind: 101 P052 = 3
(2980) Type: O2
Viewing parameter for displaying the first 100 parameter numbers in the U
or n parameter range (numbers 2000 to 2999).
The parameters are arranged in ascending sequence.
The list is continued in the parameter whose number is displayed in index
101. This means, for example,
2981 = n981
The first 0 to be displayed signals that no further parameter numbers are
stored.
n981 List of existing parameter numbers, continuation Ind: 101 P052 = 3
(2981) Type: O2
See n980.
n982 List of existing parameter numbers, continuation Ind: 101 P052 = 3
(2982) Type: O2
See n980.
n983 List of existing parameter numbers, continuation Ind: 101 P052 = 3
(2983) Type: O2
See n980.
n984 List of existing parameter numbers, continuation Ind: 101 P052 = 3
(2984) Type: O2
See n980.
n985 List of existing parameter numbers, continuation Ind: 101 P052 = 3
(2985) Type: O2
See n980.
n986 List of existing parameter numbers, continuation Ind: 101 P052 = 3
(2986) Type: O2
See n980.
n987 List of existing parameter numbers, continuation Ind: 101 P052 = 3
(2987) Type: O2
See n980.
n988 List of existing parameter numbers, continuation Ind: 101 P052 = 3
(2988) Type: O2
See n980.
n989 List of existing parameter numbers, continuation Ind: 101 P052 = 3
(2989) Type: O2
See n980.
n990 List of modified parameters, continuation Ind: 101 P052 = 3
(2990) Type: O2
Viewing parameter for displaying the first 100 modified parameters in the U
or n parameter range (numbers 2000 to 2999).
The parameters are arranged in ascending sequence.
The list is continued in the parameter whose number is displayed in index
101. This means, for example,
2991 = n991
The first 0 to be displayed signals that there are no further modified
parameters.
n991 List of modified parameters, continuation Ind: 101 P052 = 3
(2991) Type: O2
See n990.
n992 List of modified parameters, continuation Ind: 101 P052 = 3
(2992) Type: O2
See n990.

11-182 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
05.2007 Parameter list

PNU Description Value range No. indices See

[Unit] Factory Change
Steps setting (Access /
Type Status)
n993 List of modified parameters, continuation Ind: 101 P052 = 3
(2993) Type: O2
See n990.
n994 List of modified parameters, continuation Ind: 101 P052 = 3
(2994) Type: O2
See n990.
n995 List of modified parameters, continuation Ind: 101 P052 = 3
(2995) Type: O2
See n990.
n996 List of modified parameters, continuation Ind: 101 P052 = 3
(2996) Type: O2
See n990.
n997 List of modified parameters, continuation Ind: 101 P052 = 3
(2997) Type: O2
See n990.
n998 List of modified parameters, continuation Ind: 101 P052 = 3
(2998) Type: O2
See n990.
n999 List of modified parameters, continuation Ind: 101 P052 = 3
(2999) Type: O2
See n990.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76 11-183

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Parameter list 05.2007

11-184 SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions